HP 4600, 4610 n, 4650 Color LaserJet printer Service manual
Below you will find brief information for Color LaserJet printer 4600, Color LaserJet printer 4610n, Color LaserJet printer 4650. The HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer is a high-performance, network-ready color laser printer that delivers professional-quality color printing at speeds up to 24 pages per minute. It features a large, easy-to-use control panel, and a variety of paper-handling options to meet your needs.
advertisement
hp color LaserJet
4600/4610n/4650
service
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer
Service Manual
Copyright
© 2005 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be held liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Part number: Q
3668-90970
Edition 1, 02/2005
Trademarks
Adobe ® , Adobe Photoshop ® , PostScript ® , and the Acrobat logo ® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries/regions.
Corel ® is a trademark of the Corel
Corporation or Corel Corporation Limited.
Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of
Linus Trovalds.
Microsoft ® , Windows ® , and Windows NT ® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
PANTONE
®
is Pantone, Inc's checkstandard trademark for color.
UNIX ® is a registered trademark of the
Open Group.
ENERGY STAR ® is a U.S. registered service mark of the United States
Environmental Protection Agency.
Safety Information
WARNING!
Potential Shock Hazard
Always follow basic safety precautions when using this product to reduce the risk of injury from fire or electric shock.
Table of contents
ENWW iii
Ordering directly through the HP Toolbox software (HP CLJ 4650 only).............................39
3 Installation and configuration
iv ENWW
ENWW
Direct to network (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models)...........................59
Network print server (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models)......................59
Network print server (HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer).....................................61
Peer-to-peer (direct to network, HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models).....62
Windows and Windows NT networks...................................................................64
Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections (USB, HP Color
Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected........................75
Using an ASCII PJL escape sequence to set network security .........................83
v
Replacing the transfer unit when it is not at end of life........................................96
Installing memory and font DIMMs (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) .............................100
Enabling memory (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)........................................102
Enabling the language font DIMM (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)...............103
Checking DIMM installation (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)........................103
Installing memory (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) and fonts (HP Color
Enabling memory (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)......................113
To enable memory for Windows 98, ME, and NT (HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models)......................................................................113
To enable memory for Windows 2000 and XP (HP Color
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)....................................................113
Expanded I/O (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)..............................................131
USB 1.1 connector (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)....................131
Flash (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)............................................................131
vi ENWW
ENWW
Hard-disk accessory (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models)...................131
Firmware DIMM (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) ..........................................132
Flash memory (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)...........................132
Environmental change control (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models). .156
Image density calibration control (DMAX).........................................................156
Image halftone calibration control (DHALF).......................................................157
vii
Cassette detection and cassette paper-size detection......................................162
Cassette detection and cassette paper-size detection......................................172
Installing a new control-panel label (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models).............................190
Multipurpose tray pickup roller and separation pad...........................................197
Environment sensor (HP Color LaserJet 4610n/4650 models only).................202
Developing disengaging motor assembly..........................................................210
viii ENWW
Power-supply fan (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)......................217
Remove the laser/scanner cover plate..............................................220
Remove the laser/scanner retaining bars.........................................222
To remove the laser/scanner assemblies.........................................224
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper- or lower-cassette paper-detection switch...................252
ENWW ix
x
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)..................279
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)......................311
Jams in the duplex path (HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models only) ......................340
Online print-quality troubleshooting tools (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models). .343
HP ImageREt 2400 (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models).....................................347
HP ImageREt 3600 (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)...................347
ENWW
ENWW
@PJL USTATUS JOB=ON/OFF........................................................................365
xi
xii
Embedded Web server (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models only) .......................385
To specify which status messages appear........................................................388
To view status messages and information.........................................................388
RGB samples page (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)...................398
CMYK samples page (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 only).....................399
Diagnostics that put the engine into the special diagnostics mode...................401
View the event log on the control-panel display ...............................................403
Disable cartridge check (special mode test)......................................................404
Paper path sensor test (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)..............404
ENWW
Configure device menu/print quality menu........................................................419
To reset the calibration values for the DC controller.........................................422
Quick Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)..................................423
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models).....................................424
Restoring the Service ID...................................................................426
Converting the Service ID to an actual date.....................................426
ENWW xiii
xiv ENWW
1 Product information
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
●
●
●
●
Identification, site requirements, and specifications
●
●
Environmental product stewardship program
●
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
●
●
Country/region laser safety statements
●
ENWW 1
Model configurations
This manual describes the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models, the HP Color LaserJet 4610n model, and the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models, which are referred to collectively as the HP Color LaserJet
4600 Series printers.
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer
The following figures and table show the configuration for the various models of HP Color
LaserJet 4600 Series printer. The HP Color LaserJet 4600 printer and the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer each come in five models.
1
3
2
Figure 1-1
HP CLJ 4600 Series printers
1
2
3
HP Color LaserJet 4600, 4600n, 4600dn, 4650, 4650n, and 4650dn printer and the HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer
HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn, 4600hdn, and 4650dtn printer
HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer
Table 1-1
HP Color LaserJet 4600 model configurations
Base model: HP Color LaserJet 4600 printer (product number C9660A)
The HP CLJ 4600 printer is the base model, which includes
96 megabytes (MB) of synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM) and one 500-sheet input tray.
Callout 1 in
Figure 1-1 HP CLJ 4600 Series printers shows
the HP Color LaserJet 4600 printer.
2 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
ENWW
Table 1-1
HP Color LaserJet 4600 model configurations (continued)
HP Color LaserJet 4600n printer (product number C9692A) The HP CLJ 4600n printer includes all of the features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect 610n print server (network card).
Callout 1 in
Figure 1-1 HP CLJ 4600 Series printers shows
the HP Color LaserJet 4600n printer.
HP Color LaserJet 4600dn printer (product number C9661A) The HP CLJ 4600dn printer includes all of the features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect 610n print server (network card), automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing), an additional
500-sheet feeder, and 96 MB of SDRAM.
Callout 1 in
Figure 1-1 HP CLJ 4600 Series printers shows
the HP Color LaserJet 4600dn printer.
HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn printer (product number C9662A) The HP CLJ 4600dtn printer includes all of the features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect 610n print server (network card) and automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing), an additional 500-sheet feeder, and 160 MB of SDRAM.
Callout 2 in
Figure 1-1 HP CLJ 4600 Series printers shows
the HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn printer.
HP Color LaserJet 4600hdn printer (product number
C9663A)
The HP CLJ 4600hdn printer includes all of the features of the base model with an HP Jetdirect 610n print server
(network card) and automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing), an additional 500-sheet feeder, a hard disk, and 160 MB of
SDRAM.
Callout 2 in
Figure 1-1 HP CLJ 4600 Series printers shows
the HP Color LaserJet 4600hdn printer.
Table 1-2
HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer
HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer (product number Q7732A) The HP CLJ 4610n includes 128 MB of dual-data-rate
(DDR) SDRAM plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter board for a total of 160 MB of memory.
This model includes a 500-sheet input tray.
The printer also includes an HP Jetdirect 175x external print server that is connected to the USB port. It also has an IEEEcompliant parallel connection.
Callout 1 in Figure 1-1 HP CLJ 4600 Series printers shows
the HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer.
Table 1-3
HP Color LaserJet 4650 model configurations
Base model: HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer (product number Q3668A)
The HP CLJ 4650 printer is the base model, which includes
128 MB of DDR SDRAM, plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter board for a total of 160 MB of memory, and a 500-sheet input tray.
The printer provides three enhanced input/output (EIO) slots, wireless connectivity, an auxiliary port, a universal serial bus (USB) connection, and a standard bidirectional parallel cable interface (IEEE-1284-C compliant).
Callout 1 in Figure 1-1 HP CLJ 4600 Series printers shows
the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer.
Model configurations 3
Table 1-3
HP Color LaserJet 4650 model configurations (continued)
HP Color LaserJet 4650n printer (product number Q3669A) The HP CLJ 4650n printer includes all of the features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect 620n print server (network card).
Callout 1 in
Figure 1-1 HP CLJ 4600 Series printers shows
the HP Color LaserJet 4650n printer.
HP Color LaserJet 4650dn printer (product number Q3670A) The HP CLJ 4650dn printer includes all of the features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect 620n print server (network card) and automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing).
Callout 1 in
Figure 1-1 HP CLJ 4600 Series printers shows
the HP Color LaserJet 4650dn printer.
HP Color LaserJet 4650dtn printer (product number Q3671A) The HP CLJ 4650dtn printer includes all of the features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect 620n print server
(network card), automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing), an additional 500-sheet feeder.
This model has 256 MB of DDR SDRAM, plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter board for a total of 288
MB of memory.
Callout 2 in Figure 1-1 HP CLJ 4600 Series printers shows
the HP Color LaserJet 4650dtn printer.
HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer (product number Q3672A) The HP CLJ 4650hdn printer includes all of the features of the base model plus an HP Jetdirect 620n print server
(network card), automatic 2-sided printing (duplexing), a 2 x
500-sheet feeder, and a hard drive.
This model has 256 MB of DDR SDRAM, plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter board for a total of 288
MB of memory.
Callout 3 in
Figure 1-1 HP CLJ 4600 Series printers shows
the HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer.
4 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Printer features
This printer combines the quality and reliability of HP printing with the following features. For more information about printer features, go to one of the following Web sites:
■ HP Color LaserJet 4600 models: www.hp.com/support/clj4600
■ HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer: www.hp.com/support/clj4610
■ HP Color LaserJet 4650 models: www.hp.com/support/clj4650
Printer features
Table 1-4
Printer features
Feature
Performance
Memory
User interface
Supported printer personalities
Storage features
Description
■ HP Color LaserJet 4600 models: 17 pages per minute (ppm) on letter-sized paper, 16 ppm on A4-sized paper.
■ HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models: 22 ppm on letter-sized and A4-sized paper.
■ All models print on transparencies and glossy paper.
For information about printer memory, see Table 1-1 HP Color
LaserJet 4600 model configurations .
■ Graphical display on the control panel.
■ Enhanced Help with animated graphics.
■ Embedded Web server to gain access to support and to order supplies (on network-connected HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models only).
■ HP CLJ 4650 models: HP LaserJet Toolbox software to provide printer status and alerts, configure printer settings, view documentation and troubleshooting information, and print internal printer information pages.
■ HP PCL 6.
■ HP PCL 5c.
■
PostScript ® 3 emulation (PS).
■ Automatic language switching.
■ HP CLJ 4610n and 4650 models: Portable document format (PDF).
■ Job storage (only for HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models that contain hard disks).
■ Fonts and forms.
■ Personal identification number (PIN) printing (for printers that contain hard disks).
ENWW Printer features 5
Table 1-4
Printer features (continued)
Feature
Environmental features
Fonts
Paper handling
Description
■ PowerSave setting.
■ High content of recyclable components and materials.
■
ENERGY STAR ® compliant.
■ 80 internal fonts are available for both PCL and PostScript emulation.
■ 80 printer-matching screen fonts in TrueType format are available with the software solution.
■ HP Web Jetadmin supports forms and fonts on the disk.
■ Prints on media from 77 mm x 127 mm (3 inches x 5 inches) up to legal size (216 mm x 355 mm; 8.5 inches x 14 inches).
■ HP Color LaserJet 4600 models: Prints on media of weights from
60 g/m
2
to 176 g/m
2
(16 lb to 47 lb).
■ HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models: Prints on media of weights from 60 g/m 2 to 199 g/m 2 (16 lb to 53 lb).
■ Prints on a wide range of media types including glossy, labels, overhead transparencies, and envelopes.
■ Accepts multiple gloss levels.
■ Includes a 500-sheet input tray (tray 2) that supports letter-, legal-, executive-, JIS B5-, A4-, A5-, and custom-size media.
■ An optional 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3) that supports letter-, legal-, executive-, JIS B5-, A4-, A5-, and custom-size media (the tray is standard on HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn, 4600hdn, and 4650dtn printers).
NOTE
The optional 500-sheet paper feeder is available only for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models.
■ An optional 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3/tray 4) that supports letter-, legal-, executive-, JIS B5-, 16K-, A4-, A5-, and custom-size media (the tray is standard on the HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer).
NOTE
The 2 x 500-sheet feeder is available only for the
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models.
■ Includes built-in 2-sided printing on the HP Color LaserJet 4600dn,
4600dtn, 4600hdn, 4650dn, 4650dtn, and 4650hdn printers (not included with the HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer).
■ Includes a 250-sheet face-down output bin.
6 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
ENWW
Table 1-4
Printer features (continued)
Feature
Accessories
Connectivity
Description
■ Printer hard disk, which provides storage for fonts and macros as well as job storage. To determine if your model contains a hard disk,
NOTE
The hard disk is standard on the HP Color LaserJet
4600hdn and 4650hdn printers. It is not available for the
HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer.)
■ HP CLJ 4600 models: Dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).
■ HP CLJ 4610n and 4650 models: 32 MB CompactFlash memory
(with firmware).
■ Printer stand.
■ Optional 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3) that supports letter-, legal-, executive-, JIS B5-, A4-, A5-, and custom-size media.
NOTE
The feeder is standard on HP Color LaserJet
4600dtn, 4600hdn, and 4650dtn printers. It is not available for the HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer.
■ HP CLJ 4650 models: Optional 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (tray
3/4) that supports letter-, legal-, executive-, JIS B5-, A4-, A5-, and custom-size media.
NOTE
The feeder is standard on the HP Color LaserJet
4650hdn printer. It is not available for the HP CLJ 4600 models or the HP CLJ 4610n printer.
■ HP CLJ 4600 models: Fast InfraRed (FIR) pod.
■ HP CLJ 4610n model: One 200-pin DDR SDRAM slot for upgrading the printer memory. The DDR SDRAM memory is available in 128,
256, and 512 MB modules.
■ HP CLJ 4650 models: Two 200-pin DDR SDRAM slots. One slot is available for adding memory to the printer. The DDR SDRAM memory is available in 128 and 256 MB modules.
■ Optional enhanced input/output (EIO) network card.
NOTE
The network card is standard on HP Color LaserJet
4600n, 4600dn, 4600dtn, 4600hdn, 4650n, 4650dn,
4650dtn, and 4650hdn printers. It is not available for the
HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer.
■ Fast InfraRed (FIR) connection (HP CLJ 4600 models only).
■ HP Web Jetadmin software ( www.hp.com/go/wegjetadmin_software) .
■ Standard bidirectional parallel cable interface (IEEE-1284 compliant).
■ HP CLJ 4650 models: Auxiliary connector.
■ HP CLJ 4610n and 4650 models: USB 1.1 connection.
Printer features 7
Table 1-4
Printer features (continued)
Feature
Supplies
Description
NOTE
HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models: Both
USB and parallel connections are supported, but they cannot be used at the same time.
■ A supplies-status page contains information about toner level, page count, and estimated pages remaining.
■ Cartridges feature a no-shake design.
■ The printer checks for authentic HP print cartridges at cartridge installation.
■ HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models: Internet-enabled supplyordering capabilities (by using the embedded Web server).
8 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Printer assemblies
HP Color LaserJet 4600 models
Figure 1-2
Front view, HP Color LaserJet 4600 models
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Output bin
Printer control panel
Top cover
Front cover (includes tray 1)
Tray 2 (500-sheet standard tray)
Tray 3 (500-sheet paper feeder; optional)
On/off switch
Access to print cartridge, transfer unit, and fuser
ENWW
Figure 1-3
Back view, HP Color LaserJet 4600 models
1 Output bin
Printer assemblies 9
4
5
6
2
3
7
8
On/off switch
Tray 3 500-sheet paper feeder (optional)
EIO connections (3 total)
Memory access
Fast InfraRed (FIR) connection
Parallel connection
Power connection
HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer
1
2
3
6
4
5
7
Figure 1-4
Front view, HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer
3
4
5
1
2
6
7
Output bin
Printer control panel
Top cover
Front cover (includes tray 1)
Tray 2 (500–sheet standard tray)
Access to print cartridges, transfer unit, and fuser
On/off switch
10 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Figure 1-5
Back view, HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer
1
2
3
Output bin
Parallel connection
On/off switch
4
5
Memory access
1.1 USB connection
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models
ENWW
Figure 1-6
Front view, HP Color LaserJet 4650 models
3
4
5
6
1
2
Output bin
Printer control panel
Top cover
Front cover (includes tray 1)
Tray 2 (500-sheet standard tray)
Access to print cartridges, transfer unit, and fuser
Printer assemblies 11
7
8
On/off switch
Tray 3/tray 4 (optional)
NOTE
The optional 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3) and the optional 2 x 500-sheet input tray
(tray 3 and tray 4) cannot be installed in the printer at the same time.
Figure 1-7
Back view, HP Color LaserJet 4650 models
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
Output bin
Auxiliary connector
Parallel connection
On/off switch
EIO connection (3 total)
Memory access
1.1 USB connection
Tray 3/tray 4 (optional)
12 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Identification, site requirements, and specifications
The following sections describes printer identification, site requirements, and specifications.
Model and serial numbers
The model number and serial numbers are listed on identification labels located on the rear of the printer. The model number is alphanumeric, such as C9660A for an HP Color LaserJet 4600 printer.
The serial number contains information about the country/region of origin, the printer version, production code, and the production number of the printer.
NOTE
This manual describes the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer, including the HP
Color LaserJet 4600 models, the HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer, and the HP Color LaserJet
4650 models.
country/region of origin printer version model (product) number production number production code
Hewlett-Packard
11311 Chinden Blvd.
Boise, Idaho 83704
U.S.A.
50/60 Hz. 115V
Model No.: Q3668
Serial No.: JPBB605112
Assembled in U.S.A. printer engine made in Japan
Figure 1-8
Model and serial number label
Model name
HP Color LaserJet 4600
HP Color LaserJet 4650
HP Color LaserJet 4600n
HP Color LaserJet 4610n
HP Color LaserJet 4650n
HP Color LaserJet 4600dn
HP Color LaserJet 4650dn
HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn
HP Color LaserJet 4650dtn
HP Color LaserJet 4600hdn
HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn
Product/model number
C9660A
Q3668A
C9692A
Q7732A
Q3669A
C9661A
Q3670A
C9662A
Q3671A
C9663A
Q3672A
ENWW Identification, site requirements, and specifications 13
Power and regulatory label
The identification labels on the rear of the printer also contain power-rating and regulatory information.
CAUTION
Converting the voltage on the printer can damage the printer. Do not use any voltage other than the operating voltage. Any attempt to convert operating voltages will void the product warranty (for example, attempting to change a 110 V printer to a 220 V printer).
Figure 1-9
Power and regulatory label
Site requirements
The printer must be kept in an appropriate location to maintain the performance level that has been set at the factory. In particular, be sure that the environment adheres to the specifications listed in this chapter.
The following are recommendations for the printer location and placement.
14 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Make sure that the printer installation location has the following attributes:
■ A well-ventilated, dust-free area
■ A hard, level surface (with not more than a 2° angle)
■ For the HP Color LaserJet 4600, 4600n, and 4600dn, the surface must support at least 37 kg
(81 lb).
■ For the HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn and 4600hdn, the surface must support at least 44 kg
(97 lb).
■ For the HP Color LaserJet 4610n, the surface must support at least 36 kg (80 lb).
■ For the HP Color LaserJet 4650, 4650n, and 4650dn, the surface must support at least 36 kg
(80 lb).
■ For the HP Color LaserJet 4650dtn, the surface must support at least 44 kg (97 lb).
■ A level surface that supports all four corners of the printer
■ A constant temperature and humidity (not near water sources, humidifiers, air conditioners, refrigerators, or other major appliances).
CAUTION
The HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn must not be installed on an elevated surface.
Always install the HP CLJ 4650hdn printer on a hard, level floor.
Make sure to keep the printer away from the following environmental features:
■ Direct sunlight, dust, open flames, or water
■ The direct flow of exhaust from air ventilation systems
■ Magnets and devices that emit a magnetic field
■ Areas that experience vibration
■ Walls or other objects
ENWW Identification, site requirements, and specifications 15
Space requirements
The HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers must have the following clearance space.
Figure 1-10
Space requirements for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer (except for the
HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn/4600hdn/4650dtn/4650hdn printer)
1
2
3
530 mm (20.9 inches)
1294 mm (50.9 inches)
804 mm (31.7 inches)
NOTE
More vertical space is required for models that have additional trays.
Figure 1-11
Space requirements for the HP Color LaserJet 4650hdn printer
1 530 mm (20.9 inches)
16 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
ENWW
2
3
1294 mm (50.9 inches)
1373 mm (54.1 inches)
Physical specifications
Product
HP Color LaserJet
4600, 4600n, 4600dn,
4610n, 4650, 4650n, and 4650dn printers
HP Color LaserJet
4600dtn, 4600hdn, and 4650dtn printers
HP Color LaserJet
4650hdn printer
Height
566 mm
(22.3 inches)
654 mm
(25.7 inches)
1035 mm
(40.7 inches)
Depth
480 mm
(18.9 inches)
480 mm
(18.9 inches)
645 mm
(25.4 inches)
Width
456 mm
(18.0 inches)
456 mm
(18.0 inches)
460 mm
(18.1 inches)
Weight
37 kg (81.6 lbs)
44 kg (97.0 lbs)
66 kg (146.6 lbs)
Electrical specifications
WARNING!
Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold.
Do not convert operating voltages. This can damage the printer and void the product warranty.
Table 1-5
Power requirements for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models
Item
Power requirements
Rated current
110-volt models
100–127 V (-10%, +6%)
50/60 Hz (+/-2 Hz)
6 amps
220-volt models
220–240 V (-10%, +6%)
50/60 Hz (+/-2 Hz)
3 amps
Table 1-6
Power requirements for the HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models
Item
Power requirements
Rated current
110-volt models
100–127 V (+/-10%)
50/60 Hz (+/-2 Hz)
6 amps
220-volt models
220–240 V (+/-10%)
50/60 Hz (+/-2 Hz)
3 amps
Identification, site requirements, and specifications 17
Table 1-7
Power consumption, average (in watts)
Ready
Product model
Product model
Printing
HP Color LaserJet
4600 models (110 volt models)
HP Color LaserJet
4600 models (220 volt models)
HP Color LaserJet
4610n and 4650 models (except HP
Color LaserJet
4650hdn printer)
HP Color LaserJet
4650hdn printer
426 W
430 W
560 W
560 W
34 W
36 W
38 W
40 W
PowerSave
30 W
32 W
26 W
31 W
Off
0 W
0 W
0.3 W
0.3 W
2
3
4
1 Values are subject to change. See
www.hp.com/support/clj4610 , or
for current information. The PowerSave default activation time is 30 minutes.
Power reported is highest value measured for color and monochrome printing using all standard voltages.
Default time from Ready mode to PowerSave = 30 minutes.
Maximum heat dissipation for all models in Ready mode = 137 BTU/Hour.
Environmental specifications
Specification
Temperature
Humidity
Altitude
Recommended
17 to 25°C (62.6 to 77°F)
30 to 70% relative humidity (RH) not applicable
Allowed
10 to 30°C (50 to 86°F)
10 to 80% RH
0 to 2600 m (0 to 8530 ft)
Acoustic emissions
Sound Power Level
Active (22 ppm letter)
Declared Per ISO 9296
L
WAd
=6.5 Bels (A) [65 dB (A)]
Idle
SPL - Bystander Position
L
WAd
=5.0 Bels (A) [50 dB (A)]
Declared Per ISO 9296
Active (22 ppm letter) L pAm
=51 dB (A)
1
Idle
L pAm
=34 dB (A)
Values are subject to change. See
www.hp.com/support/clj4610 , or
for current information. The PowerSave default activation time is 30 minutes.
18 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Supply storage requirements
The life of supplies is greatly affected by their storage environment. Use storage requirements to determine the shelf life of stored supplies.
Table 1-8
Supply storage requirements
Item
Temperature
Storage time
Normal (maximum of 2.5 years)
Severe (maximum of 18 days)
Maximum temperature change rate
Storage condition
0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F)
High 35° to 40°C (95° to 104°F)
Low 0° to -20°C (32° to -4°F)
40° to 15°C (104° to 59°F) within 3 minutes
Humidity Normal (maximum of 2.5 years)
Severe (maximum of 18 days)
-20° to 25°C (-4° to 77°F) within 3 minutes
35% to 85% RH
High 85% to 95% RH
Low 10% to 35% RH
1
Atmospheric pressure 460 to 760 mm Hg (18.1 to 29.9 inches
Hg)
Storage time
2.5 years
The average storage time includes use time. Use cartridges within 2.5 years of the date code on the cartridge.
ENWW Identification, site requirements, and specifications 19
Print media
The following sections describe print media that can be used in the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer.
Print-media specifications
For optimum results, use conventional 75-g/m
2
(20-lb) photocopy paper. Verify that the paper is of good quality and is free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, curls, or bent edges.
■ To order supplies in the U.S., go to www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies .
■ To order supplies worldwide, go to www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html
.
■ To order accessories, go to www.hp.com
.
■ For additional information about supported media weights and sizes, go to www.hp.com/support/ ljpaperguide .
The following table contains information about the types of print media that are supported for the various paper-handling features.
Table 1-9
Supported media specifications
Tray
Tray 1
Supported media Media specifications
Paper
A4/Letter, Legal, Executive,
JIS, B5, A5, Custom
Minimum size: 76 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 in) Maximum size: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Transparencies
HP Color LaserJet 4600
models: 60 to 176 g/m to 47 lb)
HP Color LaserJet 4610n
and 4650 models: 60 to
199 g/m 2 (16 to 53 lb)
0.13 mm (5 mil)
2 (16
A4/Letter
Glossy film
A4/Letter, Legal, Executive,
JIS, B5, A5, Custom
0.13 mm (5 mil)
Minimum size: 76 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 in) Maximum size: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Glossy paper
75-g/m 2 to 120-g/m 2 (20-lb to
32-lb)
A4/Letter, Legal, Executive,
JIS, B5, A5, Custom
Minimum size: 76 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 in) Maximum size: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Envelopes
Com10, Monarch, C5, DL, B5
Maximum weight: 105-g/m 2
(28-lb bond)
Capacity
100 sheets of 75-g/m 2 (20lb) paper. Do not load more than the maximum stack height of 10 mm (0.6 in)
Maximum stack height of
10 mm (0.6 in)
Maximum stack height of 10 mm (0.6 in) maximum stack height of
10 mm (0.6 in)
Limit of 20
20 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
ENWW
Table 1-9
Supported media specifications (continued)
Tray Supported media
Tray 2 (included for all models)
Optional tray 3 (available for the HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models)
Optional tray 3/tray4 (the 2 x
500-sheet paper feeder is only available for the
Labels
A4/Letter, Legal, Executive,
JIS, B5, A5, Custom
Minimum size: 76 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 in). Maximum size:
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Paper
A4/Letter, Legal, Executive,
JIS, B5, A5, Custom
Minimum size: 148 x
210 mm (5.8 x 8.2 in).
Maximum size: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Transparencies A4/Letter
Media specifications Capacity
Do not load more than the maximum stack height of
10 mm (0.6 in)
60- to 105-g/m 2 (16- to 28-lb) 500 sheets of 75-g/m 2 (20– lb) paper. Maximum stack height of 50 mm (2 inches)
0.13 mm (5 mil) Limit of 100 sheets
Glossy film
A4/Letter, Legal, Executive,
JIS, B5, A5, Custom
Minimum size: 148 x
210 mm (5.8 x 8.2 in).
Maximum size: 216 x
356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Glossy paper
A4/Letter, Legal, Executive,
JIS, B5, A5, Custom
0.13 mm (5 mil)
75-g/m
2
to 120-g/m to 32-lb)
2
(20-lb
Duplex printing
Minimum size: 148 x
210 mm (5.8 x 8.2 in).
Maximum size: 216 x
356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Paper, glossy paper
A4/Letter, Legal, Executive,
JIS, B5, A5, Custom
75-g/m 2 to 28-lb)
to 105-g/m 2 (20-lb
1
2
3
Custom paper sizes are not supported for 2-sided printing.
Tray 1 only.
Tray 2, tray 3, and tray 3/tray 4 do not support the range of custom sizes that tray 1 does.
Tray 2, tray 3, and tray 3/tray 4 use custom size, specifically for B5 ISO.
Limit of 100 sheets
Limit of 200 sheets
NOTE
Use only HP-supported transparencies (HP part number C2934A, Letter size;
C2936A, A4 size).
Print media 21
Media to avoid
This printer can handle many types of media. Using media outside the printer's specifications will cause a loss of print quality and increase the incidence of jams.
■ Do not use paper that is too rough.
■ Do not use paper that contains cutouts or perforations other than standard three-hole punched paper.
■ Do not use multipart forms.
■ Do not use paper that has already been printed on or fed through a photocopier or printer.
■ Do not use paper that contains a watermark if you are printing solid patterns.
Media that can cause damage to the printer
In rare circumstances media can damage the printer. To prevent possible damage, do not use the following media:
■ Do not use paper that is embossed or coated unless it is specifically recommended for use in this printer.
■ Do not use paper that contains irregularities such as tabs or staples.
■ Do not use letterhead paper that was produced by using low temperature dyes or thermography.
Preprinted forms or letterhead must use inks that can tolerate 190°C (374°F) for 0.1 second.
■ Do not use any media that produces hazardous emissions, or that melts, offsets, or discolors when exposed to 190°C (374°F) for 0.1 second.
■ Do not use transparencies that are designed for use with Inkjet printers or other low-temperature printers. Use only transparencies that are specified for use with HP Color LaserJet printers.
22 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
ENWW
Printing on special media
Use these guidelines when printing on special types of media.
■
For optimum results, use conventional 75-g/m 2 (20-lb) xerographic paper.
■ Verify that the paper is of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, curls, or bent edges.
NOTE
Special media such as envelopes, transparencies, custom-size paper, or media that is heavier than 120-g/m 2 should be fed only from tray 1.
To print on any special media, use the following procedure.
1 Load the media in a tray.
2 When the printer prompts you for the paper type, select the correct media type for the media that is loaded in the tray. For example, select HIGH GLOSS (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only) when loading high-gloss laser paper.
3 In the software program or the printer driver, set the media type to match the media type that is loaded in the tray.
NOTE
For the best print quality, always verify that the media type that is selected on the printer control panel and the media type that is selected in the software program or printer driver match the type of media that is loaded in the tray.
Transparencies
When printing on transparencies, use the following guidelines:
■ Handle transparencies by the edges. Oils from your fingers that are deposited on the transparency can cause print-quality problems.
■ Use only overhead transparencies that are recommended for use in this printer. Hewlett-Packard
Company recommends using HP Color LaserJet Transparencies with this printer. HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results.
■ In either the software program or the driver, select TRANSPARENCY as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for transparencies.
CAUTION
Transparencies that are not designed for LaserJet printing will melt in the printer, causing damage to the printer.
Table 1-10
Printing on transparencies
Description
Electrical surface resistivity
Fusing compatibility
Caliper (thickness)
Specifications
2.0 to 15 ohms by 10 ohms per square inch.
Materials must not discolor, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions when heated to 190ºC (374ºF) for 0.1
second.
0.12 mm (0.0048 inch) to 0.13 mm (0.0052 inch).
Print media 23
Glossy paper
■ In either the software program or the driver, select GLOSSY, HEAVY, or HIGH GLOSS (HP
Color LaserJet 4650 models only) as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for glossy paper.
■ Use the control panel to set the media type to GLOSSY for the input tray that is being used.
■ Because this setting affects all print jobs, return the printer to its original settings after the job has printed.
NOTE
Hewlett-Packard Company recommends using HP Color LaserJet High Gloss paper with the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer. HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results. If HP Color LaserJet High Gloss paper is not used with the printer, print quality might be compromised.
Colored paper
■ Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white xerographic paper.
■ Pigments used must be able to withstand the printer’s fusing temperature of 190°C (374°F) for
0.1 second without deterioration.
■ Do not use paper that contains a colored coating that was added after the paper was produced.
■ The printer creates colors by printing patterns of dots, overlaying and varying their spacing to produce various colors. Varying the shade or color of the paper will affect the shades of the printed colors.
Printing images
To obtain the best print quality when printing images, use HP High Gloss Laser Paper (Q2419A). In either the software program or the driver, select GLOSSY, HEAVY, or HIGH GLOSS (HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models only) or print from a tray that is configured for glossy paper.
■ In either the software program or the printer driver, select HIGH GLOSS IMAGES (HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models only) as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for glossy paper.
■ You can also configure the printer by using settings on the printer control panel.
Envelopes
NOTE
Envelopes can be printed on only from tray 1. Set the tray media size to the specific envelope size.
Adhering to the following guidelines will help ensure high-quality printing on envelopes and help prevent printer jams:
■ Do not load more than 20 envelopes into tray 1.
■
The weight-rating of envelopes should not exceed 105 g/m
2
(28-lb bond).
■ Envelopes should be flat.
24 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
ENWW
■ Do not use envelopes that contain windows or clasps.
■ Envelopes must not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
■ Envelopes that include peel-off adhesive strips must use adhesives that can withstand the heat and pressures of the printer’s fusing process.
■ Envelopes should be loaded face-down, with the postage-end feeding into the printer first.
Labels
NOTE
To print on labels, set the tray media type to LABELS on the printer control panel.
When printing on labels, use the following guidelines:
■ Verify that the adhesive material on the labels can tolerate 190°C (374°F) for 0.1 second.
■ Verify that no adhesive material is exposed between the labels. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause printer jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to printer components.
■ Do not refeed a sheet of labels.
■ Verify that the labels lie flat.
■ Do not use labels that are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged.
Heavy paper
The following heavy paper types can be used with the HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models.
Paper type
Heavy
Extra heavy
Cardstock
Intermediate
Tough paper
Paper weight
105- to 120-g/m 2
28- to 32-lb
120- to 163-g/m 2
32- to 43-lb
163- to 199-g/m 2
43-to 53–lb
90- to105-g/m 2
24- to 28-lb
5 mil
44- lb
Print media 25
When printing on heavy paper types, use the following guidelines:
■
Use tray 1 for paper that is heavier than 120 to 199 g/m 2 (32- to 53-lb bond).
■ For optimum results when printing on heavy paper, use the printer control panel to set the media type for the tray to HEAVY.
■ In either the software program or the driver, select HEAVY as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for heavy paper.
■ Because this setting affects all print jobs, return the printer to its original settings after the job has printed.
CAUTION
In general do not use paper that is heavier than the media specification recommended for this printer. Doing so can cause misfeeds, paper jams, reduced print quality, and excessive mechanical wear.
HP LaserJet Tough paper
When printing on HP LaserJet Tough paper, use the following guidelines:
■ Handle HP LaserJet Tough paper by the edges. Oils from your fingers that are deposited on HP
LaserJet Tough paper can cause print-quality problems.
■ Use only HP LaserJet Tough paper with this printer. HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results.
■ In either the software program or the driver, select TOUGH PAPER as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for HP LaserJet Tough paper.
Preprinted forms and letterhead
Observe the following guidelines for best results with preprinted forms and letterhead:
■ Forms and letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant inks that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the printer’s fusing temperature of approximately 190°C (374°F) heat for 0.1 second.
■ Inks must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect any printer rollers.
■ Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage.
■ Before loading preprinted paper such as forms and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off of preprinted paper.
■ When using the duplex printing setting (HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models only), load pre-printed forms and letterhead into tray 2 and tray 3 with the front of the page facing down and the top edge of the page towards the back of the printer. To load preprinted forms and letterhead into tray 1, load them with the front of the page facing up and the bottom edge feeding into the printer first.
26 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Recycled paper
This printer supports the use of recycled paper. Recycled paper must meet the same specifications as standard paper. See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. The Hewlett-Packard
Company recommends that recycled paper contain no more than 5% ground wood.
ENWW Print media 27
32
36
39
40
24
27
28
29
16
17
20
21
54
58
65
43
45
47
51
53
66
67
70
72
Weight equivalence table
The weight equivalence table shows equivalent weights for different grades of paper. A boldface type value indicates a commonly available standard weight for that grade.
NOTE
Text and book grades marked with an asterisk (*) actually calculate to 51, 61, 71, and
81 but are rounded to standard book or text weights of 50, 60, 70, and 80.
Table 1-11
Weight equivalence table
Bond weight
(17 x 22 in)
Cover weight
(20 x 26 in)
67
75
82
83
50
55
58
61
33
35
42
44
113
120
135
90
94
97
105
110
138
140
146
150
55
62
67
68
41
45
49
50
27
29
34
36
93
98
111
74
77
80
86
90
114
115
120
123
44
50
55
55
33
37
39
41
22
24
28
30
75
80
90
60
63
65
70
74
92
94
98
100
80*
90
100
101
60*
68
70*
74
43
50*
54
Text/Book weight
(25 x 38 in)
41
137
146
165
110
115
119
128
134
169
171
178
183
Bristol weight
(22.5 x 28.5 in)
Index weight
(25.5 x 30.5 in)
Tag weight
(24 x 36 in)
Metric weight
135 g/m
2
148 g/m2
150 g/m
2
163 g/m2
170 g/m
2
176 g/m2
190 g/m
2
199 g/m 2
203 g/m 2
216 g/m 2
244 g/m 2
250 g/m
2
253 g/m 2
264 g/m 2
271 g/m 2
60 g/m
2
64 g/m
2
75 g/m
2
80 g/m
2
90 g/m
2
100 g/m
2
105 g/m
2
110 g/m
2
120 g/m
2 74
83
91
92
55
61
65
68
37
39
46
49
125
133
150
100
104
108
117
122
154
155
162
166
28 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Environmental product stewardship program
Protecting the environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on the environment.
Ozone production
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O
3
).
Power consumption
Power usage drops significantly while in PowerSave mode, which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this printer. As an ENERGY STAR ® partner, Hewlett-
Parkard has determined this product meets the ENERGY STAR ® for energy efficiency.
ENWW
ENERGY STAR ® is a U.S. registered service mark of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR ® partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has determined that this product meets
ENERGY STAR ® Guidelines for energy efficiency. For more information, see www.energystar.gov
.
Paper use
This product’s optional, automatic, duplex feature (two-sided printing, and N-up printing (multiple pages printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources.
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams have markings according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.
HP LaserJet printing supplies
In many countries/regions, this product’s printing supplies (print cartridges, fuser, and transfer unit) can be returned to HP through the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program. An easy-touse and free take back program is available in over 48 countries/regions. Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package.
HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program Information
Since 1990, the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program has collected millions of used
LaserJet print cartridges that otherwise might have been discarded in the world's landfills. The HP
LaserJet print cartridges and supplies are collected and bulk-shipped to our resource and recovery partners, who disassemble the cartridges. After a thorough quality inspection, selected parts are
Environmental product stewardship program 29
reclaimed for use in new cartridges. Remaining materials are separated and converted into raw materials for use by other industries to make a variety of useful products.
■ U.S. returns—For a more environmentally responsible return of used cartridges and supplies,
HP encourages the use of bulk returns. Simply bundle two or more cartridges together and use the single, pre-paid, and pre-addressed UPS label that is supplied in the package. For more information in the U.S., call 800-340-2445 or visit the HP LaserJet Supplies Web site at www.hp.com/go/recycle .
■ Non-U.S. recycling returns—Non-U.S. customers should call the local HP Sales and Service
Office or visit the www.hp.com/go/recycle Web site for further information regarding availability of the HP Supplies Returns and Recycling Program.
Recycled paper
This product can use recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP
LaserJet Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN 12281:2002.
Material restrictions
This product does not contain batteries.
This product does not contain added mercury.
This product contains lead in solder that might require special handling at end-of-life.
For recycling information, contact www.hp.com/go/recycle , contact your local authorities, or go to the
Electronics Industries Alliance Web site www.eiae.org
.
.
For more information
Go to www.hp.com/go/environment or www.hp.com/hpinfo/community/environment for more information about HP’s environmental programs, including information about the following topics:
■ Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products
■ HP’s commitment to the environment
■ HP’s environmental management system
■ HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program
■ Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
30 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
HP product
HP Color LaserJet 4600/4650, 4600n/4610n/4650n,
4600dn/4650dn, 4600dtn/4650dtn, and 4600hdn/4650hdn printer
Duration of Limited Warranty
One-year limited warranty
HP warrants HP hardware, accessories, and supplies against defects in materials and workmanship for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or like-new.
HP warrants that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software media which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, customer will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use.
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND
NO OTHER WARRANTY, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT ARE THE CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS
INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF
DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT
OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND; THE WARRANTY
TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED,
DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY
STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
The warranty period begins on the date of the delivery or on the date of installation if installed by HP.
If customer schedules or delays HP installation more than 30 days after delivery, warranty begins on the 31st day from delivery.
ENWW Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement 31
Declaration of conformity
Declaration of conformity
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014
Manufacturer’s Name:
Manufacturer’s Address:
Hewlett-Packard Development Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard,
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares that the product
Product Name:
Regulatory Model Number:
Model Number:
4
HP Color LaserJet 4600/4600n/4600dn/4600dtn/4600hdn printers 1
HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer 1
HP Color LaserJet 4650/4650n/4650dn/4650dtn/4650hdn printers 1
BOISB-0304-00
C9660A, C9692A, C9661A, C9662A, C9663A
Q7732A
Q3668A, Q3669A, Q3670A, Q3671A, Q3672A
Including
C9664A 500-sheet paper feeder
Q3673A - Optional 500-Sheet Input Tray
Product Options: conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Q3674A - Optional 2 x 500-Sheet Input Tray
All
Safety: IEC 60950:1999 / EN60950:2000
EMC:
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1:1997 +A2:2001 / EN60825-1:1994 +A11:1996 +A2:2001 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)
GB4943-2001
CISPR 22:1997 / EN 55022:1998 Class B 1, 3
EN 61000-3-2:1995 / A14
EN 61000-3-3:1995 / A1
EN 55024:1998
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B 1 / ICES-003, Issue 3
GB9254-1998, GB17625.1-1998
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly:
1
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
3 The product includes LAN (Local Area Network) options. When the interface cable is attached to LAN connectors, the product meets the requirements of EN55022 Class A in which case the following applies: "Warning - This is a class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures".
4 For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number(s).
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
32 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Declaration of conformity
29 January, 2004
For regulatory topics only:
Australia Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia, Ltd., 31-41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130,
Australia,
European Contact:
USA Contact:
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard Gmbh, Department HQ-TRE/Standards
Europe, Herrenberger Straße 140, Böblingen, D-71034, Böblingen, (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143),
Product Relations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160,Boise, Idaho 83707-0015,
USA, (Phone: 208-396-6000),
ENWW Declaration of conformity 33
Country/region laser safety statements
Canadian DOC regulations
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.
« Conforme à la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques. «CEM».»
EMI statement (Korea)
VCCI statement (Japan)
34 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
Laser Statement for Finland
Luokan 1 laserlaite
Klass 1 Laser Apparat
HP Color LaserJet 4600/4650, 4600/4610n/4650n, 4600/4650dn, 4650dtn, 4650hdn laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti.
VAROITUS!
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING!
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP Color LaserJet 4650, 4650n, 4650dn, 4650dtn, 4650hdn -kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.
VARO!
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING!
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 775-795 nm
Teho 5 m W
Luokan 3B laser
Japan power-cord statement
ENWW Japan power-cord statement 35
36 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW
2 Service approach
This chapter provides information about the following topics:
●
●
●
●
Ordering related documentation and software
ENWW 37
Service approach
Printer repair normally begins by using the printer's internal diagnostics and the following three-step process.
1
Isolate the problem to the major system (for example, the host computer, the network or server, or the printer system).
2
Determine if the problem is located in the accessories or in the printer engine.
3
Troubleshoot the problem by using the procedures in chapter 7.
After you locate a faulty part, the printer can usually be repaired at the assembly level by replacing field replaceable units (FRUs). Some mechanical assemblies might need to be repaired at the subassembly level. Hewlett-Packard does not support replacement of components on the printer circuit assembles.
38 Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW
Parts and supplies
Field replaceable and accessory part numbers are contained in chapter 8 of this manual. Order replacement parts from Hewlett-Packard Customer Support-Americas (HPCS-A) or Hewlett-Packard
Customer Support-Europe (HPCS-E).
CAUTION
Use only accessories specifically designed for this printer. Accessories can be ordered from an authorized service or support provider.
Ordering parts, supplies, and accessories over the Internet
To order supplies in the US, contact www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies . To order supplies worldwide, see www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html
. To order accessories, see www.hp.com
.
Ordering directly through the embedded Web server (for printers with network connections)
NOTE
This section applies to the HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models only.
Use the following steps to order printing supplies directly through the embedded Web server.
1
In the Web browser on the computer, type the IP address for the printer. The printer status window appears. Or, go to the URL provided in the alert email.
2
Click Other Links.
3
Click Order Supplies. The browser opens to a page in which you can choose to send information about the printer to HP. You also have the option to order supplies without sending the printer information to HP.
4
Select the part numbers you want to order and follow the instructions on the screen.
Ordering directly through the HP Toolbox software (HP CLJ 4650 only)
The HP Toolbox software gives you the ability to order supplies directly from the computer. Two things are necessary to use this feature:
■ The HP Toolbox software must be installed on your computer. (It is automatically installed as part of the typical software installation.)
■ You must have access to the World Wide Web.
1
At the bottom right of the screen (in the system tray), click the hp Toolbox icon. The software opens in a Web browser. (Or, on the Start menu, select Programs, and then select HP CLJ
4650 HP Toolbox.)
2
On the left side of the window, click Other Links.
3
Click Order Supplies. The browser opens to the supplies purchasing page.
4
Select the supplies you want to order.
ENWW Parts and supplies 39
Exchange program
HP offers remanufactured assemblies for some parts. These are identified in chapter 8 and can be ordered from Hewlett-Packard Customer Support-Americas (HPCS-A) or Hewlett-Packard Customer
Support-Europe (HPCS-E).
Supplies
Paper and print cartridges can be ordered directly from Hewlett-Packard. See chapter 8 for ordering information.
World Wide Web
In the U.S., obtain printer drivers, updated HP printer software, and product and support information from one of the following URLs:
■ www.hp.com/support/clj4600
■ www.hp.com/support/clj4610
■ www.hp.com/support/clj4650
Printer drivers can be obtained from the following sites:
Table 2-1
Web sites for downloading printer drivers
In China
In Japan
In Korea
In Taiwan ftp://www.hp.com.cn/support/clj4600 ftp://www.hp.com.cn/support/clj4610 ftp://www.hp.com.cn/support/clj4650 ftp://www.jpn.hp.com/support/clj4600 ftp://www.jpn.hp.com/support/clj4610 ftp://www.jpn.hp.com/support/clj4650 www.hp.co.kr/support/clj4600 www.hp.co.kr/support/clj4610 www.hp.co.kr/support/clj4650 www.hp.com.tw/support/clj4600 www.hp.com.tw/support/clj4610 www.hp.com.tw/support/clj4650 or the local driver Web site: www.dds.com.tw
HP Service Parts Information
Parts identification and pricing information can also be found on the World Wide Web at www.hp.com/ go/hpparts .
40 Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW
HP customer care
Online services
For 24-hour access to information using a modem or Internet connection:
World Wide Web URL: for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers, updated HP printer software, product and support information, and printer drivers in several languages can be obtained from www.hp.com/support/clj4600 , www.hp.com/support/clj4610 , or www.hp.com/support/clj4650 . (Sites are in English.)
Visit www.hp.com/support/net_printing for information about the HP Jetdirect 4650 external print server.
HP Instant Support Professional Edition (ISPE) is a suite of Web-based troubleshooting tools for desktop computing and printing products. ISPE helps you quickly identify, diagnose, and resolve computing and printing problems. The ISPE tools are available at www.instantsupport.hp.com
.
Telephone support
HP provides free telephone support during the warranty period. When you call, you will be connected to a responsive team waiting to help you. For the telephone number for your country/region, see the flyer that shipped in the box with the product, or visit www.hp.com/support/callcenters . Before calling
HP, have the following information ready: product name and serial number, date of purchase, and description of the problem.
You can also find support on the Internet at www.hp.com
. Click the support & drivers block.
Software utilities, drivers, and electronic information
Visit http://www.hp.com/go/clj4600_software , for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 model www.hp.com/go/ clj4610_software for the HP Color LaserJet 4610n model, or www.hp.com/go/clj4650_software for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models. The Web page for the drivers might be in English, but you can download the drivers themselves in several languages.
See the flyer that shipped in the box with the printer for phone-contact information.
HP service information
To locate HP-Authorized Dealers, call 800-243-9816 (U.S.) or 800-387-3867 (Canada). For service for your product, call the customer support number for your country/region. See the flyer that shipped in the box with the printer.
HP service agreements
Call 800-835-4747 (U.S.) or 800-268-1221 (Canada).
For extended Service call, 800-446-0522
HP Toolbox (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only)
To check the printer status and settings and to view troubleshooting information and online documentation, use the HP Toolbox. You can view the HP Toolbox when the printer is directly connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network. A complete software installation is necessary in order to use the HP Toolbox.
ENWW HP customer care 41
HP support and information for Macintosh computers
Visit www.hp.com/go/macosx for Macintosh OS X support information and HP subscription service for driver updates.
Visit www.hp.com/go/mac-connect for products designed specifically for the Macintosh user.
Ordering related documentation and software
The following table lists part numbers for related documentation and software.
Description
HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide
HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator's Guide
PCL/PJL Technical Reference Package
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series Getting Started Guide
HP Color LaserJet 4650 Series Getting Started Guide
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series Service Manual
NOTE
This service manual includes the HP Color LaserJet 4600, 4610n, and 4650 model printers.
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer Service and Support CD-ROM
HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer User Guide
For downloadable versions, go to www.hp.com/support/clj4610 . When connected, select manuals.
HP Color LaserJet 4650 User Guide
For downloadable versions, go to www.hp.com/support/clj4650 . When connected, select manuals.
Part Number
5963-7863
See the CDROM that came with the printer, or visit www.hp.com
5021-0330
C9660-90902
Q3668-90902
Q7732-90901
Q3668-60105
Q7732–90902
Q3668-90909
42 Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW
3 Installation and configuration
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
●
●
●
●
Installing the print cartridges
●
Installing a new overlay (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
●
Installing a new control-panel label (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
●
●
●
●
●
Software for Macintosh computers
●
Installing the printing system software
●
●
●
●
●
●
Embedded Web server (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models only)
●
Setting network security on the printer
ENWW 43
Unpacking the printer
NOTE
Save all the packing materials in case you need to repack and transport the printer at a later date.
WARNING!
The HP Color LaserJet 4600/4610/4650 Series printer weighs approximately 36 kg (80 lb). HP recommends having two or more people lift or move the printer.
1
Do not cut the straps. Open the top flaps of the packing box. Detach the straps from the top flaps and lay them on the floor.
44 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
2
Lift the box frame up and off of the printer.
ENWW
3
HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models only: If the printer has an optional 500-sheet paper feeder, it is packaged on top of the printer. Lift the 500-sheet paper feeder from the package, and place it in the prepared location.
Unpacking the printer 45
4
Remove the shipping blocks, accessory packs, and inner cardboard frame that surround the printer.
5
Lift the printer from the packaging pallet and place it in the prepared location.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to lift the printer by yourself. At least two people must lift the printer and place it in the prepared location. While two people can lift the printer, using three or four people to lift the printer is a much easier and safer way to move the printer.
46 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
ENWW
6
If you are using an optional 500-sheet paper feeder (HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models only) or a
2 x 500-sheet feeder (HP CLJ 4650 models only), align the printer with the guide pins on top of the paper feeder (the optional 500-sheet paper feeder is shown in the following illustration).
NOTE
While two people can lift the printer, at least one other person should be available to help position the printer on an optional paper feeder if one is installed.
7
Remove the packing tape from the front and rear of the printer.
Unpacking the printer 47
8
Using the side handles, open the top cover. Firmly lift the two green handles (one on each side of the fuser). Lift the fuser cover completely, and pull on either of the orange tabs to remove the orange fuser packing tape and plastic shipping locks. Close the fuser cover.
CAUTION
Make sure that you remove all of the packing materials to avoid damage to the printer when the power is turned on.
9
Open the front cover and remove the packing tape from the transfer unit. Close the front cover and the top cover.
48 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Installing the media tray
1
Remove the tray from the printer. Push the media lift plate down until it locks. Remove the cardboard from the tray.
CAUTION
You must push the media lift plate down until it locks every time you open the tray. Jams will result if the media lift plate is not locked in the down position.
2
Adjust the rear length guide by squeezing the guide adjustment latch and sliding the back of the tray to the length of the media being loaded. Slide the width guides to the appropriate size.
3
Load media face-up. Make sure that the front corners of the media fit under the front corner tabs.
4
Slide the media input tray straight into the slot at the bottom of the printer.
ENWW Installing the media tray 49
Connecting power
1
Plug the ac power cord into the printer and into the power outlet.
2
Turn the printer on.
Installing the print cartridges
1
Open the top cover. Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull down. The front cover will open as you pull down the transfer unit.
CAUTION
Do not place anything on the transfer unit while it is open. If the transfer unit is punctured, print quality problems can result.
50 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
ENWW
2
Grasp both sides of the cartridge and distribute the toner by gently rocking the cartridge from side to side.
3
Remove the tape from the orange shipping lock. Remove and discard the orange shipping lock.
4
Remove the inside sealing tape by pulling the orange loop on the end and pulling the tape completely out. Discard the tape.
Installing the print cartridges 51
5
Grasp the blue handles on the sides of the print cartridge. Insert the print cartridges, starting with the bottom cartridge, in the correct position (C = cyan, Y = yellow, M = magenta, K = black).
6
Close the transfer unit and front cover. Close the top cover. After a short while, the Ready message should appear on the control-panel display.
52 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Installing a new overlay (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
NOTE
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer control panel is available in English only. You do not need to install an overlay or a label for this model. For HP CLJ 4650 models, see
Installing a new control-panel label (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Some printer models are shipped without the control-panel overlay installed, or you might prefer using a different overlay from the one that is installed. Overlays are available for several languages, and you can change the languages for control-panel messages. If you are setting up a printer for a language other than English, follow this procedure.
1
Open the top cover. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release the locking tabs on either side of the control-panel overlay, and then remove the overlay.
2
Position the new overlay over the top of the control panel. Insert the left tab of the overlay into the slot on the printer face. Line up the tab on the right side of the overlay with the slot on the right side of the control panel. Set the overlay in place by pushing down on the overlay near the blue button.
3
Press to open the MENUS.
4
Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
5
Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
6
Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
7
Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
8
Press to highlight LANGUAGE.
9
Press to select LANGUAGE.
10
Press to highlight the appropriate language, and then press to select and save the language choice.
ENWW Installing a new overlay (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) 53
Installing a new control-panel label (HP Color LaserJet
4650 models)
NOTE
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer control panel is available in English only. You do not need to install an overlay or a label for this model. For HP CLJ 4600 models, see
Installing a new overlay (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
.
Some printer models are shipped without the control panel labels installed or you might prefer using a different label from the one that is installed. Labels are available for several languages, and you can change the language for control-panel messages. If you are setting up a printer for a language other than English, follow this procedure.
1
Remove the backing from the adhesive side of the label.
2
Position the new label over the top of the control panel.
3
Press the label firmly down onto the control panel.
NOTE
When applying the label, start at the center and press the label into place towards the edges of the control panel.
4
Press MENU to open the MENUS.
5
Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
6
Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
7
Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
8
Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
9
Press to highlight LANGUAGE.
10
Press to select LANGUAGE.
11
Press to highlight the appropriate language, and then press to select and save the language choice.
54 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Testing the printer operation
Print a configuration page to ensure that the printer is working correctly.
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3
Press to select INFORMATION.
4
Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION.
5
Press to select PRINT CONFIGURATION.
ENWW Testing the printer operation 55
Using PowerSave
The adjustable PowerSave Time feature reduces power consumption when the printer has been inactive for an extended period. You can set the length of time before the printer goes into
PowerSave mode (PowerSave settings vary depending on the model of printer that you have).
NOTE
The printer control-panel display dims when the printer is in PowerSave mode.
PowerSave mode does not affect printer warm-up time.
To set PowerSave Time
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3
Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4
Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5
Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6
Press to highlight POWERSAVE TIME.
7
Press to select POWERSAVE TIME.
8
Press or to select the appropriate time period.
9
Press to set the time period.
10
Press P
AUSE
/R
ESUME
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and
4650 models).
To turn PowerSave on or off
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3
Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4
Press to highlight RESETS.
5
Press to select RESETS.
6
Press to highlight POWERSAVE.
7
Press to select POWERSAVE.
8
Press or to select ON or OFF.
9
Press
to set the selection.
10
Press P
AUSE
/R
ESUME
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and
4650 models).
56 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Connecting to a computer
HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models support network and parallel connections at the same time.
NOTE
Factory settings support automatic switching between the parallel port and one or more network connections on the printer (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models only).
For the HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer, you can connect to a network by using an HP Jetdirect
175x external print server. Connect the print server to either the USB port or the parallel port. USB and parallel connections cannot be used at the same time.
Parallel connections
NOTE
HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models: You cannot use the parallel connection and the USB connection at the same time.
To establish a parallel connection, connect the printer to the computer by using a bidirectional parallel cable (IEEE-1284-C). Plug that connector into the printer's parallel port. The cable can be a maximum of 10 meters (30 feet) long.
When used to describe a parallel interface, the term bidirectional indicates that the printer is able to both receive data from the computer and send data to the computer through the parallel port.
Figure 3-1
Parallel port connection (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
ENWW
Figure 3-2
Parallel port connection (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
Connecting to a computer 57
NOTE
To use the enhanced capabilities of the bidirectional parallel interface, ensure that the most recent printer driver is installed. These enhanced capabilities include bidirectional communication between the computer and printer, faster transfer of data, and automatic configuration of printer drivers.
USB configuration (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
This printer supports a USB 1.1 connection. The port is located on the back of the printer, as shown in
Figure 3-3 USB connection . You must use an A-to-B type USB cable.
NOTE
USB support is not available for computers running Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0.
You cannot use the parallel connection and the USB connection at the same time.
Figure 3-3
USB connection
1
2
USB connector
USB port
Auxiliary connection configuration (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
This printer supports an auxiliary connection for paper-handling input devices. The port is located on the back of the printer, as shown in the following figure.
58 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
ENWW
Figure 3-4
Auxiliary connection
Network connections
Use one of the following procedures to establish the appropriate connection to the network.
Direct to network (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models)
Connect one end of the network cable to the RJ-45 port on the HP Jetdirect print server card.
Connect the other end to the network.
Figure 3-5
Direct to network connection
Network print server (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models)
Connect one end of a network cable into the server. Connect the other end to the network. Connect one end of a second network cable to the printer and the other end to the network.
Connecting to a computer 59
Figure 3-6
Network print server connection
60 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Network print server (HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer)
Connect one end of a network cable to the server. Connect the other end to the network hub
(callout 1). Connect one end of a second network cable to the HP Jetdirect 175x external print server
(callout 2). Connect the other end to the network hub (callout 1). Connect one end of a USB cable to the HP Jetdirect 175x external print server (callout 2). Connect the other end of the USB cable to the printer.
ENWW Connecting to a computer 61
Peer-to-peer (direct to network, HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models)
Connect one end of a network cable to the computer. Connect the other end to the network. Connect one end of a second network cable to the printer and the other end to the network.
Figure 3-7
Peer-to-peer connection (direct to network)
Peer-to-peer (parallel)
Connect two or more computers to the network hub by using network cables. Connect one end of a parallel cable to the printer. Connect the other end to a computer.
Figure 3-8
Peer-to-peer connection (parallel)
Enhanced I/O (EIO) configuration
The HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 printer models come equipped with three enhanced input/ output (EIO) slots. The three EIO slots hold compatible external devices such as the HP Jetdirect print server network cards or other devices. Plugging EIO network cards into the slots increases printer capabilities.
The EIO network cards can maximize printer performance when you are printing from a network.
They also provide the ability to place the printer anywhere on a network. This eliminates the need to
62 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
ENWW attach the printer directly to a server or a workstation and allows you to place the printer closer to the network users.
If the printer is configured through an EIO network card, configure that card through the printer control-panel Configure device menu.
HP Jetdirect print servers
HP Jetdirect print servers (network cards) can be installed in one of the printer EIO slots on
HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models printers. The HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer can connect to a network by using the HP Jetdirect 175x external print server. These print servers support multiple network protocols and operating systems. HP Jetdirect print servers facilitate network management by allowing you to connect a printer directly to your network at any location. HP Jetdirect print servers also support the simple network management protocol (SNMP), which network managers can use for remote printer management and troubleshooting through HP Web Jetadmin software.
NOTE
A network administrator should install these cards and configure the network.
Configure the card either through the printer control panel or by using HP Web Jetadmin software.
NOTE
See the HP Jetdirect print server documentation for information about which external devices or EIO network cards are supported.
Available enhanced I/O interfaces
HP Jetdirect print servers (network cards) provide software solutions for the following interfaces:
■ Novell NetWare
■
Microsoft ® Windows ® and Windows NT ® networks
■ Apple Mac OS (LocalTalk)
■
UNIX ® (HP-Ux and Solaris)
■ Linux (Red Hat and SuSE)
■ Internet printing
For a summary of available network software solutions, see the HP Jetdirect Print Server
Administrator's Guide, or visit HP Customer Care online at www.hp.com/support/net_printing .
NetWare networks
When using Novell NetWare products with an HP Jetdirect print server, Queue Server mode provides better printing performance than does Remote Printer mode. The HP Jetdirect print server supports Novell Directory Services (NDS) as well as bindery modes. For more information, see the
HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator's Guide.
NOTE
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer supports only Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
For Windows 95, 98, Millenium Edition (Me), NT 4.0, 2000, and XP systems, use the printer installation utility for printer setup on a NetWare network.
Connecting to a computer 63
Windows and Windows NT networks
For Windows 95, 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, and XP systems, use your printer installation utility for printer setup on a Microsoft Windows network. The utility supports printer setup for either peer-topeer or client-server network operation.
NOTE
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer supports only Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
AppleTalk networks
Use the HP LaserJet Utility to set up the printer on an EtherTalk or LocalTalk network. For more information, see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator's Guide that is included with printers equipped with the HP Jetdirect print server.
LocalTalk configuration
Use LocalTalk interface to print directly from a standalone Macintosh computer or from a Macintosh computer on a LocalTalk network. For specific information about configuring the computer and printer to print through a LocalTalk interface, see the printer getting started guide and the
HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator's Guide.
NOTE
For LocalTalk configuration, the DIN-8 printer cable must be connected to the printer port on the Macintosh computer.
LocalTalk network configuration
To connect the printer to a Macintosh computer on a LocalTalk network, use the HP LocalTalk Cable
Kit (part number, J4135A). You will need a kit for each printer and an additional kit for each
Macintosh computer on the network.
UNIX and Linux networks
Use the HP Jetdirect printer installer for UNIX utility to set up the printer on HP-UX or Sun Solaris networks.
For setup and management on UNIX or Linux networks, use HP Web Jetadmin.
To obtain HP software for UNIX and Linux networks, visit HP Customer Care online at www.hp.com/ support/net_printing . For other installation options that the HP Jetdirect print server supports, see the
HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator's Guide that is included with printers equipped with the
HP Jetdirect print server.
Wireless printing
Wireless networks offer a safe, secure, and cost-effective alternative to traditional wired network connections.
IEEE 802.11b standard
By using the wireless HP Jetdirect 802.11b external print server, HP peripherals can be placed anywhere in the office or home and connected to a wireless network running Microsoft, Apple,
Netware, UNIX, or Linux network operating systems. This wireless technology provides a high-quality
64 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
ENWW printing solution without the physical constraints of wiring. Peripherals can be conveniently placed anywhere in an office or home and can be easily moved without changing network cables.
Installation is easy with the HP Install Network Printer Wizard.
HP Jetdirect 802.11b print servers are available for USB and parallel connections.
Bluetooth
NOTE
Bluetooth wireless technology
1
is not supported for the Macintosh operating system.
Bluetooth wireless technology 1 is a low-power, short-range radio technology that can be used to wirelessly connect computers, printers, personal digital assistants (PDAs), cell phones, and other devices.
Unlike infrared technology, Bluetooth’s reliance on radio signals means that devices do not have to be in the same room, office, or cubicle or have an unobstructed line of sight in order to communicate.
This wireless technology increases portability and efficiency within business network programs.
HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer models use a Bluetooth adapter (hp bt1300) to incorporate Bluetooth wireless technology. The adapter is available for either USB or parallel connections. The adapter has a 10-meter operation range in the 2.5 GHz ISM band and can achieve data transfer rates up to 723
Kbps. The device supports the following Bluetooth profiles:
■ Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP)
■ Serial Port Profile (SPP)
■ Object Push Profile (OPP)
■ Basic Imaging Profile (BIP)
■ Basic Printing Profile (BPP) with xHTML-Print
1
The Bluetooth trademarks are owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard company under licence.
Connecting to a computer 65
Printer drivers
The optimal way to control the printer is by establishing settings in a software program or through the printer driver. Changing print settings in a software program affects only that particular print job. In most software programs, you can select print settings from menus within the program. Software program settings and printer driver settings override the settings on the printer control panel.
For best print quality, always use the printer driver to select the paper or media type. Different media types use different printer settings. For example, selecting transparencies in the driver causes the printer to use a color table that is designed for the best print quality on transparencies. Selecting transparencies also causes the printer to adjust printer speed and fuser temperature. Selecting heavy or glossy media for example, causes the printer to change the engine speed.
The printer driver also gives you customized control of color text, graphics, and photos. Use the printer driver to set the following color control options for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers:
See the printer driver online Help for details about color settings and how they affect printed output.
■ Print in Grayscale
■ Halftone options
■ Neutral Grays
■ Edge Control
■ RGB Color
For the HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models only, you can also set the following options:
■
Driver Autoconfiguration
The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers for Windows and the PS drivers for Windows 2000 and Windows XP feature automatic discovery and driver configuration for printer accessories at the time of installation. Some accessories that the Driver Autoconfiguration supports are the duplexing unit, optional paper trays, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs). If the environment supports bidirectional communication, the installer presents Driver
Autoconfiguration as an installed component by default for a Typical Installation and for a
Custom Installation.
■
Update now
If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 4610n or 4650 printer since installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication. Click the Update Now button to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver.
NOTE
The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows NT
4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows XP hosts.
■
HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that can be used to customize and distribute HP software in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP
Driver Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP printer drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment.
66 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
ENWW
For more information, see the HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide, which is available at www.hp.com/support/clj4600 , www.hp.com/support/clj4610 , or www.hp.com/support/clj4650 .
Go to the appropriate Web site and use your browser
Find function to search for “HP Driver
Preconfiguration” (do not use the quotation marks) to find the link to driver preconfiguration information.
Available drivers
Printer drivers allow you to gain access to the printer features and allow the computer to communicate with the printer (by using a printer language). Check the installation notes and Readme files on the printer CD-ROM for additional software and languages.
The following printer drivers are included with the printer. The most recent drivers are available at www.hp.com/go/clj4600_software , www.hp.com/go/clj4610_software , or www.hp.com/go/ clj4650_software . Depending on the configuration of Windows-based computers, the installation program for the printer software automatically checks the computer for Internet access to obtain the latest drivers.
Operating system
Windows 98, Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
PCL 6
x x x
PCL 5c
Web only
Web only
Web only
PS
x x x
PPD x x x
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
x x
Web only
Web only x x x x
1
2
Macintosh OS
x x
Not all features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the online Help in the driver for available features.
PostScript Printer Description files.
NOTE
If your system did not automatically check the Internet for the latest drivers during software installation, download them from www.hp.com/support/clj4600_software , www.hp.com/support/clj4610_software , or www.hp.com/support/clj4650_software .
You can obtain Model Scripts for UNIX and Linux by downloading them from the Internet. See the support flyer that came in the printer box.
OS/2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS/2.
NOTE
If the printer driver you want is not on the printer CD-ROM or is not listed here, check the installation notes and Readme files to see if the printer driver is supported. If it is not supported, contact the manufacturer or distributor of the program you are using and request a driver for the printer.
Printer drivers 67
Additional drivers
The following drivers are not included on the CD-ROM, but are available from the Internet or from HP
Customer Care.
■ PCL 5c printer drivers for Windows 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, XP, and Server 2003
NOTE
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer supports only Windows 2000 and Windows
XP.
■ OS/2 PCL 5c/6 printer driver
■ OS/2 PS printer driver
■ UNIX model scripts
■ Linux drivers
■ HP Open VMS drivers
NOTE
The OS/2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS/2. They are not available for Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, Korean, or Japanese languages.
Select the right printer driver for your needs
Select a printer driver based on the way that you use the printer. Certain printer features are available only in the PCL 6 drivers. See the printer driver Help for available features.
■ Use the PCL 6 driver to take full advantage of printer features. For general office printing, the
PCL 6 driver is recommended to provide optimum performance and print quality.
■ Use the PCL 5c driver (available on the Web only) if backward compatibility with previous PCL printer drivers or older printers is necessary.
■ Use the PS driver if you are printing primarily from PostScript-specific programs such as Adobe and Corel, for compatibility with PostScript Level 3 needs, or for PS font DIMM support.
NOTE
The printer automatically switches between PS and PCL printer languages.
Printer driver Help
Each printer driver has Help screens that can be activated by using the Help button, the F1 button on the computer keyboard, or a question-mark symbol in the upper-right corner of the printer driver
(depending on the Windows operating system used). These Help screens give detailed information about the specific driver. Printer driver Help is separate from your program Help.
68 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Software for Macintosh computers
The HP installer provides PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog Extensions
(PDEs), and the HP LaserJet Utility for use with Macintosh computers.
The embedded Web server can be used by Macintosh computers if the printer is connected to a network.
PPDs
Use PPDs, in combination with the Apple PostScript drivers, to gain access to the printer features and to allow the computer to communicate with the printer. An installation program for the PPDs,
PDEs, and other software is provided on the CD-ROM. Use the appropriate PS driver that comes with the operating system.
HP LaserJet Utility
Use the HP LaserJet Utility to control features that are not available in the driver. The illustrated screens make selecting printer features easier than ever. Use the HP LaserJet Utility to do the following:
■ Name the printer, assign it to a zone on a network, and download files and fonts.
■ Configure and set the printer for Internet protocol (IP) printing.
NOTE
The HP LaserJet Utility is not currently supported for OS X, but the utility is supported for the Classic environment.
ENWW Software for Macintosh computers 69
Installing the printing system software
The following sections contain instructions for installing the printing system software.
The printer comes with printing system software and printer drivers on a CD-ROM. The printing system software on the CD-ROM must be installed in order to take full advantage of the printer features.
If you do not have access to a CD-ROM drive, you can download the printing system software from the Internet at www.hp.com/go/clj4600_software , www.hp.com/go/clj4610_software , or www.hp.com/ go/clj4650_software .
NOTE
Sample model scripts for UNIX (HP-UX, Sun Solaris) and Linux networks are available for download at www.hp.com/support . For more information about UNIX model scripts, go to http://www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts . For more information about Linux drivers , go to http://www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting .
You can download the latest software free of charge at www.hp.com/go/clj4600_software , www.hp.com/go/clj4610_software , or www.hp.com/got/clj4650_software .
Installing Windows printing system software for direct connections
NOTE
Only the HP LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models support the USB cable connection described in this section.
This section explains how to install the printing system software for Microsoft Windows 98, Windows
Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP.
NOTE
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer supports only Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
When installing the printing software in a direct-connect environment, always install the software before connecting the parallel or USB cable. If the parallel or USB cable was connected before the software installation, see
Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected .
Either a parallel or USB cable can be used for the direct connection. However, you cannot connect both the parallel and USB cable at the same time. Use an IEEE 1284-C cable or a standard 2-meter
USB cable.
NOTE
Windows NT 4.0 does not support USB cable connections for the HP Color LaserJet
4650 models.
70 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
ENWW
To install the printing system software
1 Close all software programs that are open or running.
2 Insert the printer CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
If the welcome screen does not open, start it by using the following procedure:
● On the Start menu, click Run.
● Type the following: x:\setup (where x is the letter of the CD-ROM drive).
● Click OK.
3 When prompted, click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4 Click Finish when the installation has been completed.
5 You might need to restart the computer.
6 Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and Readme files on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to www.hp.com/support/clj4600 , www.hp.com/support/clj4610 , or www.hp.com/support/clj4650 for help or more information.
Installing Windows printing system software for networks
The software on the printer CD-ROM supports network installation with a Microsoft network. For network installation on other operating systems, go to www.hp.com/support/clj4600 , www.hp.com/ support/clj4610 , or at www.hp.com/support/clj4650 .
The HP Jetdirect print server that is included with the HP LaserJet 4650n, HP LaserJet 4650dn, or
HP LaserJet 4650dtn printer has a 10/100 Base-Tx network port. If you need an HP Jetdirect print server with another type of network port, go to www.hp.com/support/clj4600 , www.hp.com/support/ clj4610 , or www.hp.com/support/clj4650 .
The installer does not support printer installation or printer object creation on Novell servers. It supports only direct-mode network installations between Windows computers and a printer. To install your printer and create objects on a Novell server, use an HP utility (such as HP Web Jetadmin or
HP Install Network Printer Wizard) or a Novell utility (such as NWadmin).
Installing the printing system software 71
To install the printing system software
1
If you are installing the software on Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows XP, make sure that you have administrator privileges.
NOTE
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer supports only Windows 2000 and Windows
XP.
2
Make sure that the HP Jetdirect print server is configured correctly for the network by printing a configuration page. On the second page, locate the printer IP address. You might need this address to complete network installation.
NOTE
For the HP Color LaserJet 4610n, print a configuration page for the HP Jetdirect
175x external print server. See the information that came with the HP Jetdirect 175x external print server for instructions.
3
Close all software programs that are open or running.
4
Insert the printer CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
If the welcome screen does not open, start it by using the following procedure:
a
On the Start menu, click Run.
b
Type the following: x:\setup (where x is the letter of the CD-ROM drive).
c
Click OK.
5
When prompted, click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
6
Click Finish when the installation has been completed.
7
You might need to restart the computer.
8
Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.
NOTE
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and
Readme files on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to www.hp.com/support/clj4600 , www.hp.com/support/clj4610 , or at www.hp.com/support/ clj4650 for help or more information.
To set up Windows-sharing to use the printer on a network
If the printer is directly connected to a computer with a parallel cable, you can share the printer on the network so that other network users can print to it.
See your Windows documentation to make Windows-sharing available. After the printer is shared, install the printer software on all computers that share the printer.
Installing Macintosh printing system software for networks
This section describes how to install Macintosh printing system software. The printing system software supports Apple Mac OS version 9.1.x and later.
72 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
ENWW
The printing system software includes the following components:
■
PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files
The PPDs, in combination with the Apple PostScript printer drivers, provide access to printer features. An installation program for the PPDs and other software is provided on the CD-ROM that came with the printer. Use the appropriate PS driver that comes with the operating system.
■
HP LaserJet Utility
The HP LaserJet Utility provides access to features that are not available in the printer driver.
Use the illustrated screens to select printer features and complete the following tasks with the printer:
■ Name the printer.
■ Assign the printer to a zone on the network.
■ Assign an IP to the printer.
■ Download files and fonts.
■ Configure and set the printer for IP or AppleTalk printing.
NOTE
The HP LaserJet Utility is not currently supported for OS X, but the utility is supported for the Classic environment.
To install printer drivers from Mac OS 9.1x and later
1 Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.
2 Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The CD-ROM menu runs automatically. If the CD-
ROM menu does not run automatically, double-click the CD-ROM icon on the desktop, and then double-click the Installer icon. This icon is located in the Installer/<language> folder of the Starter
CD-ROM (where <language> is your language preference). For example, the Installer/English folder contains the Installer icon for the English printer software.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4 Open the Apple Desktop Printer Utility located in the {Startup Disk}:Applications: Utilities folder.
5 Double-click Printer (AppleTalk).
6 Next to AppleTalk Printer Selection, click Change.
7 Select the printer, click Auto Setup, and then click Create.
8 On the Printing menu, click Set Default Printer.
NOTE
The icon on the desktop will appear to be generic. All the print panels appear in the
Print dialog box in a program.
Installing the printing system software 73
To install printer drivers from Mac OS X 10.x
1 Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port.
2 Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The CD-ROM menu runs automatically. If the CD-
ROM menu does not run automatically, double-click the CD-ROM icon on the desktop, and then double-click the Installer icon. This icon is located in the Installer/<language> folder of the Starter
CD-ROM (where <language> is your language preference). (For example, the Installer/English folder contains the Installer icon for the English printer software.)
3 Double-click the HP LaserJet Installers folder.
4 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
5 Double-click the Installer icon for the appropriate language.
6 On your computer hard drive, double-click Applications, Utilities, and then Print Center.
7 Click Add Printer.
8 Select the AppleTalk connection type in OS X 10.1 and the Rendezvous connection type in
OS X 10.2.
9 Select the printer name.
10 Click Add Printer.
11 Close the Print Center by clicking the close button in the upper-left corner.
NOTE
Macintosh computers cannot be connected directly to the printer by using a parallel port.
Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections (USB, HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models only)
NOTE
Macintosh computers do not support parallel port connections.
This section explains how to install the printing system software for Mac OS 9.x and later.
The Apple LaserWriter driver must be installed to use the PPD files. Use the Apple LaserWriter 8 driver that came with your Macintosh computer.
To install the printing system software
1
Connect a USB cable between the USB port on the printer and the USB port on the computer.
Use a standard 2-meter USB cable.
2
Close all software programs that are open or running.
3
Insert the printer CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and run the installer.
The CD-ROM menu runs automatically. If the CD-ROM menu does not run automatically, doubleclick the CD-ROM icon on the desktop, and then double-click the Installer icon. This icon is located in the Installer/<language> folder of the Starter CD-ROM (where <language> is your language preference).
4
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
74 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
ENWW
5
Restart the computer.
6
For Mac OS 9.x and later:
a
From HD/Applications/Utilities, open the Apple Desktop Printer Utility.
b
Double-click Printer (USB).
c
Next to USB Printer Selection, click Change.
d
Select the printer, click Auto Setup, and then click Create.
e
Click the Desktop Printer Icon that was just created.
f
On the Printing menu, click Set Default Printer.
For Mac OS X: From HD/Applications/Utilities/Print Center, start the Print Center. If the printer does not set up automatically, do the following:
a
Click Add Printer.
b
From within the printer list, select USB as the connection type.
c
Select the printer and then click Add in the lower-left corner.
7
Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.
NOTE
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, see the installation notes or
Readme files on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to www.hp.com/support/clj4600 , www.hp.com/support/clj4610 , or www.hp.com/support/clj4650 for help or more information.
NOTE
The icon on the desktop will appear to be generic. All the print panels appear in the
Print dialog box in a program.
Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected
NOTE
Only the HP LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models support the USB cable connection described in this section.
If you have already connected a parallel or USB cable to a Windows computer, the New Hardware
Found dialog box appears when you turn on the computer.
To install the software for Windows 98 or Windows Me (HP CLJ 4650 only)
1 In the New Hardware Found dialog box, click Search CD-ROM drive.
2 Click Next.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4 Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.
Installing the printing system software 75
NOTE
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and Readme files on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to www.hp.com/support/clj4600 , www.hp.com/support/clj4610 , or www.hp.com/support/ clj4650 for help or more information.
To install the software for Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows 2003
1 In the New Hardware Found dialog box, click Search.
2 On the Locate Driver Files screen, select the Specify a Location check box, click to clear all of the other check boxes, and then click Next.
3 Type the letter for the root directory. For example, X:\ (where "X:\" is the letter of the root directory on the CD-ROM drive).
4 Click Next.
5 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
6 Click Finish when the installation has been completed.
7 Select a language and follow the instructions on the computer screen.
8 Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.
NOTE
If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and Readme files on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to www.hp.com/support/clj4600 , www.hp.com/support/clj4610 , or www.hp.com/support/ clj4650 for help or more information.
76 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Network configuration
Use the information in this section to configure the printer for use in a network.
Configuring the printer for the network
You can configure certain network parameters on the printer from the printer control panel or, for most networks, from the HP Web Jetadmin software (or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh). HP
Web Jetadmin software is available at www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin_software .
For a complete list of supported networks and for instructions to configure network parameters from software such as HP Web Jetadmin, see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Software Installation Guide.
The guide comes on the CD-ROM with printers in which an HP Jetdirect 610N print server is installed.
Configuring Novell NetWare frame type parameters
The HP Jetdirect 610N (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models), the HP Jetdirect 175x external print server
(HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer), or the HP Jetdirect 620N (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) print server automatically selects a NetWare frame type. Select a frame type manually only when the print server selects an incorrect frame type. To identify the frame type that the print server selected, print a configuration page.
ENWW Network configuration 77
Software for networks
For a summary of available HP network installation and configuration software solutions, see the HP
Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide. You can find this guide on the CD-ROM included with the printer.
HP Web Jetadmin
Use HP Web Jetadmin to manage HP Jetdirect connected printers within your intranet by using a browser. HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool, and should be installed only on a single network administration server. It can be installed and run on Red Hat Linux; Suse Linux;
Windows NT 4.0 Server (not available for the HP CLJ 4610n printer) and Workstation; Windows
2000 Professional, Server, and Advanced Server; and Windows XP Professional Service Pack 1 systems.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems, visit HP Customer Care Online at www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin_software .
When installed on a host server, any client can open HP Web Jetadmin through a supported Web browser (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and 6.0 or Netscape Navigator 7.0).
HP Web Jetadmin has the following features:
■ The task-oriented user interface provides configurable views, saving network managers significant time.
■ Customizable user profiles let network administrators include only the function that is viewed or used.
■ Instant e-mail notification of hardware failure, low supplies, and other printer problems can be routed to different people.
■ Remote installation and management is available from anywhere by using only a standard Web browser.
■ Advanced autodiscovery locates peripherals on the network, without manually entering each printer into a database.
■ The software accommodates simple integration into enterprise management packages.
■ You can quickly find peripherals based on parameters such as IP address, color capability, and model name.
■ You can easily organize peripherals into logical groups, with virtual office maps for easy navigation.
■ You can manage and configure multiple printers at one time.
For the latest information about HP Web Jetadmin go to www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin .
78 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
UNIX
The HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for UNIX is a simple printer installation utility for HP-UX and Solaris networks. It is available for download from HP Customer Care Online at www.hp.com/support/ net_printing .
Utilities
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers are equipped with several utilities that make them easy to monitor and manage on a network.
ENWW UNIX 79
Embedded Web server (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models only)
This printer is equipped with an embedded Web server that provides access to information about printer and network activities. A Web server provides an environment in which Web programs can run, in much the same way that an operating system, such as Windows, provides an environment in which programs can run, on your computer. The output from these programs can then be viewed in a
Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
When a Web server is "embedded," it resides on a hardware device (such as a printer) or in firmware, rather than being available as software that is loaded on a network server.
The advantage of an embedded Web server is that it provides an interface to the printer that anyone who has a network-connected computer or a standard Web browser can use. There is no special software to install or configure. For more information about the HP embedded Web server, see the
Embedded Web Server User Guide. You can find this guide on the CD-ROM that is included with the printer.
Features
Use the HP embedded Web server to view printer and network card status and manage printing functions from your computer. With the HP embedded Web server, you can do the following:
■ View printer status information.
■ Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones.
■ View and change tray configurations.
■ View and change the printer control-panel menu configuration.
■ View and print internal pages.
■ Receive notification of printer and supplies events.
■ Add or customize links to other Web sites.
■ Select the language in which to show the embedded Web server pages.
■ View and change network configuration.
HP Toolbox (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only)
The HP Toolbox is a software program that can be used for the following tasks:
■ Check the printer status.
■ View troubleshooting information.
■ View online documentation.
■ Print internal printer pages.
You can view the HP Toolbox when the printer is directly connected to your computer or when it is connected to a network. You have to perform a complete software installation before you can use the
HP Toolbox.
80 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
Other components and utilities
Several software programs are available for Windows and Macintosh users, as well as for network administrators. These programs are summarized in the following table.
Windows Macintosh OS
■ Software installer — automates the printing system installation
■ Online Web registration
■ HP Toolbox (HP Color LaserJet
4650 models only)
■ PostScript Printer Description files
(PPDs) — for use with the Apple
PostScript drivers that comes with the Mac OS
■ HP LaserJet Utility (available from the Internet) — a printer management utility for Mac OS users
■ HP Toolbox (for Mac OS X V10.2
and later; HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only)
Network administrator
■ HP Web Jetadmin — a browserbased system management tool.
See www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin for the latest HP Web Jetadmin software
■ HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for
UNIX — available for download from www.hp.com/support/ net_printing
ENWW Embedded Web server (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models only) 81
Setting network security on the printer
This printer features control-panel locking, which allows network administrators to prevent users from changing certain printer control-panel settings. When a menu is locked, unauthorized users trying to change settings at the printer control panel will see the following message:
ACCESS DENIED MENUS LOCKED
Administrators can use HP Web Jetadmin software, the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh, or an
ASCII escape sequence to perform this procedure. For instructions to lock the printer control panel by using either the HP Web Jetadmin software or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh, see the online Help.
Locking the control panel
Network administrators can prevent users from changing printer control-panel settings by establishing a password and locking the printer control panel. Administrators can choose from multiple levels of security and can lock certain control panel menus, allowing users to change the rest of the menus, or lock all of the menus (including the C
ANCEL
J
OB
[HP Color LaserJet 4600 models] or S
TOP
[HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models] button).
Levels of security
Lock setting
OFF
LOW
MEDIUM
HIGH
Control-panel items locked
Service menu (locked with a factory-set PIN)
I/O submenu
System Setup submenu
Resets submenu
Service menu (locked with a factory-set PIN)
Configure Device menu (including all submenus)
Diagnostics menu
Service menu (locked with a factory-set PIN)
Information menu
Paper Handling menu
Configure Device menu (including all submenus)
Diagnostics menu
Service menu (locked with a factory-set PIN)
C
ANCEL
J
OB
button (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
S
TOP
button (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
82 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
ENWW
Using an ASCII PJL escape sequence to set network security
If you decide to use the ASCII escape sequence, you must use an MS-DOS or Windows ASCII editor to create the commands. The commands must also be sent to the printer by using a DOS COPY command or an ASCII file download utility. The PJL Technical Reference Manual is located on CD-
ROM (part number 5961-0976). Order a copy of this manual from the HP Web site: www.hp.com
.
NOTE
In the following examples, EC represents the escape character. For more information about using escape characters, see the PJL Technical Reference Manual.
■ To lock or unlock the printer control panel if a password has not been set, send the following
ASCII sequence to the printer:
EC%-12345x@PJL JOB
@PJL DEFAULT CPLOCK=NONE (or MINIMUM, MODERATE, or MAXIMUM)
@PJL EOJ
EC%-12345x
■ To set the password, send the following ASCII sequence to the printer:
EC%-12345x@PJL JOB
@PJL DEFAULT PASSWORD=[numeric password (0 to 65535)]
@PJL EOJ
EC%-12345x
■ To lock or unlock the control panel if the password has been set, send the following ASCII sequence to the printer:
EC%-12345x@PJL JOB PASSWORD=(numeric password)
@PJL DEFAULT CPLOCK=NONE (or MINIMUM, MODERATE, or MAxIMUM)
@PJL EOJ
EC%-12345x
Setting network security on the printer 83
84 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW
4 Maintenance
This chapter provides information about the following topics:
●
Cleaning the printer and accessories
●
Approximate replacement intervals for supply items
●
●
●
Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
●
Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
●
Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models only)
●
Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card (HP Color LaserJet 4610n model)
ENWW 85
Cleaning the printer and accessories
Clean the outside surfaces with a water-dampened cloth. Observe the warning and caution below.
WARNING!
Before you begin these steps, turn the printer off and unplug all power cords to avoid shock hazard. Be careful when cleaning around the fuser area. It might be hot.
CAUTION
To avoid permanent damage to the print cartridge, do not use ammonia-based cleaners on or around the printer. If toner gets on your clothes, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash your clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
Component
Outside covers
Inside general
ETB attaching roller
Paper pickup rollers
Color registration detection unit
Cleaning method
Use an HP Toner Cleaning Cloth (part number 5090-3379) or a water-dampened cloth. Do not use solvents or ammoniabased cleaners.
With a dry lint-free cloth, wipe any dust, spilled toner, and paper particles from the paper path area, the registration roller, and the print cartridge cavity.
Clean with lint-free paper. If dirt cannot be removed, dampen the paper with alcohol.
Clean with lint-free paper. If dirt cannot be removed, dampen the paper with alcohol.
Clean with lint-free paper. If dirt cannot be removed, dampen the paper with alcohol.
Cleaning spilled toner
Defective print cartridges can develop leaks. Also, after a paper jam has occurred, some toner might remain on the rollers and guides inside the printer. The pages that print immediately after the jam can pick up this toner. Use a vacume that is designed for picking up fine particles. See
CAUTION
When cleaning the printer, do not touch the ETB with the damp cloth or with your fingers.
Vacuum specifications
Do not vacuum the printer or any spilled toner using a conventional vacuum. Toner particles used in this product might be too fine for effective vacuuming and could result in damage to conventional vacuums.
A vacuum specifically designed for cleaning toner can be used if it is capable of filtering fine particles
(5 microns in diameter).
86 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
Approximate replacement intervals for supply items
You can identify supply items by their labeling and their blue plastic handles. For instructions about installing supplies, see the installation guides that come with each supply item.
The following table lists the approximate replacement intervals for printer supply items and shows the control panel messages that prompt you to replace each item.
ENWW Approximate replacement intervals for supply items 87
Table 4-1
Approximate replacement intervals for supply items
Supply item
Black (K) print cartridge REPLACE BLACK
Cyan (C) print cartridge REPLACE CYAN
Magenta (M) print cartridge
Printer message
CARTRIDGE
CARTRIDGE
REPLACE
MAGENTA
CARTRIDGE
Page counts
9,000 pages
8,000 pages
8,000 pages
Approximate replacement interval
2.7 months
2.7 months
2.7 months
To install or order
Installing the print cartridges
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
Installing the print cartridges
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
Installing the print cartridges
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
Installing the print cartridges
Yellow (Y) print cartridge
REPLACE YELLOW
CARTRIDGE
8,000 pages
2.7 months
Image transfer kit
(ETB)
REPLACE
TRANSFER KIT
120,000 pages
40 months
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
1
2
3
Image fuser kit
REPLACE FUSER KIT 150,000 pages 3
50 months
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
Approximate life expectancies based on 3,000 pages per month.
The approximate average A4/Letter-size page count is based on 5% coverage of individual colors. Page counts are only estimations; usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary.
Page counts are only estimations; usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary.
CAUTION
Hewlett-Packard Company recommends the use of HP products in this printer.
Use of non-HP products can cause problems that require service that is not covered by the
Hewlett-Packard warranty or service agreements.
88 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
ETB life under different circumstances
Depending on the printer workload, the customer will need to replace the ETB once or twice in the life of the printer. In order to help plan supplies purchases, the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer calculates an estimated remaining number of pages that can be printed with the ETB. This number appears on the Supplies Status page under Transfer Kit: HP Part Number: HP C9724A for the HP
Color LaserJet 4600 models or HP Q3675 for the HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models (for exchange part numbers, see chapter 8). You can view the Supplies Status page by printing it from the printer control panel. If the printer is connected to the network, you can also view the page in the
Web browser or through the HP Web Jetadmin software.
The number of pages an ETB can print is a function of two factors:
■ The number of times the belt goes from a stationary to a rotating state (spins up)
■ The number of pages that have been printed on the belt
Unless print jobs are queued back to back, each print job requires the belt to spin up.
Think of the ETB as having a limited number of wear units. It has 200,000 wear units when it is new.
Each time the belt spins up, it uses two wear units. Each time it prints a page, the belt uses one wear unit.
Because most print jobs are not queued, the average number of pages per job, or job length, is a factor in how quickly the ETB will wear out. The shorter the average job, the more quickly the ETB will wear out.
Figure 4-1 ETB total page count according to average job length
shows how many pages an ETB will print, given various average job lengths.
ENWW
Figure 4-1
ETB total page count according to average job length
The printer assumes an average print job length of three pages to estimate how many pages are remaining on the ETB. With an average job length of three pages, the ETB will print 120,000 pages.
If all print jobs are exactly three pages long, for each page printed the number of estimated pages remaining would decrease by one, beginning with the maximum 120,000 pages. If the job length is
Approximate replacement intervals for supply items 89
less than three pages, the estimated-pages-remaining number decreases more quickly than the rate at which the number of pages actually printed increases. If the job length is greater than three pages, the number of pages remaining decreases less quickly than the rate at which the actual number of pages printed increases.
90 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
Locating supplies
Use
Figure 4-2 Location of supplies to locate each supply item.
Figure 4-2
Location of supplies
1
2
3
Fuser
Print cartridges
Transfer unit (ETB)
ENWW Locating supplies 91
Replacing supply items
Use the following instructions to replace the supplies.
Changing print cartridges
Replace a print cartridge when a REPLACE <COLOR> CARTRIDGE message appears on the control-panel display. The control-panel display also indicates the color that should be replaced
(unless a genuine HP cartridge is not currently installed).
1
Open the top cover. Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull it down. The front cover opens as you pull down the transfer unit.
CAUTION
Do not place anything on the transfer unit while it is open. If the transfer unit is punctured, print quality problems can result.
2
Remove the used print cartridge from the printer.
92 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
ENWW
3
Remove the replacement print cartridge from the bag. Place the used print cartridge in the bag for recycling.
4
Grasp both sides of the cartridge and distribute the toner by gently rocking the cartridge from side to side.
5
Remove the tape from the orange shipping lock. Remove and discard the orange shipping lock.
Replacing supply items 93
6
Remove the inside sealing tape by pulling the orange loop on the end and pulling the tape completely out. Discard the tape.
7
Grasp the blue handles on the sides of the print cartridge. Align the print cartridge with the tracks inside the printer and insert the cartridge until it is completely seated.
8
Installation is complete. Place the used print cartridge in the box in which the new cartridge arrived. See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions.
Replacing the transfer unit
Replace the transfer unit when a REPLACE TRANSFER KIT message appears on the control-panel display.
NOTE
If you replace the transfer unit when it is not at the end of life (for example, if it is defective) you will need to calibrate the printer and reset the transfer unit count through the
control panel. See Replacing the transfer unit when it is not at end of life .
1
Turn the printer off.
2
Use the side handles to open the top cover.
94 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
3
Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull it down. The front cover opens as you pull down the transfer unit.
4
Locate the blue release buttons on each side of the transfer unit (near the bottom of the transfer unit).
5
Grasp the transfer unit with two hands. Simultaneously press both of the blue buttons and slide the transfer unit out of the printer.
ENWW
6
Remove the new transfer unit from the bag. Place the used transfer unit in the bag for recycling.
See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions.
Replacing supply items 95
7
Hold the transfer unit on either side. Guide the feet into the cups and slide the transfer unit into the printer.
8
Close the transfer unit and front cover. Close the top cover and turn the printer on. After a short while a NEW TRANSFER KIT= message appears on the control-panel display.
9
Press to highlight YES.
10
Press to reset the transfer unit count.
11
Wait for the printer to calibrate.
Replacing the transfer unit when it is not at end of life
If you replace the transfer unit when it is not at the end of life (for example, if it is defective) you will need to calibrate the printer and reset the transfer unit count through the control panel.
Use the following steps to calibrate the printer:
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3
Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4
Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.
5
Press to select PRINT QUALITY.
6
Press to highlight CALIBRATE NOW (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or FULL CALIBRATE
NOW (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models).
7
Press to select CALIBRATE NOW (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or FULL CALIBRATE
NOW (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models).
8
Wait for the printer to calibrate.
Use the following steps to reset the transfer unit count:
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
96 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
ENWW
3
Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4
Press to highlight RESETS.
5
Press to select RESETS.
6
Press to highlight RESET SUPPLIES.
7
Press to select RESET SUPPLIES.
8
Press to highlight NEW TRANSFER KIT.
9
Press to select NEW TRANSFER KIT.
10
Press to highlight YES.
11
Press to reset the transfer unit count.
Replacing the fuser
Replace the fuser when a REPLACE FUSER KIT message appears on the control-panel display.
NOTE
If you replace the fuser when it is not at the end of life (for example, if it is defective) you will need to calibrate the printer and reset the fuser count through the control panel. See
Replacing the fuser when it is not at end of life .
1
Turn the printer off.
2
Use the side handles to open the top cover.
WARNING!
The fuser might be hot. Wait 10 minutes before proceeding.
3
Completely loosen the blue thumb screws on each side of the fuser.
Replacing supply items 97
4
Grasp the ends and pull straight up to remove the fuser.
5
Remove the new fuser from the bag. Place the used fuser in the bag for recycling. See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions.
6
Grasp the sides of the fuser and push down firmly into the printer.
7
Tighten the blue thumb screws.
8
Close the top cover, and turn the printer on. After a short while, a NEW FUSER KIT= message appears on the control-panel display.
9
Press to highlight YES.
10
Press to reset the fuser count.
98 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
Replacing the fuser when it is not at end of life
If you replace the fuser when it is not at the end of its life (for example, if it is defective) you will need to reset the fuser count through the control panel.
Use the following steps to reset the fuser count:
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 printer) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3
Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4
Press to highlight RESETS.
5
Press to select RESETS.
6
Press to highlight RESET SUPPLIES.
7
Press to select RESET SUPPLIES.
8
Press to highlight NEW FUSER KIT.
9
Press to select NEW FUSER KIT.
10
Press to highlight YES.
11
Press to reset the fuser count.
ENWW Replacing supply items 99
Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
The printer has five dual inline memory module (DIMM) slots.
NOTE
For maximum flexibility in DIMM support, the formatter is designed with four 168-pin
DIMM slots and a fifth 100-pin DIMM slot. Only four DIMMs can be loaded at a time, so the fifth DIMM slot (100-pin) is logically the same as the fourth DIMM slot (168-pin). The system can only have a DIMM installed on the fourth DIMM slot (168-pin) if no DIMM is installed in the fifth DIMM slot (100-pin), and vice versa.
Use these DIMM slots to upgrade the printer with the following accessories:
■ More printer memory - DIMMs are available in 64, 128, and 256 MB
■ Flash memory DIMMs - available in 8 MB; unlike standard printer memory, flash DIMMs can be used to permanently store downloaded items in the printer, even when the printer is off
■ DIMM-based accessory fonts, macros, and patterns
■ Other DIMM-based printer languages and printer options
NOTE
Single inline memory modules (SIMMs) that were used on previous HP LaserJet printers are not compatible with the printer.
Before ordering additional memory, print a configuration page to see how much memory is currently installed.
1
Press to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3
Press to select INFORMATION.
4
Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION.
5
Press to select PRINT CONFIGURATION.
Installing memory and font DIMMs (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
You can install more memory for the printer, and you can also install a font DIMM so that the printer can print characters for languages such as Chinese or the Cyrillic alphabet.
CAUTION
Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal on the printer.
1
Turn the printer off, and disconnect all power and interface cables. Locate the formatter board in the rear of the printer.
100 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
2
Remove the eight screws holding the board in place, and set them aside.
3
Slide out the formatter board and set it on a clean, flat, grounded surface.
4
Release the locks on each side of the DIMM slot.
5
Remove the DIMM from the antistatic package. Locate the alignment notches on the bottom edge of the DIMM.
ENWW Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) 101
6
Holding the DIMM by the edges, align the notches on the DIMM with the bars in the DIMM slot.
NOTE
If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM or closing the latches, make sure that the notches on the bottom of the DIMM are aligned with the bars in the slot. If the DIMM still does not go in, make sure that you are using the correct type of DIMM.
1
Firmly press the DIMM straight into the slot. Close the locks on each side of the DIMM until they snap into place.
2
Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot, and slide the board into the printer. Replace and tighten the eight screws that you removed in step 2.
3
Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the printer on.
Enabling memory (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
If you installed a memory DIMM, set the printer driver to recognize the newly added memory.
1
On the Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes.
2
Select this printer and select Properties.
3
On the Configure tab, click More.
4
In the Total Memory field, type or select the total amount of memory that is now installed.
5
Click OK.
102 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
Enabling the language font DIMM (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
If you installed a language font DIMM in the printer, you must select the Font DIMM option in the printer driver in order for the font DIMM to work correctly. To enable fonts from the PCL 5c and PCL
6 printer drivers for Windows, follow this procedure:
1
On the Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Printers.
2
Select this printer and select Properties.
3
On the Configure tab, click More.
4
Select the Font DIMM check box.
5
In the Configure Font DIMMs dialog box, click Add to add the font file.
6
In the Add Font DIMM dialog box, browse to the location of the font file, select the font file, and then click OK.
7
In the Configure Font DIMMs dialog box, select the installed DIMM.
8
Click OK.
Checking DIMM installation (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Verify that the DIMMs are installed correctly and are working.
1
Turn the printer on. Check that the Ready light is on after the printer has gone through the startup sequence. If an error message appears, a DIMM might be incorrectly installed.
2
Print a configuration page.
3
Check the Installed Personalities and Options section on the configuration page and compare it with the configuration page that you printed before the DIMM installation.
4
If the amount of recognized memory has not increased, one of the following conditions might exist:
● The DIMM might not be installed correctly. Repeat the installation procedure.
● The DIMM might be defective. Try a new DIMM.
ENWW Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) 103
Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
The HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer has two 200-pin DDR SDRAM slots. One slot is available for adding memory to the printer. The HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer has one 200-pin DDR SDRAM slot. To increase the printer memory, install a new memory module that has higher capacity. DDR
SDRAM memory is available in 128, 256, and 512 MB modules.
NOTE
HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models use 200-pin small outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMM) that support 128, 256, or 512 MB of RAM.
The HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer also has three flash memory card slots for printer firmware, fonts, and other solutions. The HP Color LaserJet 4610n does not include any available flash memory card slots.
■ The first CompactFlash slot is reserved for printer firmware.
NOTE
Use the first flash memory card slot for firmware only. The slot is marked
“Firmware Slot.”
■ The two additional CompactFlash memory slots in the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer enable the user to add fonts and third-party solutions, such as signatures and personalities. The slots are marked "Slot 2" and "Slot 3." For more information about the types of solutions available, go to www.hp.com/go/gsc .
NOTE
Flash memory cards adhere to CompactFlash specifications and size.
CAUTION
Do not insert a flash memory card that is designed for use with a digital camera into the printer. The printer does not support photo printing directly from a flash memory card.
If you install a camera-type flash memory card, a message appears on the control-panel display asking if you want to reformat the flash memory card. If you choose to reformat the card, all data on the card will be lost.
You might want to increase the printer memory if you often print complex graphics or PS documents, or use many downloaded fonts. Additional memory also allows the printer to print multiple, collated copies at the maximum speed.
NOTE
Single inline memory modules (SIMMs) and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs) that were used on previous HP LaserJet printers are not compatible with the printer.
Before ordering additional memory, see how much is currently installed by printing a configuration page. To order additional memory, see chapter 8.
Printing a configuration page (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
1
Press MENU to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3
Press to select INFORMATION.
104 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
4
Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION.
5
Press to print the configuration page.
Installing memory (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) and fonts (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
You can install more memory for the printer, and you can also install a font card so that the printer can print characters for languages such as Chinese or the Cyrillic alphabet.
CAUTION
Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal on the printer.
To install DDR memory DIMMs (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
NOTE
The back side of the HP CLJ 4650 model is shown in this procedure. The
HP CLJ 4610n will appear slightly different, but the procedure for installing DDR memory
DIMMs is the same for both models.
1
Turn the printer off.
2
Disconnect all power and interface cables.
ENWW Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) 105
3
Locate the formatter board in the rear of the printer.
4
Using a #2 Phillips screwdriver, remove the eight screws holding the board in place, and set them aside.
5
Slide out the formatter board and set it on a clean, flat, grounded surface.
106 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
6
To replace a DDR DIMM that is currently installed, spread the latches apart on each side of the
DIMM slot, lift the DDR DIMM up at an angle, and pull it out.
NOTE
The HP CLJ 4610n only has one DDR DIMM memory slot.
7
Remove the new DIMM from the antistatic package. Locate the alignment notch on the bottom edge of the DIMM.
8
Holding the DIMM by the edges, align the notch on the DIMM with the bar in the DIMM slot at an angle and firmly press the DIMM into the slot until it is fully seated. When installed correctly, the metal contacts are not visible.
ENWW Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) 107
9
Push down on the DIMM until both latches engage the DIMM.
NOTE
The HP CLJ 4610n only has one DDR DIMM memory slot.
NOTE
If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM, make sure that the notch on the bottom of the DIMM is aligned with the bar in the slot. If the DIMM still does not go in, make sure that you are using the correct type of DIMM.
10
Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot, and then slide the board back into the printer. Replace and tighten the eight screws removed in step 4.
108 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
11
Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the printer on.
12
If you installed a memory DIMM, go to
Enabling memory (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
To install a flash memory card (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
NOTE
The back side of the HP CLJ 4650 model is shown in this procedure. The
HP CLJ 4610n will appear slightly different, but the procedure for installing a flash memory card is the same for both models.
1
Turn the printer off.
CAUTION
Do not insert a flash memory card that is designed for use with a digital camera into the printer. The printer does not support photo printing directly from a flash memory card. If you install a camera-type flash memory card, a message appears on the control-panel display asking if you want to reformat the flash memory card. If you choose to reformat the card, all data on the card will be lost.
ENWW Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) 109
2
Disconnect all power and interface cables.
3
Locate the formatter board in the rear of the printer.
4
Using a #2 Phillips screwdriver, remove the eight screws holding the board in place, and set them aside.
110 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
5
Slide out the formatter board and set it on a clean, flat, grounded surface.
6
Align the groove on the side of the flash memory card with the notches in the connector and push it in the slot until it is fully seated.
ENWW
HP CLJ 4650
HP CLJ 4610n
CAUTION
Do not insert the flash memory card at an angle.
NOTE
The first flash memory slot marked “Firmware Slot” is reserved for firmware only.
On the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer, slot 2 and slot 3 should be used for all other solutions. The CLJ 4601n only has one CompactFlash memory slot for firmware.
Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) 111
7
Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot, and then slide the board into the printer. Replace and tighten the eight screws that you removed in step 4.
8
Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the printer on.
112 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
Enabling memory (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
If you installed a memory DIMM, set the printer driver to recognize the newly added memory.
To enable memory for Windows 98, ME, and NT (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
1
On the Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Printers.
2
Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3
On the Configure tab, click More.
4
In the Total Memory field, type or select the total amount of memory that is now installed.
5
Click OK.
To enable memory for Windows 2000 and XP (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
1
On the Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes.
2
Right-click the printer and select Properties.
3
On the Device Settings tab, click Printer Memory (in the Installable Options section).
4
Select the total amount of memory that is now installed, and then click OK .
ENWW Printer memory (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) 113
Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card (HP Color
LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models only)
You can install an HP Jetdirect print server card in the base model printer, which comes with an open
EIO slot.
NOTE
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n has no available EIO slots. This model uses the
HP Jetdirect 175x print server, which is connected to the USB port. See
HP Jetdirect print server card (HP Color LaserJet 4610n model)
.
1
Turn the printer off, and disconnect all power and interface cables.
2
Locate an empty EIO slot. Loosen and remove the two retaining screws holding the cover for the
EIO slot onto the printer, and then remove the cover. You will not need these screws and cover again.
Figure 4-3
HP LaserJet 4600 models
Figure 4-4
HP LaserJet 4650 models
114 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
3
Firmly insert the HP Jetdirect print server card into the EIO slot. Insert and tighten the retaining screws that came with the print server card.
Figure 4-5
HP LaserJet 4600 models
Figure 4-6
HP LaserJet 4650 models
4
Connect the network cable. Reconnect the power cable, and turn the printer on.
5
Print a configuration page. In addition to a printer configuration page, an HP Jetdirect configuration page that contains network configuration and status information should also print. If it does not print, uninstall and reinstall the print server card to ensure that it is completely seated in the slot.
6
Perform one of these steps:
● Select the correct port. See the computer or operating system documentation for instructions.
● Reinstall the software, and select the network installation.
ENWW Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models only)
115
Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card (HP Color
LaserJet 4610n model)
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer comes standard with an HP Jetdirect 175x external print server that has to be installed in order to support multiple network protocols and operating systems.
When an HP Jetdirect print server is installed, a printer can be connected directly to a network at any location. HP Jetdirect print servers also support the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), which provides network managers with remote printer management and troubleshooting through
HP Web Jetadmin software
NOTE
A network administrator should instal this external print server and configure the network. Configure the external print server through the HP Web Jetadmin software.
NOTE
See the HP Jetdirect print server documentation for information about which external devices are supported.
116 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW
5 Theory of operation
This chapter provides information about the following topics:
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
ENWW 117
Basic operation
The HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer functions are divided into four systems:
■ Engine-control system
■ Laser/scanner system
■ Image-formation system
■ Pickup/feed system
This chapter describes each of these systems thoroughly.
Figure 5-1
Basic system operation
118 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Operation sequence
A microcomputer in the engine control system controls the operation sequence for the printer. The basic operation sequence (see
Table 5-1 Basic operation sequence ) describes the main operational
periods from the point when the printer is turned on until a print operation is completed and each motor stops rotating.
NOTE
In the following table, “ETB” stands for “electrostatic transfer/transport belt.”
Table 5-1
Basic operation sequence
Period
WAIT (wait period) From the time the power switch is turned on until the
ETB cleaning is completed.
Purpose
To clear a potential on the drum surface and to clean the ETB.
Remark
During this period, the printer checks the toner level and detects whether the cartridges are present. The printer also executes the pulse width modulation adjustment, color registration adjustment, and image density calibration control as required.
When the formatter sends a sleep command, the printer enters PowerSave mode.
STBY (standby period)
PRINT (print period)
LSTR (last rotations period)
From the end of the WAIT or
LSTR period or last rotation until the formatter inputs a print command or until the power is turned off.
From the end of the INTR period until the leading edge detection sensor detects paper and then turns off the transfer positive bias.
From the end of the PRINT period until the ETB motor stops.
To keep the printer ready to print.
INTR (initial rotations period) From immediately after the formatter inputs a print command until the TOP signal is sent to the formatter.
To stabilize the photosensitive-drum sensitivity in preparation for a print operation.
To form an image on the photosensitive drum according to the video signal input from the formatter and to transfer the toner image to the paper.
To deliver the paper out of the printer and to clean the
ETB.
After the power is turned on, the cartridge is cleaned every 35 pages and the ETB is cleaned every 100 pages.
The last rotations period lasts until the instant the formatter sends a print command. Then the initial rotations period starts again.
Basic operation 119
Engine-control system
The engine control system is the brain of the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer. It controls all the other systems according to commands from the formatter. The engine control system consists of the following components:
■ DC controller PCA
■ Fuser power supply PCA
■ High-voltage PCA
■ Low-voltage power supply unit
■ Formatter
Each of these components is described in this chapter.
PCA
PCA
PCA
PCA
Figure 5-2
Engine control system
NOTE
In this manual, the abbreviation "PCA" stands for "printed circuit board assembly."
Components described as a PCA can consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and sensors.
120 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
DC controller circuit
The DC controller controls the print operation sequence for the printer. The sequence of events is as follows:
1
Power is turned on, and then the low-voltage power supply unit supplies dc power to the DC controller.
2
The CPU in the DC controller starts to control printer operations, and The printer enters the standby period.
3
Based on the print command and the image data input from the formatter, the CPU sends a signal to drive the laser diode, the motors, and the solenoids.
NOTE
See the general circuit diagram for detailed information about the printer circuitry.
Pickup motor M
Cassette pickup solenoid
Multipurpose tray
Pickup solenoid
Cassette paper sensor
SL
SL
Multipurpose tray paper sensor
Paper leading edge sensor
OHT sensor
Fuser paper sensor
Fuser delivery sensor
Delivery tray paper full sensor
Cassette paper size detection switch
Color misregistration detection unit
Primary exposure unit
IC1009
Driver
IC
DC controller PCA
IC1010
Driver IC
IC1012
CPU
IC1014
DSP
AC input
Low-voltage power supply circuit
+3.3V
+5V
+24V
Fuser power supply circuit
Door open detection switch
Fuser unit
Paper feeder
(optional)
Power supply fan
HP CLJ 4610n/4650
Fan drive circuit
HP CLJ 4610n/4650
IC1011
Reset IC
Formatter
Cartridge fan
Controller fan
Fan drive circuit
Fan drive circuit
IC1013
EEP-ROM
Figure 5-3
DC controller circuit
IC1015
ASIC
M
Developing disengaging motor
M ETB motor
M
M
Drum motors
M
M
M
Fuser motor
Environmental sensor
HP CLJ 4610n/4650
Drum home position sensors
ETB speed sensor
Developing disengaging sensor
Laser / Scanner units
Scanner motor
BD PCA
Laser driver
ETB unit
Transfer charging roller
High-voltage power supply circuit
Cartridge
Primary charging roller
Toner charging roller
Developing cylinder
Photosensitive drum
Cartridge memory
Memory controller PCA
Engine-control system 121
Motors, fans, and environment sensor
The printer has ten motors and two or three fans (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models have two fans; HP
Color LaserJet 4650 models have three fans). HP Color LaserJet 4650 models also have one
environment sensor. Eight of the motors are dc motors; the other two are stepping motors. Figure 5-4
Motors and fans (HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers) and
Figure 5-5 Fan and environment sensor (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
shows the locations of the fan and sensor.
Table 5-2 Function of motors, fans, and environment sensor
explains the function of each component.
One of the stepping motors and six of the eight dc motors are used for paper feeding and image formation. The remaining stepping motor is the developing disengaging motor. The remaining two dc motors are fan motors.
Since the printer transfers an image in four colors in line onto the paper, small changes in the rotational speed of the motor are likely to cause color misalignment. The dc motors used for image formation are precisely controlled to account for rotational speed fluctuation.
Figure 5-4
Motors and fans (HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printers)
122 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Figure 5-5
Fan and environment sensor (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
Table 5-2
Function of motors, fans, and environment sensor
Name Function
M1: Cyan cartridge motor
M2: Yellow cartridge motor
Drives the photosensitive drum
M3: Magenta cartridge motor
M4: Black cartridge motor
M5: Pickup motor Drives the pickup roller and feed roller
Drives the ETB M6: ETB motor
M7: Developing disengaging motor
M8: Fuser motor
Separates the photosensitive drums and the developing cylinders
Drives the pressure roller and delivery roller
FAN1: Formatter fan
FAN2: Cartridge fan
Exhausts heat around the formatter and low-voltage power supply unit
Exhausts heat around the fuser and cartridges
Type
dc motor
Stepping motor dc motor
Stepping motor dc motor dc motor dc motor
Speed switching
4-speed (full, 1/2, 1/3, 1/4)
4-speed (full, 1/2, 1/3, 1/4)
4-speed (full, 1/2, 1/3, 1/4)
No
4-speed (full, 1/2, 1/3, 1/4)
2-speed (full during printing,
1/2 during standby)
No
(full speed during printing only)
Engine-control system 123
Table 5-2
Function of motors, fans, and environment sensor (continued)
Name Function Type
FAN 3: Power-supply fan
(HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models only)
Exhausts heat around the pickup motor and lowvoltage power supply dc motor
Environment sensor (HP
Color LaserJet 4610n and
4650 models only)
Detects the temperature and humidity levels inside the printer
NA
Speed switching
No
(full speed during printing only)
NA
Fuser power-supply circuit
This printer uses an induction heating method to heat the fuser.
Figure 5-6 Fuser power-supply circuit shows the configuration of the fuser power supply.
Figure 5-6
Fuser power-supply circuit
The fuser power supply has three main components:
■ Fuser sleeve. A high-frequency current flows through an induction heating coil in the fuser sleeve, causing the metal sleeve to heat.
■ Thermistors. Two thermistors are in the fuser sleeve: one in the center, and the other at the end. Each thermistor monitors the temperature in the fuser sleeve.
■ Thermoswitch. The thermoswitch is located at the bottom center of the fuser sleeve. When the fuser is overheating, the switch opens, and power to the induction heating coil is shut off.
124 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Table 5-3
Fuser temperatures
Media
Plain
Overhead transparencies
Thick
Gloss
Envelopes
Temperature
~ 190°C (374°F)
~ 172°C (342°F) color
~ 185°C (365°F) monochrome
~ 185°C (365°F)
~ 167°C (333°F)
~ 190°C (374°F)
Engine speed
Full speed
1/4 speed
1/2 speed
1/2 speed
1/3 speed
Full speed
ENWW Engine-control system 125
Heater temperature control
The heater temperature control detects the surface temperature of the fuser sleeve and controls the current flowing to the induction heating coil. The heater temperature control circuit is shown in
5-7 Heater temperature control circuit .
.
Figure 5-7
Heater temperature control circuit
The two thermistors that are attached to the fuser sleeve (TH1 and TH2) detect the surface temperature of the fuser sleeve. The main thermistor (TH1) controls the fuser temperature, and the sub thermistor (TH2) detects overheating at the end of the fuser sleeve. When the surface temperature of the fuser sleeve increases, resistance of the two thermistors is reduced, and the voltage of the main thermistor detection signal (MAINTH1) and the sub thermistor detection signal
(SUBTH1) drops.
The CPU (IC1012) on the DC controller monitors the voltage of the MAINTH1 and SUBTH1 signals.
The CPU sends the fuser temperature control signal (TMPCON) according to the voltage level.
The CPU sends the amperage control signal (PRANGE) to control the amperage of the fuser sleeve.
NOTE
HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models: During standby, the fuser temperature is maintained at about 170°F (76.7°C) to accommodate a first-print time of less than
15 seconds.
126 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
High-voltage power supply
The high-voltage power supply circuit applies bias to the primary charging rollers, the toner charging
High-voltage power supply circuit shows the high-voltage power supply circuit.
ENWW
Figure 5-8
High-voltage power supply circuit
Engine-control system 127
Low-voltage power supply
The low-voltage power supply circuit converts the ac voltage that is input from the electrical outlet to dc power and delivers it to each load in the printer.
Figure 5-9 Low-voltage power supply circuit
shows the low-voltage power supply circuit including the amount of voltage supplied to each component.
The ac power is supplied to the low-voltage power supply by turning on the power supply switch
(SW5). The ac power is converted to the dc power that the printer requires:
■ +24 V goes to the motors, solenoids, clutches, and the high-voltage power supply circuit.
■ +5 V goes to the laser driver PCA, the beam detect PCA, and the formatter.
■ +3.3 V goes to the formatter, the sensors, and the ICs in the DC controller PCA.
+24 V is divided into +24 VA, which is constantly sent from the low-voltage power supply circuit, and
+24 VB, which stops power supply when the top cover or the front cover is opened. +24 VB goes to the fuser power-supply circuit, high-voltage power-supply circuit, and the motors and solenoids.
+24 VB also functions as the door-open (/DOPEN) detection signal. The CPU detects the door open with the signal.
Figure 5-9
Low-voltage power supply circuit
128 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Formatter system
The formatter PCA is responsible for the following actions:
■ Receiving and processing print data from the various printer interfaces
■ Monitoring control panel inputs and relaying printer status information (through the control panel and the bidirectional I/O)
■ Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the print engine
■ Storing font information
■ Communicating with the host computer through the bidirectional interface
■ Controlling the PowerSave mode
The formatter monitors the printer continuously through the video interface. When the printer is ready to print, the formatter sends a signal to the DC controller, which turns the laser on or off based on the signal.
shows the formatter system.
ENWW
Figure 5-10
Formatter system
Engine-control system 129
PowerSave
This feature conserves power after the printer has been idle for an adjustable length of time. Set the time length in the Configure Device menu, under System Setup. When the printer is in PowerSave mode, the control-panel backlight is turned off, but the printer retains all printer settings, downloadable fonts, and macros. The default setting is POWERSAVE= ON, with a 30-minute idle time. You can turn PowerSave off in the Configure Device menu, under Resets.
The printer exits PowerSave mode and enters the warm-up cycle when any of the following occurs:
■ A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received at the parallel port, FIR port (HP
CLJ 4600 models), EIO card (HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models only), or 1.1 USB connector (HP
CLJ 4610n and 4650 models).
■ A control-panel button is pressed
■ The top cover is opened
■ A paper tray is opened
■ The engine-test button is pressed
NOTE
Printer error messages override the PowerSave message. The printer enters
PowerSave mode at the appropriate time, but the error message continues to appear.
130 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Input/output
This section explains the printer input/output (I/O) capabilities.
Parallel interface
The formatter receives incoming data through its bidirectional interface (IEEE-1284). The I/O provides high-speed and two-way communication between the printer and the host, allowing the user to change printer settings and monitor printer status from the host computer. The user can configure the HIGH SPEED item on the control panel menu. (This item is found by navigating to the Configure
Device menu, in the I/O menu, and Parallel Input.) The default setting, Yes, allows the I/O to run at the higher speeds supported by most newer computers. When set to No, the parallel interface runs at the slower mode that is compatible with older computers. The user can also configure the
Advance Functions item. The default setting, ON, allows for two-way parallel communications. The
Off mode disables the advanced functionality. The I/O is compatible with the bidirectional parallel interface standard.
Expanded I/O (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
The optional HP Fast InfraRed receiver enables wireless printing from any IRDA-compliant portable device (such as a laptop computer) to the printer.
The printing connection is maintained by positioning the sending infrared port within operating range.
The connection can be blocked by objects such as a hand or paper, or by direct sunlight or any bright light shining into either infrared port.
USB 1.1 connector (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
The HP Color LaserJet 4650 models supports a USB 1.1 connector on the back of the printer. You must use an A-to-B type USB cable.
Flash (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Optional flash is available in 4 MB flash memory DIMMs for storing forms, fonts, and signatures.
Hard-disk accessory (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models)
The optional hard-disk accessory can be mounted in one of the EIO slots on the rear of the formatter.
The optional EIO-based hard disk is used for creating multiple original prints (mopies) and storing forms, fonts, and signatures.
CPU
The HP LaserJet 4600 models formatter incorporates a 400 MHz RISC processor. The formatter for the HP LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models incorporates a 533 MHz RISC processor.
Engine-control system 131
Printer memory
If the printer encounters difficulty managing available memory, a clearable warning message will appear on the control panel.
Some printer messages are affected by the auto-continue and clearable warning settings from the
Configure Device menu, under System Setup. If Clearable Warning = Job is set on the control panel, warning messages appear on the control-panel display until the end of the job from which they were generated. If Clearable Warning = On is set, warning messages appear on the control panel until (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) is pressed. If an error occurs that prevents printing and Auto Continue = Off is set, the message appears until (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) is pressed.
Read-only memory
Besides storing microprocessor control programs, the read-only memory (ROM) stores dot patterns of internal character sets (fonts).
Random-access memory
The random-access memory (RAM) contains the page, I/O buffers, and the font storage area. It stores printing and font information received from the host system, and can also serve to temporarily store a full page of print-image data before the data is sent to the print engine. Memory capacity can be increased by adding DIMMs to the formatter. Note that adding memory (DIMMs) might also increase the print speed for complex graphics.
DIMM slots (HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer)
The DIMM slots can be used to add memory, fonts, or firmware upgrades.
Firmware DIMM (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
To upgrade printer firmware, install a new firmware DIMM (firmware DIMMs are flashable). See
Installing memory and font DIMMs (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) for more information.
Flash memory (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
To upgrade printer firmware, install a new firmware Compact FLASH. See Installing memory (HP
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) and fonts (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) for more
information.
Nonvolatile memory
The printer uses nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) to store I/O and information about the print environment configuration. The contents of NVRAM are retained when the printer is turned off or disconnected.
132 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
PJL overview
Printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of configuration, in addition to the standard printer command language (PCL). With standard cabling, PJL allows the printer to perform functions such as the following:
■ Two-way communication with the host computer through a bidirectional parallel connection. The printer can tell the host about such things as the control-panel settings, and the control-panel settings can be changed from the host.
■ Dynamic I/O switching allows the printer to be configured with a host on each I/O. The printer can receive data from more than one I/O simultaneously, until the I/O buffer is full. This can occur even when the printer is offline.
■ Context-sensitive switching allows the printer to automatically recognize the personality (PS or
PCL) of each job and configure itself to serve that personality.
■ Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next. For example, if a print job is sent to the printer in landscape mode, the subsequent print jobs print in landscape only if they are formatted for landscape printing.
PML
The printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration and status readback through the I/O ports.
Control panel
The formatter sends and receives printer status and command data to and from a control panel board.
Engine-control system 133
Laser/scanner assembly
The laser/scanner system receives a signal from the formatter and forms a latent image on the photosensitive drum in the print cartridge. The printer has a separate laser/scanner unit for each
color. Each of these has the same structure, which is shown in Figure 5-11 Laser/scanner system .
Figure 5-11
Laser/scanner system
134 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Scanner-motor control
The scanner-motor control rotates the scanner motor in order to place the laser beam at the correct position on the photosensitive drum.
Figure 5-12 Scanner-motor control circuit shows the circuit
diagram for the scanner-motor control.
NOTE
If a scanner-motor error occurs, the print engine stops and an error message appears on the control-panel display.
ENWW
Figure 5-12
Scanner-motor control circuit
Laser/scanner assembly 135
Image-formation system
The image-formation system is the central hub of the printer.
Figure 5-13 Image-formation system
shows the image-formation system. During image formation, an image of colored toner is formed and then fused onto the paper. The image-formation system consists of the following components:
■ Four laser/scanners
■ Four print cartridges
■ ETB
■ Fuser
Figure 5-13
Image-formation system
136 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Image-formation process
The image-formation process consists of eleven steps divided among five functional blocks:
■ Electrostatic latent-image formation block
■ Developing block
■ Transfer block
■ Fusing block
■ Cleaning block
Figure 5-14 Image-formation process illustrates the overall image-formation process. The image-
formation process steps are numbered from start to finish. The following sections in this chapter describe the five functional blocks in the image-formation process.
ENWW
Figure 5-14
Image-formation process
Image-formation system 137
Print cartridges
The printer has four different print cartridges, one for each color. However, they share the same structure, shown in
Figure 5-15
Print cartridge
The following are the physical components inside the print cartridge:
■ Photosensitive drum
■ Primary charging roller
■ Developing cylinder
■ Toner charging roller
■ Stirrers
■ Waste-toner transfer plate
The photosensitive drum rotation drives the primary charging roller. All other components are driven by the drum motor.
The developing disengaging motor drives the developing disengaging block, which causes the developing cylinder to engage with or disengage from the photosensitive drum.
The DC controller uses an LED and a photo diode to monitor the level of toner inside the cartridge. It stores this information on a memory tag that is built into each cartridge.
138 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Memory tag
The memory tag is an EEP-ROM that is built into the print cartridge. It stores information about the amount of toner in the cartridge and estimates the remaining life.
Figure 5-16 Memory tag illustrates
how the memory tag operates.
ENWW
Figure 5-16
Memory tag
The DC controller reads information from the memory tag whenever the printer is turned on, whenever the top cover is closed, and whenever it receives a READ command from the formatter.
The DC controller writes information to the memory tag at specified times during a print operation and whenever it receives a WRITE command from the formatter.
If the DC controller is unable to either read to or write from the memory tag four times in a row, the
DC controller alerts the formatter of a memory tag abnormality.
Toner-level detection
The printer monitors print-cartridge life in several ways to ensure continued high print quality:
■ The number of developer rotations measures the usefulness (charge) of the toner.
■ The toner sensor monitors remaining toner, and informs the user of toner "low" or "out" conditions.
■ The number of photosensitive drum rotations measures the life of the photosensitive drum, which degrades slightly with each rotation.
The cartridge life, represented on the supplies status page and in the gauges on the control panel, is a combination of all three of these components. The lowest remaining percent is the number reported to the customer. However, information about which of these components is low or out is not reported.
During the life of a print cartridge, the customer receives three different control panel messages:
■ OK. The cartridge has between 15% and 100% life remaining.
■ Order cartridge. The cartridge has 15% life remaining. In typical printing situations, this represents about 2 weeks of use.
■ Replace cartridge. One of the three components listed above has reached its end of life. The printer stops, and printing cannot continue until the cartridge is replaced.
Image-formation system 139
Developer rotations
The developer-roller rotations are tracked on the print cartridge memory tag (e-label). Tracking rotations enables the printer to signal that a print cartridge is low or out before the developer or toner is actually worn out, which would result in print-quality defects.
Over time, the toner loses its required properties as a result of excessive stirring and recharging.
Although the cartridge will correctly signal LOW or OUT because of wear, some toner might remain in the fresh-toner hopper.
In addition to toner wear, the developer roller wears during use, so developer-life tracking is necessary. In situations where low-coverage documents are printed frequently, the developer rotations might cause a LOW signal before the toner level reaches its low level.
Toner sensor
For the first 75% of the cartridge life, toner depletion within the cartridge is calculated by counting pixels. An optical toner-level sensor then tracks the final 25% of toner. The toner is measured and then reported on the toner gas gauge on the control panel or on the supplies status page. The transition from counting pixels to optical toner-level sensing causes no fluctuations on the toner gauge. Some toner might remain in the fresh-toner hopper although other cartridge components have reached their end of life.
Photosensitive drum rotations
Photosensitive drum rotations are also tracked on the cartridge memory tag. Similar to the process for the developer roller, tracking these rotations enables the printer to signal that a print cartridge is low or out before the photosensitive drum is actually worn out, when print quality defects would occur. Wear on the photosensitive drum might cause a low message when low-coverage documents are printed frequently. Tracking of drum life is essential because of drum wear and the potential for overflow from the waste-toner hopper if use of the photosensitive drum is overextended.
Figure 5-17 Toner-level detection
illustrates the toner-level detection system.
Figure 5-17
Toner-level detection
140 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Developing cylinder disengaging control
Whenever the developing cylinder is in contact with the photosensitive drum, toner passes onto the drum. At certain times, such as during ETB cleaning or during monochrome printing, toner should not pass onto the drum, and the developing cylinder should not be in contact with the drum. The bottom half of the print cartridge can pivot up and down, causing the developing cylinder to either come in contact with or move away from the photosensitive drum. A small block inside the printer causes each cartridge to pivot. When the block is pushed up, the rear of the cartridge is pushed up, and the front of the cartridge swings down. The developing cylinder disengages from the drum.
Developing cylinder disengaging illustrates this process.
Figure 5-18
Developing cylinder disengaging
The developing cylinders are disengaged only during monochrome printing or during ETB cleaning.
During monochrome printing, the developing cylinder in all cartridges (except the black cartridge) is disengaged. During ETB cleaning, the developing cylinders in all cartridges are disengaged.
Image-formation system 141
Electrostatic transfer/transport belt (ETB) unit
The ETB unit feeds the media through the printer and helps transfer toner onto the media.
illustrates the ETB unit.
Figure 5-19
ETB unit
The following are the components of the ETB unit:
■ ETB belt
■ ETB feed roller
■ Attaching roller
■ Transfer charging rollers (four)
■ ETB-driven rollers (three)
The ETB motor drives the ETB feed roller, causing the belt to rotate. All other rollers are driven by the belt rotation.
A sensor at the top of the ETB unit detects its speed. The DC controller maintains a constant ETB feed speed to ensure good color registration.
142 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Electrostatic-latent-image-formation block
The image formation process begins in the electrostatic-image formation block (see Figure 5-14
This block consists of three steps:
■ Primary exposure
■ Primary charging
■ Laser-beam exposure
After the last step is complete, areas of the drum surface that have not been exposed to the laser beam retain a negative charge. The areas that have been exposed to the laser are neutralized. This neutralized image is called an electrostatic latent image because it is invisible to the eye.
Step 1: Primary exposure
To prepare for primary charging, light from the primary exposure LED strikes the photosensitive drum surface. This eliminates any residual charge on the drum surface in order to avoid inconsistent charge density.
Figure 5-20 Primary exposure illustrates this step.
Figure 5-20
Primary exposure
Image-formation system 143
Step 2: Primary charging
To prepare for latent-image formation, a uniform negative potential is applied to the photosensitive drum surface. The primary charging roller is made of a conductive rubber. A dc bias is applied to the
primary charging roller to maintain uniform potential on the drum surface.
illustrates this step.
Figure 5-21
Primary charging
Step 3: Laser beam exposure
As the laser beam scans the drum surface it neutralizes the negative charge to form the the electrostatic latent image. The remaining areas, where the laser beam has not struck, retain a negative charge.
Figure 5-22 Laser beam exposure
illustrates this step.
Figure 5-22
Laser beam exposure
144 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Development block
The second part of the image-formation process is the development block, where toner is transferred onto the electrostatic latent image on the surface of the photosensitive drum to create a visible image. This printer uses a contact development method that keeps the developing cylinder in contact with the drum, pushing the toner against the drum surface for development. The toner is nonmagnetic and consists of resins. This block consists of two steps:
■ Toner charging
■ Development
Figure 5-23 Development block shows a cross-section of a print cartridge and illustrates the
development block.
ENWW
Figure 5-23
Development block
Step 4: Toner charging
As the toner stirring blade turns inside the cartridge, the friction creates a negative potential on the toner. A negative voltage is applied to the toner charging roller and creates a uniform negative potential on the toner.
Step 5: Development
The areas on the photosensitive drum that have been exposed to the laser beam have a higher potential (are less negatively charged) than the toner particles on the developing cylinder. As the photosensitive drum rotates, the toner adheres to the exposed areas on the photosensitive drum. At this point, the image is visible on the drum surface.
Image-formation system 145
Transfer block
The third part of the image-formation process is the transfer block, in which the toner image is transferred from the photosensitive drum to the paper. This block consists of three steps:
■ Attaching
■ Transfer
■ Separation
Step 6: Attaching
After the media is picked up from the input tray, the attaching roller pushes it against the ETB. The
attaching roller has a positive dc bias, and it creates a positive charge on the print media. Figure
5-24 Attaching the paper to the ETB illustrates this step.
Figure 5-24
Attaching the paper to the ETB
Step 7: Transfer
A positive bias is applied to the transfer charging roller, which is directly opposite the photosensitive drum. As the ETB passes the transfer charging roller, it picks up a positive charge. The negatively charged toner on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the positively charged print media.
the media from the bottom cartridge to the top (C, Y, M, K).
In four-color printing, as four colors of toner are piled up on the media, the holding force of the toner weakens as the transfer process progresses. To counteract this effect, the DC controller increases the positive dc bias that is applied to the transfer charging roller for each successive color.
146 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Figure 5-25
Toner transfer
ENWW Image-formation system 147
Step 8: Separation
The elasticity of the print media causes it to separate from the ETB as the ETB reaches the top of its
illustrates this step.
Figure 5-26
Separation
Fusing block
The fourth part of the image-formation process is the fusing block, in which the toner image is fused to the media, making a permanent image that cannot be smeared. This block consists of one step: fusing.
Step 9: Fusing
This printer uses the induction heating method to fuse the toner to the media. This method uses quick fuser heating, resulting in shortened wait time and reduced power consumption.
Figure 5-27
Fusing
148 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Cleaning block
The fifth and final part of the image-formation process is the cleaning block, in which the ETB and the photosensitive drums are cleaned, preparing them for the next print. The next section provides more information about printer calibration and cleaning. This block consists of two steps:
■ ETB cleaning
■ Photosensitive drum cleaning
Step 10: ETB cleaning
See
for a complete discussion of ETB cleaning.
Step 11: Photosensitive drum cleaning
See
Photosensitive drum cleaning for a complete discussion of photosensitive drum cleaning.
ENWW Image-formation system 149
Calibration and cleaning
The printer automatically calibrates and cleans itself at various times to maintain the best print quality. You can also force the printer to calibrate by selecting Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
4600 models), Quick Calibrate Now, or Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) from the Print Quality menu. For information about calibrating the printer. See
LaserJet 4600 models) or Quick Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) or
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) for more information.
While the printer is calibrating or cleaning, it pauses printing. For most calibrations and cleaning, the printer does not interrupt a print job, but waits for the job to be complete before calibrating or cleaning.
Table 5-4 Calibration timing and duration
shows when the printer calibrates, the duration of the calibration, and the type of calibration that occurs.
Table 5-5 Cleaning timing and duration shows
when the printer cleans and the duration of the cleaning. The sections that follow discuss calibration and cleaning in more detail.
To reset the calibration values for the DC controller
Performing an NVRAM initialization clears the calibration values from the formatter, but it does not clear the calibration values from the DC controller. If problems with color-plane registration persist after performing an NVRAM initialization, reset the calibration values for the DC controller.
1
Open the top cover.
2
Press and hold the engine-test switch on the left side of the printer for several seconds.
3
Close the top cover, and observe the control-panel display. If the message Performing
Calibration appears, the reset was successful.
Table 5-4
Calibration timing and duration
Calibration occurrence Duration Type of calibration
When you turn the printer on.
75 seconds for calibration, but because of other initialization activities, the printer takes a total of 2 minutes to be ready for printing
150 seconds (2 minutes, 30 seconds)
DMAX, DHALF
DMAX, DHALF, color-plane registration
(CPR)
When you install one or more print cartridges that have not previously been installed in the printer.
When 50 pages have been printed since installing a print cartridge. The printer will finish printing the current job before calibrating.
When 1,000 pages have printed since the last calibration. The printer will finish printing the current job before calibrating.
When 8 hours have passed since the last calibration, but not while the printer is in PowerSave mode. Typically, this calibration occurs during the first job or any control-panel interaction after an overnight idle period.
When you request calibration from the control panel (CALIBRATE NOW for
75 seconds
75 seconds
75 seconds
280 seconds (4 minutes, 40 seconds)
DMAX, DHALF
DMAX, DHALF
DMAX, DHALF
DMAX, DHALF, CPR, drum phase
150 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Table 5-4
Calibration timing and duration (continued)
Calibration occurrence Duration
HP Color LaserJet 4600 models or
QUICK CALIBRATE NOW and FULL
CALIBRATE NOW for HP Color
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models).
Table 5-5
Cleaning timing and duration
Cleaning occurrence
When the printer continuously prints
(with no idle period or spin down) for
51 pages.
At intervals of 90 and 140 pages. The printer will finish printing the current job before cleaning.
Duration
either 5 seconds or 21 seconds
(5 seconds is the most common)
16 seconds
Type of calibration
Type of cleaning
primary and toner charging rollers
ETB
ENWW Image-formation system 151
ETB cleaning
During this step, all toner particles that remain on the ETB are returned to the photosensitive drums in each print cartridge.
illustrates this step.
The ETB is automatically cleaned when the printer is turned on, when the covers are closed, and after printing a specified number of pages. The DC controller applies negative bias to the photosensitive drums and either a positive or negative bias to the transfer charging rollers. This creates a difference in potential between the photosensitive drums and the ETB. Both positive and negative residual toner returns to the photosensitive drums.
Figure 5-28
ETB cleaning
152 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Photosensitive drum cleaning
A cleaning blade inside the print cartridge clears the remaining toner on the photosensitive drum as the drum rotates past the blade. This waste toner is moved into the waste-toner container in the top of the print cartridge.
Figure 5-29 Drum cleaning illustrates this step.
Figure 5-29
Drum cleaning
During the printing process, toner adheres to the primary charging roller and the toner charging roller. To prevent print quality defects, this toner needs to be cleaned. The DC controller alternately applies negative bias in different values to the primary charging roller and the toner charging roller when one of the following occurs:
■ The printer is turned on
■ The covers are closed
■ At the start of a print operation
■ After printing a specified number of pages
Applying bias removes the toner from each roller. The toner on the primary charging roller is transferred to the photosensitive drum, and the toner on the toner charging roller is transferred to the developing cylinder. Then the cleaning blade scrapes the toner on the photosensitive drum into the waste-toner container, as described above. The toner on the developing cylinder is returned to the
toner case. Figure 5-30 Primary charging roller and toner charging roller cleaning illustrates this
process.
Image-formation system 153
Figure 5-30
Primary charging roller and toner charging roller cleaning
Color-plane registration calibration
The diameter of the rollers in individual print cartridges or ETB units varies from one to another. For this reason, whenever a new print cartridge or ETB unit is installed, the printer must adjust the rotational speed of the rollers in order to ensure good color-plane registration. Color misregistration occurs when the individual colors do not print directly on top of one another. This adjustment consists of two steps:
1
Direct calibration. The DC controller uses the color-registration detection unit to measure the color-registration range directly and calibrate the color registration.
2
Indirect calibration. The DC controller monitors the rotational speed of each feed roller and controls the speed to prevent color misregistration.
Figure 5-31 Color registration calibration
illustrates this process.
154 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Figure 5-31
Color registration calibration
Drum phase calibration
The drum phase calibration aligns all four cartridge motors and their drive gears.
Image stabilization control
This controls the variation of the image density caused by an environmental change or deterioration of the photosensitive drum, toner, etc.
There are three types of image stabilization control. These controls operate when necessary.
■ Environmental change control: The environment condition sensor (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) controls the bias according to the environment conditions.
■ Image density control (D-max): the color misregistration sensor (PS12) calibrates the bias value when the image density is at max.
■ Image halftone control (D-half): The color misregistration sensor (PS12) calibrates the halftone data in the formatter.
Image-formation system 155
Environmental change control (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
This control calibrates each bias to obtain the best image possible according to environmental changes.
The environment conditions sensor detects the temperature and the humidity. The sensor sends this information to the DC controller in the form of the Temperature Detection signal (TEMSNS) and the
Humidity Detection signal (HUMSNS).
The DC controller monitors the environmental conditions of the printer based on these two signals.
The DC controller controls the following biases to prevent image defects when it detects an environmental change.
■ Developing bias
■ Primary transfer bias
■ Secondary transfer bias
If the environment sensor detects a temperature of below -30ºC (22ºF) or over 80ºC (176ºF), the DC controller determines this is an "environment sensor abnormality" and sends an error message to the formatter.
Image density calibration control (DMAX)
This control stabilizes image density by calibrating the values of the developing bias whenever one of the following events occurs:
■ When the printer is turned on
■ When a print cartridge is replaced
■ After a set number of pages have printed
■ When the formatter sends an operation command
Image density calibration consists of three steps:
1
The DC controller forms density patterns for each color on the ETB by using varying levels of developing bias.
2
The color registration detection unit measures the image density of the density patterns that are formed on the ETB.
3
The DC controller uses the density measurements to adjust the developing bias to obtain he correct image density.
156 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Image halftone calibration control (DHALF)
This control measures halftone density output from the formatter and returns the measurements to the formatter so it can perform halftone calibration. Image density calibration must always be performed in advance of image halftone calibration.
Image halftone calibration control consists of three steps:
1
Using the optimum developing bias determined during image density calibration, the DC controller forms density patterns on the photosensitive drum in each color cartridge.
2
These density patterns are transferred to the ETB, and the color-registration detection unit measures the image density of these patterns. Image data is returned to the formatter.
3
The formatter uses the image data to perform a halftone calibration in order to obtain an ideal halftone image.
ENWW Image-formation system 157
Image density detection
Each of the image stabilization controls uses the color registration unit at the top of the ETB unit to measure image density. The DC controller emits a light from sensors located above the density detection patterns on the ETB. The light reflected off the patterns is returned to the sensor, and the data is returned to the DC controller.
Figure 5-32 Image density detection illustrates this process.
When the values that the density sensor detects are outside the specified range, the DC controller resets the image density and issues an “image density sensor out of guaranteed range” warning to the formatter.
If the sensor receives no reflected light, the DC controller stops the printer and issues a “density sensor abnormality” warning to the formatter.
Figure 5-32
Image density detection
158 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Pickup/feed system
The pickup/feed system picks media from the input trays and carries it along the paper path. The printer has one multipurpose tray (tray 1) and one 500-sheet cassette (tray 2). A second 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3) is available only for the HP Color LaserJet 4600, 4600n, 4650, 4650n, and
4650dn models; it is standard on the 4600dn, 4600dtn, 4600hdn, 4650dtn models. The HP Color
LaserJet 4650hdn has 2 x 500-sheet feeder (tray 3/tray 4) assembly. Sensors detect the presence of media in each of these trays. Switches detect the size of the media. Motors and solenoids drive the various feed rollers.
NOTE
The 2 x 500-sheet feeder is only available for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models.
Three photo sensors detect the progress of media along the paper path. If media does not reach or pass one of these sensors within a specified time, the DC controller determines a jam and notifies
the formatter. Figure 5-33 Pickup/feed system illustrates this system.
ENWW
Figure 5-33
Pickup/feed system
Pickup/feed system 159
The pickup/feed system has the following physical components:
■ PS1: Cassette paper sensor
■ PS2: Multipurpose tray paper sensor
■ PS3: Paper leading edge sensor (top of page)
■ PS4: OHT sensor
■ PS11: Fuser inlet paper sensor
■ PS12: Fuser delivery sensor
■ PS13: output bin full sensor
■ SW1: Cassette paper size detection switch
■ SW2: Cassette paper size detection switch
■ SW3: Cassette paper size detection switch
■ M1: Cyan drum motor
■ M2: Yellow drum motor
■ M3: Magenta drum motor
■ M4: Black drum motor
■ M5: Pickup motor
■ M6: ETB motor
■ M8: Fuser motor
■ SL1: Cassette pickup solenoid
■ SL2: Multipurpose tray pickup solenoid
Figure 5-34 Pickup/feed system illustrates the pickup/feed system, which can be divided into three
units:
■ Pickup/feed unit. From the point the media is picked from the tray until it reaches the fuser
■ Fuser/delivery unit. From the fuser to the output bin
■ Duplex feed unit. From the output bin to the registration shutter at the bottom of the ETB
160 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Figure 5-34
Pickup/feed system
Pickup/feed unit
At the bottom of the paper path, the pickup unit picks individual pieces of media from the trays. Then the ETB carries the media to the top of the paper path. The following sequence of events occurs:
1
The formatter sends a print command to the DC controller, which rotates the pickup motor, the drum motors, the ETB motor, and the fuser motor.
2
The cassette feed roller and registration roller rotate as the pickup motor starts to rotate.
3
Media is picked from the cassette or multipurpose tray. A separation claw in the cassette prevents picking multiple sheets of media. A separation pad in the multipurpose tray prevents multiple sheets from feeding.
4
The registration shutter corrects any skew in the media, and the media is fed at a specified speed, according to the size and type of the media.
5
As the ETB carries the media past each print cartridge, toner is transferred onto the media.
Pickup/feed system 161
Cassette detection and cassette paper-size detection
The printer can sense whether the cassette (tray 2, tray3/tray 4) is installed correctly, and it can sense the size of the paper in the cassette. Paper-size detection switches at the back of the cassette send this information to the DC controller. The DC controller determines which size is loaded by reading various switches. See
Table 5-6
Cassette paper-size detection
Paper size
A4
B5
A5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Custom
No cassette
Paper-size detection switch
off on off
SW1 on on on off off on on off
SW2 off on off on off off on off
SW3 off off on on on
Although the cassette determines the paper size by reading the switches, it is possible that the user can select a different size from what is loaded, creating an error in paper-size detection.
The paper leading-edge sensor detects when the leading edge and the trailing edge of a sheet pass it. By measuring the time between the passing of the leading edge and trailing edge, the sensor can determine the actual size of the sheet. If this measured size differs from the size specified by the formatter or the switch combination, the DC controller determines a mismatch. The sheet is ejected from the printer, and the printer stops.
Figure 5-35
Cassette paper-size detection switches
162 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Overhead transparency detection
In order to prevent print-quality problems, the printer prints more slowly on overhead transparencies
(OHT) than on plain paper. A sensor above the paper leading edge sensor detects an OHT and signals the DC controller to slow the motors accordingly.
The OHT sensor uses a light-transmitter and light-receiver to detect the presence of plain paper.
When plain paper passes through the sensor, the light is blocked, and the OHT signal changes from low to high. Consequently, when the signal is not blocked, but the paper leading-edge sensor detects a sheet, the DC controller determines that the media is an OHT.
Figure 5-36 Overhead transparency detection illustrates this process.
ENWW
Figure 5-36
Overhead transparency detection
Pickup/feed system 163
Small-size paper detection
Because the printer's overhead transparency detection sensor is installed at the end of the feed path, small-size paper that does not pass the edge of the feed path can be mistaken for an OHT. To avoid this problem, the printer has a lever in front of the OHT detection sensor to distinguish small-sized paper. Small-size paper is too narrow to trip the lever. When the lever is tripped, the flag attached to the lever momentarily blocks light from reaching the OHT detection sensor, indicating that the media is full width. The DC controller determines whether the media is an OHT or a sheet of paper based on whether the OHT sensor remains shaded from light as the media passes through. If the lever is not triggered, the DC controller determines that the media is small-size paper.
Figure 5-37 Small-size paper detection illustrates this process.
Figure 5-37
Small-size paper detection
164 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
ENWW
Feed-speed control
The type of media in the paper path dictates the speed at which it is fed. The DC controller can
change the feed speed according to type of media. Table 5-7 Feed speed according to media
shows the relationship between media type and feed speed.
Table 5-7
Feed speed according to media
Feed mode
Normal mode
Media type
Plain paper
Feed speed
normal
OHT mode
Thick 1 mode
Thick 2 mode
Gloss 1 mode
Overhead transparency
Thick paper
Thick paper
Glossy paper
Print mode
Full color
Monochrome
Full color
Monochrome
Full color
Monochrome
Full color
Monochrome
1/4 speed
1/2 speed
1/2 speed
1/2 speed (CLJ 4600)
1/3 speed (CLJ 4610n and
4650)
1/3 speed
Gloss 2 mode
Image mode (high glossy mode; CLJ 4650 only)
Gloss film mode
Envelope mode
Glossy paper
Glossy paper
Glossy film
Envelope
Full color
Monochrome
Full color
Monochrome
Full color
Monochrome
Full color
Monochrome
1/3 speed
1/4 speed
1/3 speed (CLJ 4600)
1/4 speed (CLJ 4610n and
4650) normal
Thick paper mode
Label paper mode
Auto mode
Thick paper
Adhesive labels
■ Plain paper
■ OHT
Full color
Monochrome
Full color
Monochrome
Full color
Monochrome
Full color
Monochrome normal
1/2 speed
Automatically adjusts for media
Pickup/feed system 165
The DC controller determines a media mismatch, ejects the media, and stops the printer in the following situations:
■ When OHT is detected and the printer is set to either thick paper or gloss mode
■ When plain paper is detected and the printer is set to OHT mode
However, if the printer is set to plain-paper mode and OHT is detected, the DC controller will automatically switch the printer to OHT mode, and printing continues normally.
Fuser/delivery unit
The fuser/delivery unit consists of the fuser, which melts the toner and presses it onto the media, and the delivery unit, which feeds the sheets into the output bin. The sequence of events is as follows:
1
The ETB carries a sheet of media with transferred toner into the fuser.
2
The fuser motor adjusts its speed to maintain even tension on the media as it enters the fuser.
3
The fuser melts the individual toner particles. The fuser sleeve and pressure roller mix the liquefied toner and press it onto the media to create the appropriate color.
4
The media passes from the fuser into the output bin.
A sensor in the output bin detects when the bin is full. The DC controller will stop the printer after the current print job is complete.
166 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Duplex feed unit
During two-sided (duplex) printing, the duplex feed unit retrieves the paper from the output bin and sends it back through the pickup/feed unit to print on the second side. The sequence of events is as follows:
1
The paper, with the front side printed, passes through the fuser.
2
The fuser motor (M8) rotates counterclockwise for a specified length of time after the paper reaches the fuser delivery sensor. The fuser delivery roller reverses direction and feeds the
paper into the duplex feed unit. Figure 5-38 Duplex switch back illustrates this "switch back"
operation.
3
The oblique roller and feed roller feed the left edge of the paper so that it contacts the left-side plate in order to align the paper on the left margin.
4
The paper then re-enters the pickup/feed unit and the second side is printed.
5
The paper passes through the fuser a second time and comes to rest in the output bin.
NOTE
HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models only: During duplex printing, the printer prints the second side of the page first. For instance, if a four-page print job is to be printed on two sheets of paper, pages 2 and 4 print first, and then pages 1 and 3 print. For this reason, when preprinted letterhead is used for duplex printing, be sure to load the letterhead face-down in tray 2, tray 3, or tray 3/tray 4 (HP CLJ 4650 models only), and load letterhead face-up in tray 1.
ENWW
Figure 5-38
Duplex switch back
Pickup/feed system 167
500-sheet paper feeder
The HP Color LaserJet 4600dtn, 4600hdn, and 4650dtn printer models come standard with an additional 500-sheet paper feeder. It is an option for all other models except the HP Color LaserJet
4610n printer. This additional tray (tray 3) operates in the same way as tray 2.
500-sheet paper feeder shows the paper path with the additional 500-sheet paper feeder installed.
Figure 5-39
Additional 500-sheet paper feeder
168 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Pickup and feed operations
The following is the sequence of operations for the 500-sheet paper feeder.
Figure 5-40 500-sheet paper feeder pickup and feed operation illustrates this sequence.
1
The DC controller receives a print command from the formatter and sends a pickup command to the paper feeder driver.
2
The paper feeder driver rotates the main motor (M4001) in the paper feeder, and the feed roller starts to rotate.
3
After the printer enters the Scanner Ready state, the DC controller instructs the paper feeder driver to pick a sheet of media. The paper feeder pickup solenoid (SL4001) turns on. The pickup roller makes one rotation and picks up media from the paper feeder.
4
Separation pads eliminate extra sheets, and a single piece of media enters the feed path.
NOTE
Paper-size detection for the 500-sheet feeder is the same as that described in
Cassette detection and cassette paper-size detection . For the 500-sheet feeder, SW4001,
SW4002, and SW4003 are the equivalent of SW1, SW2, and SW3, respectively, in the 500sheet cassette.
ENWW
Figure 5-40
500-sheet paper feeder pickup and feed operation
500-sheet paper feeder 169
2 x 500-sheet feeder
The optional 2 x 500-sheet feeder (available for HP Color LaserJet 4650 models; standard on the
HP Color LseJet 4650hdn printer) provides two 500-sheet casettes that accept a variety of paper types and sizes. Each cassette can hold 56 mm (2.2 inches) of 80-g/m 2 (21-lb) media (about 500 sheets).
Figure 5-41
2 x 500-sheet feeder
170 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
Pickup and feed system
The following is the sequence of operations for the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (the sequence of operation is the same for either cassette).
Figure 5-42 2 x 500-sheet feeder pickup and feed operation illustrates this sequence.
1
The DC controller receives a print command from the formatter and sends a pickup command to the paper feeder driver.
2
The paper feeder driver rotates the main motor (M1) in the paper feeder, and the feed roller starts to rotate.
3
After the printer enters the SCANNER READY state, the DC controller instructs the paper feeder driver to pick a sheet of paper. The paper feeder pickup solenoid (SL1 for tray 3; SL2 for tray 4) turns on. The pickup roller makes one rotation and picks up paper in the cassette.
4
Separation pads eliminate any extra sheets, and a single piece of paper enters the feed path.
HCI driver PCA
SW1
SW2
M1
SL1
SL2
ENWW
Figure 5-42
2 x 500-sheet feeder pickup and feed operation
2 x 500-sheet feeder 171
Cassette detection and cassette paper-size detection
The printer can sense whether the cassette (tray 3/4) is installed correctly, and it can sense the size of the paper in the cassettes. Paper-size detection switches at the back of the cassettes send this information to the DC controller. The DC controller determines which size is loaded by reading various switches. See
Table 5-8 Cassette paper size detection (2 x 500-sheet feeder) . Figure 5-43
Cassette paper size detection switches (2 x 500-sheet feeder) shows how the switches are stacked.
Table 5-8
Cassette paper size detection (2 x 500-sheet feeder)
Paper size
A4
B5
A5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Custom
No cassette
Paper-size detection switch
off on off
SW1 on on on off off on on off
SW2 off on off on off off on off
SW3 off off on on on
Although the cassette determines the paper size by reading the switches, it is possible that the user can select a different size from what is loaded, creating an error in paper-size detection.
The paper leading-edge sensor detects when the leading edge and the trailing edge of a sheet of paper pass it. By measuring the time between the passing of the leading edge and trailing edge, the sensor determines the actual size of the sheet. If this measured size differs from the size specified by the formatter or the switch combination, the DC controller determines a mis-match. The sheet is ejected from the printer, and the printer stops.
Figure 5-43
Cassette paper size detection switches (2 x 500-sheet feeder)
172 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
6
Removal and replacement
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
●
●
●
Covers and external components
●
●
Optional 500-sheet paper feeder (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models only)
●
Optional 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3/tray 4) (HP Color LaserJet 4650 only)
ENWW 173
Introduction
This chapter explains how to remove and replace major printer components. (HP does not support repairing individual subassemblies or troubleshooting to the component level.) This chapter includes exploded-view illustrations of the printer and paper-handling accessories. If an assembly or part does not have a reference number in the illustration and is not listed in the parts list, it is not a field replaceable unit (FRU).
Replacement is generally the reverse of removal. Occasionally, directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures are included.
WARNING!
The information in this section is intended for authorized service personnel only.
Repair notices
WARNING!
Turn the printer off, wait five seconds, and then unplug the power cord before servicing the printer. Failure to completely disconnect the printer can result in severe injury.
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from the laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes.
Never operate the printer with any parts removed.
The sheet-metal parts can have sharp edges. Be careful not to cut yourself when handling sheet-metal parts.
Caution regarding electrostatic discharge (ESD)
The printer contains parts that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Watch for the ESD reminder when removing printer parts. Protect the PCA parts with protective ESD pouches.
Always use an ESD protected work station when servicing the printer or paper-handling accessories.
If an ESD work station is not available, ground yourself to discharge body static by touching the metal chassis of the printer or accessory.
Required tools
Before servicing the printer, gather the following tools:
■ Phillips #2 magnetized screwdriver (152-mm [6-inch] shaft)
■ Small flat-blade screwdriver
■ Small needle-nose pliers
■ ESD strap
■ Penlight (optional)
174 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
All components in the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer use Phillips-head screws that require a
#2 Phillips screwdriver. Make sure that you have a Phillips screwdriver and not a posidriv screwdriver.
Figure 6-1 Phillips and posidrive screwdriver comparison shows the difference between
a Phillips and a posidriv screwdriver. The surfaces on a Phillips tip are more beveled surfaces.
ENWW
Figure 6-1
Phillips and posidrive screwdriver comparison
Types of fasteners
determine where to use each type of screw. The screws vary in length depending on the thickness of the material being fastened.
Always note where each type of screw is located and replace each one into its original location.
Table 6-1
Types of fasteners
Illustration Description
Screw, machine with washer
Uses
To hold plastic to metal.
M3x8 part number xA9-1276-000CN
Screw, self tapping
For example: printer covers
Screw, truss head
M3x6 part number xA9-1275-000CN
Retaining ring (e-type)
To hold plastic to plastic.
For example: printer cover to a plastic hinge
To hold sheet metal to sheet metal.
For example: formatter cage
To hold a shaft through a slot.
For example: keep a gear on a shaft
Introduction 175
Supplies
The customer replaces print cartridges, the fuser, and the ETB as they are depleted. The printer tracks the amount of use on the customer-replaceable supplies by keeping a page count. Swapping supplies between printers might cause a misrepresentation of supply life values and is not recommended.
If you replace either the fuser or the transfer unit, and these supplies have not yet reached the end of their estimated life, you must reset the page count for these supplies through the Configure device menu on the control panel. See
Replacing the fuser when it is not at end of life
and
Replacing the transfer unit when it is not at end of life
for instructions.
Table 6-2
Approximate replacement intervals for supply items
Supply item Printer message
Black (K) print cartridge REPLACE BLACK
CARTRIDGE
Page counts
9,000 pages
Approximate replacement interval
2.7 months
Cyan (C) print cartridge REPLACE CYAN
CARTRIDGE
Magenta (M) print cartridge
Yellow (Y) print cartridge
Image transfer kit
(ETB)
REPLACE
MAGENTA
CARTRIDGE
REPLACE YELLOW
CARTRIDGE
REPLACE
TRANSFER KIT
8,000 pages
8,000 pages
8,000 pages
120,000 pages
2.7 months
2.7 months
2.7 months
40 months
To install or order
Installing the print cartridges
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
Installing the print cartridges
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
Installing the print cartridges
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
Installing the print cartridges
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
For part numbers, see
chapter 8.
176 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW
Table 6-2
Approximate replacement intervals for supply items (continued)
Image fuser kit REPLACE FUSER KIT 150,000 pages
50 months
1
2
3
For part numbers, see
in chapter 8.
Approximate life expectancies based on 3,000 pages per month.
The approximate average A4/Letter-size page count is based on 5% coverage of individual colors. Page counts are only estimations; usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary.
Page counts are only estimations; usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary.
CAUTION
The Hewlett-Packard Company recommends the use of HP products in this printer. Use of non-HP products can cause problems that require service that is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard Company warranty or service agreements.
Print cartridges and ETB
It is recommended that you remove the print cartridges and ETB when servicing internal printer components. Place the print cartridges and ETB in a safe place while they are out of the printer. To avoid damaging the print cartridges, do not expose them to direct bright light.
CAUTION
Grasp the print cartridges by the blue handles to avoid accidentally touching the photosensitive drum inside each cartridge.
CAUTION
Do not place any items on the ETB. If the belt is punctured or otherwise damaged, print quality problems will result. Avoid touching the belt surface. Skin oils can cause print quality problems.
For instructions about removing the print cartridges, see chapter 4.
For instructions about removing the ETB, see chapter 4.
Supplies 177
Covers and external components
The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of covers and external components.
Rear cover
1
Remove two screws (callout 1).
2
Pull out on the left side of the rear cover, and slide it to the left to remove it (callout 2).
Figure 6-2
Remove the rear cover
178 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Top cover
WARNING!
The fuser might be hot. Wait 10 minutes for it to cool down before removing it.
1
Lift the top cover and remove the fuser. See Replacing the fuser for instructions about removing
the fuser.
2
Using your fingers or needle-nose pliers, pinch and release the white plastic clips (callout 1) on the damper arm on the left side of the cover. It is easier to pinch these clips if you tip the top cover forward slightly.
Figure 6-3
Remove the top cover (1 of 2)
ENWW Covers and external components 179
3
Disengage the tab (callout 2) and remove the retaining block.
Figure 6-4
Remove the top cover (2 of 2)
4
Push the cover to the left to release the hinge pin on the right side, and then pull the cover to the right to release the hinge pin on the left side and remove the cover.
180 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW
Rear top cover
1
Remove the following assemblies:
● Rear cover. See
● Top cover. See
2
Remove three screws (callout 1).
Figure 6-5
Remove the rear top cover (1 of 3)
3
Insert a flat-blade screwdriver between the rear top cover and side cover on the right side of the printer.
4
Covers and external components 181
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the left side tabs (callout 2 in
Figure 6-6
Remove the rear top cover (2 of 3)
Figure 6-7
Remove the rear top cover (3 of 3)
182 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Left cover
1
Remove the following assemblies:
● Rear cover. See
● Top cover. See
● Rear top cover. See
.
2
Open the front cover, and then Remove one screw (callout 1) and disengage the locking tabs
(callout 2).
2
Figure 6-8
Remove the left cover (1 of 2)
1
ENWW
Figure 6-9
Remove the left cover (2 of 2)
3
Tilt the top of the cover away from the printer and remove it.
Reinstallation tip
When reinstalling the left cover, be sure to insert the two hooks that are along the bottom edge of the cover into the holes in the printer chassis.
Covers and external components 183
Right cover
1
Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
2
Open the front cover.
3
Remove one screw (callout 1) and disengage the two locking tabs (callout 2).
4
Tilt the top of the right cover away from the printer and remove it.
Figure 6-10
Remove the right cover
Reinstallation tip
When reinstalling the right cover, be sure to insert the two hooks that are along the bottom edge of the cover into the holes in the chassis.
184 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Multipurpose tray (tray 1)
1
Remove tray 2 from the printer and set it aside.
2
Unhook the two link arms (callout 1).
3
Flex the tray inward near the two link arms, and remove the tray.
Figure 6-11
Remove the multipurpose tray
ENWW Covers and external components 185
Front cover
1
Remove the multipurpose tray. See
2
Unhook the two spring rods (callout 1) from the slots (callout 2) on both sides of the printer.
CAUTION
Spring tension holds the rods in place. Use caution when removing them. Tilt the tray up slightly to lessen the spring tension, which makes the rods easier to remove.
3
Press outward on the tray near the tray hinge pins and remove the cover.
Figure 6-12
Remove the front cover
Reinstallation tip
Make sure that the rods are engaged in the slots in the chassis
(callout 2) when reinstalling the front cover.
186 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Control panel
1
Open the top cover if you have not already removed it.
2
Remove three screws (callout 1).
Figure 6-13
Remove the control panel (1 of 3)
ENWW
Figure 6-14
Remove the control panel (2 of 3)
Covers and external components 187
3
Lift the right side of the control panel, disconnect one connector (callout 2), unwind the wires from the stay (callout 3), and remove the control panel.
Figure 6-15
Remove the control panel (3 of 3)
188 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW
Installing a new overlay (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
NOTE
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer control panel is available in English only. You do not need to install an overlay or a label for this model. For the HP CLJ 4650 models, see
Installing a new control-panel label (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models) .
Some printer models are shipped without the control panel overlay installed or you might prefer using a different overlay from the one that is installed. Overlays are available for several languages, and you can change the language for control-panel messages. If you are setting up a printer for a language other than English, follow this procedure.
1
Open the top cover. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release the locking tabs on both sides of the control-panel overlay, and then remove the overlay.
2
Position the new overlay over the top of the control panel. Insert the left tab of the overlay into the slot on the printer face. Line up the tab on the right side of the overlay with the slot on the right side of the control panel. Set the overlay in place by pushing down on the overlay near the blue button.
3
Press to open the MENUS.
4
Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
5
Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
6
Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
7
Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
8
Press to highlight LANGUAGE.
9
Press to select LANGUAGE.
10
Press to highlight the approriate language, and then press to select and save the language choice.
Covers and external components 189
Installing a new control-panel label (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
NOTE
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer control panel is available in English only. You do not need to install an overlay or a label for this model. For the HP CLJ 4600 models, see
Installing a new overlay (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
.
Some printer models are shipped without the control panel labels installed or you might prefer using a different label from the one that is installed. Labels are available for several languages, and you can change the language for the control-panel messages. If you are setting up a printer for a language other than English, follow this procedure.
1
Remove the backing from the adhesive side of the label.
2
Position the new label over the top of the control panel.
3
Press the label firmly down onto the control panel.
NOTE
When applying the label, start at the center and press the label into place towards the edges of the control panel.
4
Press MENU to open the MENUS.
5
Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
6
Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
7
Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
8
Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
9
Press to highlight LANGUAGE.
10
Press to select LANGUAGE.
11
Press to highlight the appropriate language, and then press to select and save the language choice.
190 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Internal components
The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of internal components
DC controller shield
1
Remove the following assemblies:
● Print cartridges and ETB. See
.
● Rear cover. See
● Top cover. See
● Rear top cover. See
.
●
2
Remove nine screws (callout 1). A tenth screw might be located on the rear of the printer at the bottom of the DC controller shield (callout 2). If that tenth screw is present, remove it.
3
Remove the DC controller shield.
ENWW
Figure 6-16
Remove and replace the DC controller shield
Internal components 191
Internal components (front)
The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of internal components that are accessed from the front of the printer.
Paper pickup unit
1
Remove the DC controller shield. See
.
2
Use a screwdriver to rotate the ETB latch receptacles up. They are stiff and might be difficult to move.
3
Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 6-17
Remove the paper pickup unit (1 of 2)
192 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
4
Disconnect the connector (J1020 on the DC controller; callout 2) and push the connector through the hole in the chassis (callout 3).
Figure 6-18
Remove the paper pickup unit (2 of 2)
5
Lift the paper pickup unit up and pull it forward to remove it.
ENWW Internal components 193
Paper pickup sensor PCA
1
Remove the paper pickup unit. See Paper pickup unit .
2
Push in on the black tab (callout 1) on the right side of the paper pickup unit and then remove the sensor cover.
3
Remove three screws (callout 2), disconnect the connector (callout 3), and then remove the sensor PCA.
Figure 6-19
Remove the paper pickup sensor PCA (1 of 2)
Figure 6-20
Remove the paper pickup sensor PCA (2 of 2)
194 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Cassette (tray 2) paper pickup rollers
1
Remove the following assemblies:
● Print cartridges and ETB. See
.
●
Paper pickup unit. See Paper pickup unit .
2
From the bottom of the paper pickup unit, firmly push down on the paper pickup rollers (callout 1) to remove them.
Figure 6-21
Remove the cassette (tray 2) pickup rollers
Reinstallation tip
When reinstalling the paper pickup rollers, be sure to fit the pins on the pickup roller into the holes on the pickup-roller shaft.
ENWW
Figure 6-22
Reinstall the tray 2 pickup rollers
Internal components 195
Paper pickup drive unit
1
Remove the paper pickup unit. See Paper pickup unit .
2
On the bottom of the paper pickup unit, remove the screw holding the gear cover in place, and then remove the gear cover.
3
Unhook the spring from the gear (callout 1).
4
Using a flat-blade screwdriver, push down on the tab in the center of the gear (callout 2) to release it, and then remove the gear.
5
Remove three black screws (callout 3).
6
Disconnect the three connectors on the back of the paper pickup drive unit, and then remove the unit.
Figure 6-23
Remove the paper pickup drive unit
196 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Multipurpose tray pickup roller and separation pad
1
Remove tray 2 from the printer, and remove any paper in the tray.
2
Rotate the two lock pins outward (callout 1), and tilt the cassette cover forward to remove it.
3
Push the blue roller (callout 2) towards the back of the tray, and remove it.
NOTE
The locking pins are not captive. Do not lose them when the tray cover is removed.
4
Pull up on the multipurpose tray pickup roller (callout 3), and remove it.
5
Push outward on the two tabs that hold the separation pad in place (callout 4).
ENWW Internal components 197
6
Pull the separation pad forward to remove it (callout 5).
NOTE
Always replace the separation pad when you replace the multipurpose tray pickup roller.
Figure 6-24
Remove the multipurpose tray pickup roller and separation pad (1 of 2)
Figure 6-25
Remove the multipurpose tray pickup roller and separation pad (2 of 2)
198 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW
Solenoids
1
Remove the paper pickup unit. See
.
2
To remove the multipurpose tray solenoid, remove one screw (callout 1) and disconnect the connector (callout 2).
3
To remove the cassette solenoid, remove one screw (callout 3) and disconnect one connector
(callout 4).
Figure 6-26
Remove the solenoids
Internal components 199
Color registration detection unit
1
Open the top cover and the front cover.
2
Remove the ETB.
NOTE
To protect the ETB from damage, always remove the ETB when removing the color registration detection unit.
3
Remove the control panel. See
4
Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
5
Remove two screws (callout 2).
6
Remove one screw (callout 3). This screw is located on the right side of the printer, underneath the plate where the screws in callout 2 are located.
200 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
7
Remove the control panel support assembly (callout 4), and then remove the color registration detection unit, which is located behind the stay.
Figure 6-27
Remove the color registration detection unit (1 of 2)
ENWW
Figure 6-28
Remove the color registration detection unit (2 of 2)
Internal components 201
Internal components (left side)
The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of internal components that are accessed from the left side of the printer.
Environment sensor (HP Color LaserJet 4610n/4650 models only)
1
Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
2
Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
3
Release two locking tabs (callout 2) and then remove the environment sensor.
Figure 6-29
Remove the environment sensor
202 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Drum drive units
Removing the drum drive units requires several distinct procedures.
Drum drive developing disengaging rod
1
Remove the following assemblies:
● Rear cover. See
● Top cover. See
● Rear top cover. See
.
●
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
2
Remove the five screws (callout 1), and then remove the drum drive grounding plate (callout 2) that covers the developing disengaging rod.
3
Unhook the spring (callout 3), and then slide the developing disengaging rod up and out.
ENWW
Figure 6-30
Remove the developing disengaging rod
Internal components 203
Reinstalling the developing disengaging rod
1
When reinstalling the developing disengaging rod, be sure to rotate the white gear (located between the black and magenta drum-drive units) clockwise until it comes to a complete stop
(callout 1).
You cannot rotate the white gear unless all of the print cartridges are removed.
1
Figure 6-31
Reinstall the developing disengaging rod (1 of 2)
2
Also make sure that the developing disengaging rod passes through the slots in the drive clutches (in the up position; callout 2) in each of the four drum drive units, engaging each clutch.
The clutch on the yellow drum drive unit is particularly difficult to see and to engage.
2
Figure 6-32
Reinstall the developing disengaging rod (2 of 2)
204 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Drum drive gears
1
Remove the developing disengaging rod. See Drum drive developing disengaging rod .
2
Remove the eight screws shown in callout 1, and then remove the four drum-gear grounding plates.
NOTE
The grounding plates and drive gears for the cyan and magenta drum drive units have longer shafts than those in the yellow and black drum drive units.
3
Remove the four drum drive gears (callout 2).
ENWW
Figure 6-33
Remove the drum drive gears
NOTE
Calibrate the printer after removing and replacing any of the drum drive gears.
See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Drum home-position sensors
1
Remove the drum drive gears. See Drum drive gears .
2
Disconnect four connectors (callout 1).
3
Push each drum home-position sensor holder (behind the connectors shown in callout 1) toward the rear of the printer, and flex it to remove the projection. Remove the sensor.
Internal components 205
4
Disengage the two tabs that hold each drum home-position sensor in its holder, and then remove the sensors.
Figure 6-34
Remove the drum home-position sensors
NOTE
Calibrate the printer after reassembling the drum drive position sensors. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
Drum drive motors
1
Remove the drum drive gears. See Drum drive gears
206 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
2
From the front of the printer, release the tab that holds the black interlock cover (callout 1) in place, and then remove the interlock cover.
Figure 6-35
Remove the interlock cover
3
Remove the interlock arm from the interlock lever (callout 2).
ENWW
Figure 6-36
Remove the interlock arm
4
Lift the cartridge shutter bar (callout 3) up and out of the printer.
Internal components 207
5
Remove four screws (callout 4). In the picture, the gear hides the screw in the upper-left corner.
Figure 6-37
Remove the drum drive motors (cyan motor is shown)
6
Disconnect the connector for each drum drive motor from the DC controller PCA.
7
Remove the drum drive motors.
NOTE
Calibrate the printer after reassembling the drum drive motors. See
Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
208 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW
Memory-tag antenna PCAs
1
Remove the drum drive units. See Drum drive units .
2
Remove one screw (callout 1), and remove the grounding plate (callout 2).
3
Remove the white retainer (callout 3).
4
Disconnect the connector (callout 4) from the memory controller PCA.
5
Remove the memory-tag antenna PCA, which is inside the slot.
Figure 6-38
Remove the memory-tag antenna PCA (cyan is shown)
Internal components 209
Developing disengaging motor assembly
1
Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
● Developing disengaging rod. See Drum drive developing disengaging rod .
2
Remove three screws (callout 1).
3
Disconnect two connectors (callout 2).
4
Remove the developing disengaging motor assembly.
Figure 6-39
Remove the developing disengaging motor assembly
210 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
DC controller PCA
1
Remove the following assemblies:
● Rear cover. See
● Top cover. See
● Rear top cover. See
.
●
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
2
Remove four screws (callout 1).
3
Disconnect all of the connectors on the DC controller PCA, including the formatter ribbon cable
(callout 2).
CAUTION
When removing the formatter ribbon cable, be careful not to tear it or to damage the connector. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the brown tab over the connection. Do not pull on the ribbon cable without releasing this tab.
4
Remove the DC controller PCA.
ENWW
Figure 6-40
Remove the DC controller PCA
NOTE
Calibrate the printer after reinstalling the DC controller PCA. See Calibrate Now
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and
Internal components 211
Memory controller PCA
1
Remove the DC controller PCA. See
2
Remove three screws (callout 1).
3
Disconnect five connectors (callout 2).
4
Remove the memory controller PCA.
Figure 6-41
Remove the memory controller PCA
212 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW
Cassette paper-size-detection switch
1
Remove the following assemblies:
● Rear cover. See
● Top cover. See
● Rear top cover. See
.
●
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
2
Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
3
Squeeze the two locking tabs (callout 2), and remove the cassette paper-size-detection switch.
Figure 6-42
Remove the cassette paper-size-detection switch
Internal components 213
Internal components (rear)
The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of internal components that are accessed from the rear of the printer.
Formatter
1
Remove eight screws (callout 1).
NOTE
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models have different connectors, but the eight screws are in the same location.
2
Grasp the black disk-drive lock (callout 2), and pull the formatter out of the printer.
Figure 6-43
Remove the formatter (HP Color LaserJet 4600 model is shown)
NOTE
Calibrate the printer after reinstalling the formatter. See
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
214 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW
Low-voltage power supply
1
Remove the following assemblies:
● Rear cover. See
● Top cover. See
● Rear top cover. See
.
●
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
● Right cover. See
.
2
Remove two screws (callout 1).
Figure 6-44
Remove the low-voltage power supply (rear) (1 of 3)
Internal components 215
3
Remove two screws (callout 2) and then disconnect the connecting rod (callout 3).
3
2
Figure 6-45
Remove the low-voltage power supply (2 of 3)
4
Remove one screw (callout 4) and then disconnect the two connectors (callout 5).
5
Remove the low-voltage power supply.
CAUTION
When removing the low-voltage power supply, be sure that elements do not touch sheet metal.
4
5
Figure 6-46
Remove the low-voltage power supply (left side) (3 of 3)
216 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Power-supply fan (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
1
Remove the following assemblies:
● Rear cover. See
● Top cover. See
● Rear top cover. See
.
●
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
● Right cover. See
.
● Low-voltage power supply. See
.
2
Disconnect on connector from the DC controller PCA (callout 1).
3
Remove the wire from the wire guide, and pass the wire through the hole in the chassis (callout 2).
ENWW
Figure 6-47
Remove the power-supply fan (1 of 2; HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
Internal components 217
4
Release the locking tabs on the fan and remove the power-supply fan (callout 3).
Figure 6-48
Remove the power-supply fan (2 of 2; HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
Formatter case
1
Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
● Right cover. See
.
2
At the rear of the printer, remove eight screws (callout 1).
3
On the DC controller PCA, release the brown tab covering the formatter ribbon cable, and disconnect the cable (callout 2).
CAUTION
When removing the formatter ribbon cable, be careful not to tear it. Use a flatblade screwdriver to release the brown tab over the connection. Do not pull on the ribbon cable without releasing this tab.
218 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
4
Disconnect one connector (callout 3), and remove the formatter case.
Figure 6-49
Remove the formatter case (1 of 2)
ENWW
Figure 6-50
Remove the formatter case (2 of 2)
Internal components 219
Laser/scanner components
Removing the laser/scanner assembly requires several distinct procedures.
Remove the laser/scanner cover plate
1
Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
● Right cover. See
.
2
On the DC controller PCA, disconnect four connectors (callout 1).
3
On the DC controller PCA, release the brown tab covering the formatter ribbon cable, and disconnect the cable (callout 2).
CAUTION
When removing the formatter ribbon cable, be careful not to tear it. Use a flatblade screwdriver to release the brown tab over the connection. Do not pull the ribbon cable without releasing this tab.
Figure 6-51
Disconnect the laser/scanner connectors and formatter ribbon cable
4
Remove the formatter case. See
5
At the rear of the printer, place the cardboard spacer (included with the laser/scanner assembly) underneath the V mark on the bottom of the chassis (callout 3).
220 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
CAUTION
Always place the spacer under the chassis. This spacer supports the printer and keeps it from flexing when the plate that covers the laser/scanner units is removed. If the chassis flexes, the laser beams can become skewed, resulting in print-quality problems.
6
Remove four screws (callout 4).
Figure 6-52
Remove the laser/scanner cover plate (1 of 2)
7
Using needle-nose pliers, pull down on the right side of the wire clip, then release the left side of the clip from the bracket. Repeat this step for each of the four clips.
8
Remove the plate that covers the laser/scanner units.
ENWW
Figure 6-53
Remove the laser/scanner cover plate (2 of 2)
Reinstallation tip
When reinserting the four wire clips, insert the left end of the clip first, thread the clip under the center notch, and then insert the right end of the clip.
Internal components 221
Remove the laser/scanner retaining bars
1
Remove the laser/scanner cover plate. See
Remove the laser/scanner cover plate
.
2
Pull the cables for the four laser/scanner connectors free of the printer chassis.
3
On the left side of the printer, remove one screw above the DC controller (callout 1).
Figure 6-54
Remove the left side laser/scanner retaining bar (1 of 2, left side of printer)
4
Push the top of the sheet-metal scanner retaining bar towards the laser/scanner units (callout 2).
Figure 6-55
Remove the left side laser/scanner retaining bar (2 of 2, rear of printer)
5
Rotate the bar down and carefully remove it from the printer.
CAUTION
The scanner retaining bars are under spring tension. Remove them carefully.
222 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
6
On the top surface of the right side of the printer, remove one screw (callout 3).
Figure 6-56
Remove the right side laser/scanner retaining bar (1 of 2, right side of printer)
7
On the right side of the printer, push the top of the sheet-metal scanner retaining bar in towards the laser/scanners (callout 4).
ENWW
Figure 6-57
Remove the right side laser/scanner retaining bar (2 of 2, rear of printer)
8
Rotate the bar down and carefully remove it from the printer.
Reinstallation tip
Reinstall the laser/scanner retaining bars in the same order that you removed them: the left side and then the right side. Feed the connector cables through the frame and reconnect the connectors to the DC controller.
Internal components 223
To remove the laser/scanner assemblies
CAUTION
The laser/scanner unit can be replaced, but the unit is not adjustable in the field.
Do not disassemble it.
1
Remove the laser/scanner retaining bars. See
Remove the laser/scanner retaining bars
.
2
Slide the cyan laser/scanner unit to the left and then pull it out of the printer.
3
For the yellow, magenta, and black laser/scanner units, first unhook each assembly from the white strap (callout 1). Then pull the laser/scanner units out of the printer.
CAUTION
When reinstalling the laser/scanner units, always reconnect them to the strap
(callout 1). Failure to do so could cause the laser/scanners to become distorted, and the laser beam could become skewed, resulting in image defects.
Figure 6-58
Remove the laser/scanner assemblies
224 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Internal components (right side)
The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of internal components that are accessed from the right side of the printer.
High-voltage power supply PCA
WARNING!
The high-voltage power supply PCA is an electrostatic-sensitive device.
1
Remove the following assemblies:
● Rear cover. See
● Top cover. See
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Right cover. See
.
2
Remove three screws (callout 1).
3
Pinch the four retainer clips (callout 2) to release the board.
4
Disconnect the connector, and then Remove the high-voltage power supply PCA.
ENWW
Figure 6-59
Remove the high-voltage power supply PCA
Internal components 225
Reinstall the high-voltage power supply PCA
1
When reinstalling the high-voltage power supply PCA, be sure to align the white markings on the left side of the PCA with the hooks on the printer, and then snap in the PCA.
2
Verify that the PCA is aligned correctly by looking through the 12 holes on the PCA (callout 3).
3
When the PCA is aligned correctly, you can see part of the contact springs (callout 4) when you look through the holes.
4
3
Figure 6-60
Reinstall the high-voltage power supply PCA
226 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Toner level detection PCA
WARNING!
The toner-level detection PCA is an electrostatic-sensitive device.
1
Remove the following assemblies:
● Rear cover. See
● Top cover. See
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Right cover. See
.
● High-voltage power supply PCA. See
High-voltage power supply PCA .
2
Remove three screws (callout 1).
3
Disconnect one connector (callout 2).
4
Remove the toner-level detection PCA (callout 3).
ENWW
Figure 6-61
Remove the toner level detection PCA
Internal components 227
High-voltage contact blocks
1
Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Right cover. See
.
●
High-voltage power supply PCA. See High-voltage power supply PCA .
● Toner-level detection PCA. See
.
2
Remove one screw (callout 1).
3
Remove wires from the guides (callout 2).
4
Remove the high-voltage contact block (callout 3).
5
Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each of the four high-voltage contact blocks.
Figure 6-62
Remove the high-voltage contact blocks (cyan is shown)
228 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Door switch
1
Remove the following assemblies:
● Rear cover. See
● Top cover. See
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Right cover. See
.
2
Remove one screw (callout 1).
3
Disconnect two connectors (callout 2).
4
Remove the door switch.
ENWW
Figure 6-63
Remove the door switch
Internal components 229
Internal components (top)
The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of internal components that are accessed from the top of the printer.
Fuser power supply PCA
WARNING!
The fuser power supply PCA is an electrostatic sensitive device.
1
Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
2
Disconnect the J203 connector (callout 1).
3
Remove the cable (callout 2) from the fuser power supply cover.
4
Remove one screw (callout 3), and then remove the fuser power supply cover (callout 4).
Figure 6-64
Remove the fuser power supply PCA (1 of 2)
5
Remove two screws (callout 5), and then use needle-nose pliers to remove four clips (callout 6).
230 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
6
Disconnect four connectors (callout 7), and then remove the fuser power supply PCA.
Figure 6-65
Remove the fuser power supply PCA (2 of 2)
Reinstallation tip
When reinstalling the fuser power supply PCA, connect the J203 connector last.
ENWW Internal components 231
Fuser drive unit
1
Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
● Control panel. See
.
2
From the left side of the printer, at the top and front of the chassis, unhook the white tab that holds the hinge cover in place, and remove the hinge cover. (This tab is located above and to the right of the black-drum drive unit.)
3
On the DC controller, disconnect the three connectors J1002, J1030, and J1034.
4
Remove twoe screws (callout 1).
Figure 6-66
Remove the fuser drive unit (1 of 2)
232 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
5
Disconnect the connector (callout 2) and then remove one screw (callout 3). (This connector is hidden in
Figure 6-67 Remove the fuser drive unit (2 of 2) . It is on the rear left side of the fuser
drive unit).
2
Figure 6-67
Remove the fuser drive unit (2 of 2)
6
Remove the fuser drive unit from the printer.
7
Remove the screw that attaches the hinge unit, and remove the hinge unit from the fuser drive.
ENWW Internal components 233
Fuser inlet paper sensor
1
Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Fuser. See
2
Unhook two tabs (callout 1; they are on the front of the sensor).
3
Disconnect the connector directly in front of those tabs (this connector is hidden in the photo).
4
Remove the fuser paper sensor (callout 2).
Figure 6-68
Remove the fuser paper sensor
234 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
ENWW
Fuser delivery sensor
1
Remove the following assemblies:
● Rear cover. See
● Top cover. See
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Fuser. See
2
Unhook the two tabs on the back of the sensor (on the connector side).
3
Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
4
Remove the fuser delivery sensor (callout 2).
Figure 6-69
Remove the fuser delivery sensor
Internal components 235
Output-bin-full sensor
1
Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Fuser. See
2
Unhook the two tabs (callout 1).
3
Disconnect one connector (callout 2).
4
Remove the output-bin-full sensor (callout 3).
Figure 6-70
Remove the output-bin-full sensor
236 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Cartridge fan
NOTE
The cartridge fan is the vertical fan that is closest to the front of the printer.
1
Remove the following assemblies:
● Rear cover. See
● Top cover. See
● Rear top cover. See
.
●
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
2
Disconnect the connector J1004 on the DC controller PCA.
3
Remove the cables from the guides (callout 1).
4
Remove the two screws (callout 2).
5
Remove the fan holder and fan from the printer (callout 3).
6
Remove the fan from the fan holder.
ENWW
Figure 6-71
Remove the cartridge fan
Internal components 237
Formatter fan
NOTE
The formatter fan is the horizontal fan that is closest to the rear of the printer.
1
Remove the following assemblies:
●
● Top cover. See
.
● Rear top cover. See
.
● Left cover. See
●
DC controller shield. See DC controller shield .
● Cartridge fan and holder. See
2
Disconnect the connector J1003 on the DC controller.
3
Remove two screws (callout 1).
4
Remove the fan holder and fan from the fan printer.
5
Remove the fan from the fan holder.
Figure 6-72
Remove the formatter fan
Reinstallation tip
When reinstalling the formatter fan, make sure that the arrow on the fan holder and the arrow on the fan are pointing in the same direction.
238 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Optional 500-sheet paper feeder (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models only)
Use the following procedures to remove and replace components on the 500-sheet paper feeder.
500-sheet paper feeder top cover plate
1
Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover from the 500-sheet paper feeder.
2
Remove the six screws (callout 2), and then remove the top plate.
NOTE
The internal components of the 500-sheet paper feeder are mounted on the underside of the top cover plate.
Figure 6-73
Remove the 500-sheet paper feeder top cover plate
ENWW Optional 500-sheet paper feeder (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models only) 239
500-sheet paper feeder drive unit
1
2
Remove the spring and the E-ring (callout 1).
3
Unhook the tab in the center of the gear (callout 2), and remove the gear.
4
Disconnect three connectors (callout 3; two of the connectors are on the paper feeder PCA).
5
Remove two screws (callout 4), and then slide the drive unit out.
Figure 6-74
Remove the 500-sheet paper feeder drive unit (1 of 2, top view)
Figure 6-75
Remove the 500-sheet paper feeder drive unit (2 of 2, side view)
240 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Reinstall the 500-sheet paper-feeder drive unit
1
When reassembling the drive unit, position the cam (callout 5) on the shaft. See
Reinstall the 500-sheet paper-feeder drive unit .
2
Position the gear (callout 6) on the shaft.
Figure 6-76
Reinstall the 500-sheet paper-feeder drive unit
ENWW Optional 500-sheet paper feeder (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models only) 241
500-sheet paper-feeder pickup rollers
The procedure for removing the 500-sheet paper feeder pickup rollers is essentially the same as for the cassette (tray 2) pickup rollers. See
Cassette (tray 2) paper pickup rollers .
500-sheet paper-feeder PCA
WARNING!
The paper-feeder PCA is an electrostatic sensitive device.
1
Remove the top plate from the 500-sheet paper feeder (see
500-sheet paper feeder top cover plate ), and then turn it upside-down.
2
Disconnect five connectors (callout 1).
3
Remove the screw (callout 2).
4
Remove the paper-feeder PCA.
Figure 6-77
Remove the 500-sheet paper-feeder PCA
242 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
Optional 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3/tray 4)
(HP Color LaserJet 4650 only)
Use the following procedures to remove and replace components on the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder.
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder front cover
1
Remove the tray 3/tray 4 cassettes.
2
On tray 3/tray 4 (the 2 X 500–sheet feeder), remove two screws (callout 1) and remove the front cover.
Figure 6-78
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder front cover
ENWW Optional 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3/tray 4) (HP Color LaserJet 4650 only) 243
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover
1
Remove two screws (callout 1) and remove the printer anchor plates (callout 2).
2
Remove six screws (callout 3) and remove the rear cover.
Figure 6-79
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover (1 of 2)
Figure 6-80
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover (2 of 2)
244 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover
1
Remove the following assemblies:
●
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder front cover. See 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder front cover
.
● 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover .
2
Remove four screws (callout 1) and remove the left cover.
Figure 6-81
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover
ENWW Optional 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3/tray 4) (HP Color LaserJet 4650 only) 245
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder right cover
1
Remover the following assemblies:
● 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder front cover. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder front cover
.
● 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover .
2
Remove four screws (callout 1) and then remove the right cover.
Figure 6-82
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder right cover
246 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper-cassette pickup assembly
1
Remove the following assemblies:
● 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover .
● 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder right cover. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder right cover .
2
Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and release the wire harness from the harness guides
(callout 2).
3
Remove ten screws (callout 3) and remove the upper-cassette pickup assembly (callout 4).
Figure 6-83
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper-cassette pickup assembly (1 of 2)
ENWW
Figure 6-84
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper-cassette pickup assembly (2 of 2)
Optional 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3/tray 4) (HP Color LaserJet 4650 only) 247
2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder drive assembly
1
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover .
2
Disconnect two springs (callout 1).
3
Remove two gears (callout 2) by releasing the locking tabs and sliding the gears off of the shaft.
4
Disconnect five connectors (callout 3) and then remove three screws (callout 4).
5
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder drive assembly (callout 5).
Figure 6-85
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder drive assembly (1 of 2)
Figure 6-86
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder drive assembly (2 of 2)
248 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder feed sensor
1
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper cassette pickup assembly. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper-cassette pickup assembly
.
2
Remove two screws (callout 1).
3
Release the two feed roller retaining tabs (callout 2) and then remove the feed roller assembly
(callout 3).
4
Disconnect one connector (callout 4) and then remove the feed sensor (callout 5).
Figure 6-87
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder feed sensor (1 of 2)
ENWW
Figure 6-88
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder feed sensor (2 of 2)
Optional 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3/tray 4) (HP Color LaserJet 4650 only) 249
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper- or lower-cassette paper sensor
1
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover .
2
Disconnect two springs (callout 1) and then remove two E-rings (callout 2).
Figure 6-89
Remove 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper-cassette paper sensor (1 of 3)
3
Disconnect five connectors (callout 3) and then remove four screws (callout 4).
4
Remove the sheet-metal cover (callout 5).
Figure 6-90
Remove 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper-cassette paper sensor (2 of 3)
5
For the upper-cassette paper sensor, disconnect one connector (callout 6) and then remove the upper-cassette paper sensor (callout 7).
250 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
6
For the lower-cassette paper sensor, disconnect one connector (callout 8) and then remove the lower-cassette paper sensor (callout 9).
Figure 6-91
Remove 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper-cassette paper sensor (3 of 3)
ENWW Optional 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3/tray 4) (HP Color LaserJet 4650 only) 251
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper- or lower-cassette paperdetection switch
1
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover. See
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover .
2
For the upper cassette paper-detection switch, disconnect one connector (callout 1), release the switch retaining tabs (callout 2) and then remove the upper-cassette paper switch (callout 3).
3
For the lower cassette switch, disconnect one connector (callout 4), release the switch retaining tabs (callout 5) and then remove the lower-cassette paper sensor (callout 6).
Figure 6-92
Remove 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder upper-cassette paper-detection switch
252 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder driver PCA
1
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover. See 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder left cover .
2
Disconnect nine connectors (callout 1) and then remove two screws (callout 2).
3
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder driver PCA (callout 3)
Figure 6-93
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder driver PCA
ENWW Optional 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (tray 3/tray 4) (HP Color LaserJet 4650 only) 253
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder pickup rollers
1
Locate the upper and lower pickup rollers (callout 1).
2
For the upper pickup rollers: Separate the feeder from the printer. Push firmly on the roller to remove it from the roller shaft. Repeat this step for the remaining roller.
3
For the lower pickup roller: Remove the upper cassette from the feeder. Push firmly on the roller to remove it from the roller shaft. Repeat this step for the remaining roller.
Figure 6-94
Remove the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder pickup rollers
Reinstallation tip
When reinstalling the paper pickup rollers, be sure to fit the pins on the pickup roller into the holes on the pickup roller shaft.
Figure 6-95
Reinstall the 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder pickup rollers
254 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
7 Troubleshooting
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
●
●
●
●
Replacement-parts configuration (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
●
●
Media-transport troubleshooting
●
Image-formation troubleshooting
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
ENWW 255
Introduction
The information in this troubleshooting chapter is presented with the assumption that the reader has a basic understanding of the color laser-printing process. Explanations of each mechanical assembly, printer systems, and the basic theory of operation are provided in chapter 5. Do not perform any of these troubleshooting processes without fully understanding the function of each mechanism.
This chapter contains the following sections:
■ Troubleshooting process includes a pre-troubleshooting checklist and a troubleshooting flowchart. These tools contain information about common printer errors that can inhibit proper operation or create print-quality problems. These tools also include recommendations for solving the cause of the error.
■ Printer-error troubleshooting explains each control-panel-display message and suggests recommendations for clearing the cause of each message. When the printer message indicates a failure for which the root cause is not obvious, use the printer-error troubleshooting section and the troubleshooting tools section in this chapter to solve the problem.
■ Replacement parts configuration describes the procedures that are involved when replacing parts on the HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models.
■ Paper-path troubleshooting provides techniques to solve feed problems. Explanations are provided about print-media checks, jam troubleshooting, and the differences between jams caused by media and those caused by the printer.
■ Media-transport troubleshooting provides information about identifying and resolving printmedia feed problems.
■ Image-formation troubleshooting suggests methods for solving print-quality problems.
■ Image-defects troubleshooting lists image defects that can occur, and describes possible causes of the defects and procedures to resolve the problem.
■ Interface troubleshooting provides techniques for isolating communication problems to the printer hardware, printer configuration, network configuration, or software program.
■ Control panel troubleshooting provides procedures for printing a menu map from the printer control panel. It also describes the control-panel menus, the items within each menu, and the possible values for the menu items.
■ Tools for troubleshooting help isolate the cause of printer failures. This section includes explanations of the printer configuration page and the event log.
■ Diagnostics provides instructions about how to gain access to and use the diagnostic tools that are incorporated into the printer.
■ Test pages explains tests that can be used to determine whether the print engine and formatter are functioning.
■ Engine reset describes how to perform an engine reset.
■ Service menu provides procedures for opening the service menu and performing serviceoriented tasks. These tasks include counts for entering the serial number, service ID, transfer unit maintenance, fuser maintenance, color page, and total page, and clearing the event log.
256 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
■ Diagrams provides graphical locations and tables for the printer's internal assemblies and sensors.
ENWW Introduction 257
Troubleshooting process
When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control panel alerts you to the situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible causes of the problem. A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem. The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems.
■ Use the pre-troubleshooting checklist to evaluate the source of the problem and to reduce the number of steps that are required to fix the problem.
■ Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart guides you to the appropriate section of this chapter that provides steps for correcting the malfunction.
Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following conditions:
■ Are supply items within their rated life?
■ Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?
NOTE
The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition.
258 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Pre-troubleshooting checklist
The list below describes basic questions to ask the customer to help quickly define the problem(s).
Table 7-1
Pre-troubleshooting checklist
Environment ■ Is the printer installed on a solid, level surface?
■ Is the printer to particle matter or dust?
■ Is the power-supply voltage within ± 10 volts of the specified power source?
■ Is the power supply plug inserted in the printer and the outlet?
■ Is the operating environment within the specified parameters, as listed in chapter 1 of this manual?
■ Is the printer exposed to ammonia gas, such as that produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials?
■ Is the printer exposed to direct sunlight?
Media
Input trays
Print cartridges
ETB and fuser
Covers
Condensation
Miscellaneous
■ Does the customer use only supported media?
■ Is the media in good condition (contains no curls, folds, and so forth)?
■ Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits?
■ Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications?
■ Is the media placed in the tray correctly?
■ Are the paper guides aligned with the media?
■ Is the cassette correctly installed in the printer?
■ Is each print cartridge correctly installed?
■ Are the ETB and fuser correctly installed?
■ Are the top cover and front cover closed?
■ Does condensation occur following a temperature change
(particularly in winter following cold storage)? If so, wipe the affected dry or leave the printer on for 10 to 20 minutes.
■ Was a print cartridge installed soon after being moved from a cold to a warm room? If so, allow the printer to sit at room temperature for one to two hours.
■ Check for and remove any non-HP components (print cartridges, memory modules, and EIO cards) from the printer.
■ If hardware or software configuration has not changed, or the problem is not associated with any specific software, contact the
Customer Care Center (see chapter 1).
Troubleshooting process 259
Table 7-1
Pre-troubleshooting checklist (continued)
■ Remove the printer from the network, and ensure that the failure is associated with the printer before beginning troubleshooting.
■ For any print quality issues, calibrate the printer. See
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
260 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Troubleshooting basics
The procedure that follows highlights the general processes that you can use to isolate and solve printer hardware problems quickly.
Each step depicts a major troubleshooting step. A "yes" answer to the questions allows you to proceed to the next major step.
A "no" answer indicates that additional testing is needed. Proceed to the referenced section in this chapter, and follow the instructions there. After completing this additional testing, proceed to the next major step in the troubleshooting flowchart.
1 Turn the power on. Does a readable message appear on the control-panel display? If yes, then go to step 2. If no, then check the following items.
NOTE
If the printer control-panel display is blank, but the power-on checks pass, try printing an engine-test page to determine whether the problem is with the engine or display, or with the formatter.
● Perform the troubleshooting power-on checks. See
in this chapter.
● When the control-panel display is fuctioning, go to step 2
2 Do any of the following messages appear on the control-panel display: READY, OFFLINE, or
POWERSAVER ON? if yes, go to step 3. If no, then check the following items.
● Open the SHOW EVENT LOG in the Diagnostics menu from the control-panel display to view informatiom about recent printer errors. See
View the event log on the control-panel display in this chapter.
● Does the LED blink at a constant rate? See
LED diagnostics in this chapter.
● After correcting errors and performing the LED diagnostics, go to step 3.
3 Have you evaluated the event log? If yes, go to step 4. If no, then check the following items.
● Open the PRINT EVENT LOG in the Diagnostics menu from the control-panel display to
show the last 50 printer errors. See Diagnostics menu in this chapter. If you experience jams
while trying to print the event log, see
Paper-path troubleshooting in this chapter
● Evaluate the event log. Look for reoccurring errors. After evualuating the event log, go to step 4.
4 Can you print a configuration page? See
in this chapter. If yes, go to step 5.
If no, check the following items.
● Open the SHOW EVENT LOG in the Diagnostics menu from the control-panel display to
● After correcting the error, print a configuration page and verify the printer configuration information. See
in this chapter. Go to step 5.
Troubleshooting process 261
5 Does the image quality meet the user's requirements? If yes, go to step 6. If no, check the following items.
● Print the print-quality troubleshooting pages. See
Print-quality troubleshooting pages in this
chapter.
● Solve the print-quality problems, and then go to step 6.
6 Can you successfully print from the computer that is directly connected to the printer or connected by a network? If yes, then this procedure is completed. If no, print a job from the computer that is directly connected to the printer or connected by a network. Perform the appropriate corrective actions.
Troubleshooting power-on
When you turn on the printer, if it does not make any sound or if the control-panel display is blank, check the following items:
1
Verify that the printer is plugged into an active electrical outlet that is of the correct voltage.
2
Verify that the on/off switch is in the ON position.
3
Make sure that the rear fan is running, which indicates that the system is operational.
4
Verify that the firmware DIMM (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or CompactFlash (HP Color
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) and the formatter are seated and operating correctly.
5
Remove any HP Jetdirect or other EIO cards, and then try to turn the printer on again.
6
Make sure that the control-panel display is connected.
7
Check the fuses in the power supply.
8
If necessary, replace the power supply.
9
If necessary, replace the DC controller.
262 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Printer-error troubleshooting
The following tables explain messages that might appear on the printer control panel. Alphabetical printer messages and their meanings are listed in alphabetical printer messages table in this chapter, and numerical printer messages are listed in numerical printer messages table in this chapter.
NOTE
Not all of the messages are described in the tables. Self-explanatory messages are not listed. Some messages might never appear, depending on the printer model that you have. For example, messages that apply only to the HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models will not appear on the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models.
Status messages
Status messages reflect the current state of the printer. They inform you of normal printer operation and require no interaction to clear them. They change as the state of the printer changes. Whenever the printer is ready, not busy, and has no pending warning messages, the status message Ready appears if the printer is online.
Warning messages
Warning messages inform you of data and print errors. These messages typically alternate with
Ready or with status messages, and they appear until is pressed. If CLEARABLE WARNING is set to JOB in the printer configuration menu, these messages are cleared by the next print job.
Error messages
Error messages communicate that some action must be performed, such as adding media or clearing a media jam.
Some error messages are auto-continuable; if AUTO CONTINUE=ON the printer will continue normal operation after an auto-continuable error message has appeared for 10 seconds.
NOTE
Any button that is pressed during the 10-second appearance of an auto-continuable error message overrides the auto-continue feature, and the function of the pressed button takes precedence.
Critical error messages
Critical error messages inform you of a device failure. Some of these messages can be cleared by turning the printer off and then on. These messages are not affected by the auto-continue setting. If a critical error persists, service is required.
ENWW Printer-error troubleshooting 263
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
NOTE
Many of the procedures in this section instruct you to replace the DC controller PCA, the ETB, the formatter, the drum drive motors, the drum drive gears, or a laser/scanner unit.
After replacing one of these items, you must access the Print Quality menu and select
CALIBRATE NOW to ensure good print quality after the repair. When the ETB or the fuser are replaced before their normal end of life, access the resets menu and reset the counter to zero. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) .
Table 7-2
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Message Description Action
Access denied menus locked
An attempt has been made to modify a menu item, but the printer administrator has enabled the control-panel security mechanism. The message will disappear shortly, and the printer will return to the Ready state.
BAD OPTIONAL TRAY CONNECTION
The 500-sheet input tray is not making a sufficient connection with the printer.
Contact the printer administrator to change settings.
1 Verify that the printer is on a level surface.
2 Turn the printer off.
3 Reseat the printer on the 500sheet input tray.
4 If the printer is on the optional printer stand, make sure that the support straps are attached to the rear of the stand and the printer.
5 Turn the printer on after reseating the 500-sheet input tray.
CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT
AVAILABLE
For help press
The PJL encountered a request for a personality that does not exist in the printer. The job is aborted and no pages are printed.
1
Press for detailed information.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
alternates with
CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT
AVAILABLE
To continue press
Clearing paper path
CLOSE FRONT COVERS
For help press
The printer jammed or detected misplaced paper when turned on. The printer is attempting to eject jammed pages automatically.
The covers have to be closed.
No action is necessary.
1
Press for more information.
2 Close the front covers.
264 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-2
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
CPR SENSOR
OUT OF RANGE
The CPR Sensor is not behaving correctly.
NOTE
This message might also appear if the fuser is missing or incorrectly installed.
Ensure that the fuser is correctly installed.
1 Force a calibration by selecting
Calibrate Now on the Print
Quality menu. See
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) .
2 If the message persists, verify that the cables are seated correctly and the connector J1024 is making good contact with the DC controller.
3 Replace the color-registration detection unit.
4 If the message persists, replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
DATA RECEIVED
To print last page press
DETECTABLE SIZE
IN TRAY xx
For help press
The printer received data and is waiting for a form feed. When the printer receives another file, the message should disappear.
A tray has been loaded with media that is a standard size and the switch in the tray is set to custom.
Press to continue.
1
2
Press for detailed information.
Press and to step through the instructions.
alternates with
DETECTABLE SIZE IN TRAY xx
Recommend move switch to STANDARD
DISK DEVICE
FAILURE
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
A device failure has occurred on the specified drive.
1 Printing can continue for jobs that do not require access to the disk drive.
2 To clear the message, turn the printer off and then on.
3 If the message persists, remove and reinstall the EIO disk drive.
4 If the message persists, replace the EIO disk drive.
Printer-error troubleshooting 265
Table 7-2
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
DISK FILE
OPERATION FAILED
alternates with
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted an illogical operation (for example, to download a file to a non-existent directory).
1 Printing can continue.
2 Turn the printer off and then on.
3 If the message reappears, a problem might exist with the software program.
Ready
For menus press
DISK FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
alternates with
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system. The attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full.
1 Use the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the
EIO disk drive and then try again.
2 To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
Ready
For menus press
DISK IS
WRITE PROTECTED
alternates with
The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.
1 To enable writing to the disk, turn off write protection, by using HP
Web Jetadmin.
2 To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
Ready
For menus press
EIO DISK x
NOT FUNCTIONAL
For help press
FLASH DEVICE
FAILURE
The EIO disk in slot x is not working correctly.
A device failure has occurred on the specified drive.
Remove the EIO disk from the indicated slot and replace it with a new
EIO disk drive.
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
1 Printing can continue for jobs that do not require the flash DIMM.
2 To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
3 If the message persists, remove and reinstall the flash DIMM.
4 If the message persists, replace the flash DIMM.
FLASH FILE
OPERATION FAILED
alternates with
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted an illogical operation (for example, to download a file to a non-existent directory).
1 Printing can continue.
2 Turn the printer off and then on.
3 If the message reappears, a problem might exist with the software program.
266 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-2
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
Ready
For menus press
FLASH FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
alternates with
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system. The attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full.
1 Use HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the flash memory and then try again.
2 To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
Ready
For menus press
FLASH IS
WRITE PROTECTED
alternates with
The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.
1 To enable writing to the flash memory, turn off write protection by using HP Web Jetadmin.
2 To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
Ready
For menus press
INCORRECT <COLOR> CARTRIDGE
An incorrect cartridge is installed in a slot and the cover is closed.
alternates with
1
Press and then press for help.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
For status press
Incorrect PIN
The wrong PIN was typed.
INCORRECT SUPPLIES
For status press
At least one supply item is incorrectly positioned in the printer and another supply item is missing, incorrectly placed, out, or low.
Type the correct PIN. After three incorrect PIN entries, the printer returns to Ready.
1
Press and then press for help.
2 Follow the instructions on the control-panel display to locate and replace the incorrect supply.
3
Press and to step through the instructions.
Initializing
INSERT OR CLOSE
TRAY xx
For help press
This message appears when the printer is turned on, as soon as the individual tasks begin to initialize.
Tray xx must be inserted or closed before the current job can be printed.
No action is necessary.
1
Press for detailed information.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
Printer-error troubleshooting 267
Table 7-2
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
INSTALL <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
alternates with
For help press
The cartridge is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer.
1 Insert the cartridge or make sure that the cartridge is fully seated.
2
Press for detailed information.
3
Press and the instructions.
to step through
4 If the error persists, replace the cartridge.
5 Verify that the connectors between the memory tag antenna, memory controller board, and the DC controller are seated correctly.
6 Replace the antenna PCA for the indicated color.
7 Replace the memory controller
PCA.
8 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
.
INSTALL FUSER
For help press
The fuser is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer.
1 Insert the fuser or make sure that the installed fuser is fully seated.
2
Press for detailed information.
3
Press and the instructions.
to step through
4 If the error persists, verify that fuser connector J4034 is good; replace the connector if necessary.
5 Replace the fuser assembly.
6 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
.
INSTALL SUPPLIES
For status press
At least one supply item is missing or is not correctly seated in the printer and another supply item is missing, incorrectly placed, out, or low. Insert the supply item or make sure that the installed supply item is fully seated.
1
Press and then press for help.
2 Follow the instructions on the control-panel display to locate and replace the missing or incorrect supply.
3
Press and to step through the instructions.
268 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW alternates with
LOAD TRAY xx:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To use another tray press
LOAD TRAY xx:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
MANUALLY FEED
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press alternates with
MANUALLY FEED
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To continue press
Table 7-2
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
INSTALL TRANSFER
UNIT
For help press
The transfer unit is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer.
1 Insert the transfer unit or make sure the installed transfer unit is fully seated.
2
Press for detailed information.
3
Press and to step through the instructions.
4 If the error persists, verify that the
ETB connectors (J4017 on the
ETB and J1014 on the DC controller PCA) are good. Replace the connectors as necessary.
5 Replace the ETB.
6 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) .
LOAD TRAY xx:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
Tray xx is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job.
1
Press for detailed information.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
Tray xx is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job. No other tray is available.
1
Press for detailed information.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
A job requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available.
1
Press for detailed information.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
Printer-error troubleshooting 269
Table 7-2
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
If no paper in tray:
MANUALLY FEED
<TYPE> <SIZE>
A job requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available.
1
Press for detailed information.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
For help press
alternates with
MANUALLY FEED
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To use another
tray press
NON HP SUPPLY DETECTED
NON HP CARTRIDGE
IN USE
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
ORDER <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
alternates with
To continue press
A new cartridge has been installed that is not made by HP. This message appears until an HP cartridge is installed or C
ANCEL
J
OB
is pressed.
The printer has detected that a non-HP print cartridge is currently installed.
If you believe that the cartridge is an
HP cartridge, please call the HP fraud hotline.
Any printer repair that is required as a result of using non-HP cartridges is not covered under HP warranty.
To continue printing, press C
ANCEL
J
OB
.
The first pending job will be cancelled.
If the job does not print, try resending the job to the printer.
If you believe that the cartridge is an
HP cartridge, please call the HP fraud hotline.
Any printer repair that is required as a result of using non-HP cartridges is not covered under HP warranty.
The identified print cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life and the
SUPPLIES LOW setting in the
SYSTEM SETUP submenu is set to
STOP. Override the setting by pressing
.
1 Order the identified print cartridge.
2
Press to continue.
3
4
Press for detailed information.
Press and the instructions.
to step through
5 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
270 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-2
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
ORDER <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
alternates with
LESS THAN XXXX PAGES LEFT
The identified print cartridge is near end of its life.
The printer is ready and will continue for the estimated number of pages that appear.
1 Order the identified print cartridge.
2 The estimate of pages remaining is based upon historical page coverage for this printer.
3 Printing will continue until
REPLACE <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE appears.
4
Press for detailed information.
5
Press and to step through the instructions.
6 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
ORDER FUSER KIT
LESS THAN XXXX PAGES LEFT
To continue press
ORDER FUSER KIT
XXXX PAGES LEFT
To enter menus press
The fuser is near its end of life and the
SUPPLIES LOW setting in the
SYSTEM SETUP submenu is set to
STOP.
1 Order the image fuser kit.
2
Press to continue printing.
Printing can continue until the fuser reaches its end of life.
3 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
The fuser is near its end of life.
The printer is ready and will continue for the estimated number of pages that appears.
1 Order the image fuser kit.
2 Printing can continue until the fuser reaches its end of life.
3
Press for detailed information.
4
Press and to step through the instructions.
5 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
ORDER SUPPLIES
For menus press
More than one supply item is low.
1
Press to identify which supplies should be ordered.
2 Order the identified supplies.
3 Printing can continue until supplies reach their end of life.
4
Press for detailed information.
5
Press and to step through the instructions.
6 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
Printer-error troubleshooting 271
Table 7-2
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
ORDER SUPPLIES
For status press
More than one supply item is low and the SUPPLIES LOW setting in the
SYSTEM SETUP submenus is set to
STOP.
1
Press to identify which supplies should be ordered.
2 Order the identified supplies.
3
Press twice to continue printing. Printing can continue until supplies reach their end of life.
4 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
ORDER TRANSFER KIT
XXXX PAGES LEFT
To continue press
ORDER TRANSFER KIT
LESS THAN XXXX PAGES LEFT
To enter menus press
The number of pages that remain for the transfer unit has reached the low threshold and the SUPPLIES LOW setting in the SYSTEM SETUP submenu is set to STOP.
1 Order the transfer kit.
2 Printing can continue until the transfer unit reaches its end of life.
3
Press for detailed information.
4
Press and to step through the instructions.
5 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
The transfer unit is near its end of life.
1 Order an image transfer kit.
2 Printing can continue until the transfer unit reaches its end of life.
3
Press for detailed information.
4
Press and to step through the instructions.
5 Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
OUTPUT BIN FULL
Remove all paper from bin
Performing
PAPER PATH TEST
Performing upgrade
Printing...
PQ TROUBLESHOOTING
Printing...
The output bin is full and must be emptied in order for printing to continue.
Remove media from the output bin.
The printer is performing a Paper Path test.
No action is necessary; however, the data is useful to help troubleshoot jams.
A firmware upgrade is in process.
The printer is generating the printquality troubleshooting pages. The printer will return to the Ready state when the pages are printed.
The printer is generating the registration page. The printer will return
No action is necessary.
Follow the instructions on the printed pages.
Follow the instructions on the printed pages.
272 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-2
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
REGISTRATION PAGE
Processing . . .
copy <X> of <Y>
to the SET REGISTRATION menu when the page is printed.
The printer is currently processing or printing collated copies. The message indicates that copy X of Y total copies is currently being processed.
The printer is actively processing a job from the indicated tray.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
Processing . . .
from tray XX
Processing duplex job
Do not grab paper until job completes
RAM DISK DEVICE
FAILURE
Paper temporarily comes into the output bin while printing a duplex job.
Do not attempt to remove the pages until the job is complete.
A device failure has occurred on the specified drive.
Do not grab paper when it comes into the output bin. The message disappears when the job is finished.
You can then remove pages from the bin.
Turn the printer off and then on to remove this message from the controlpanel display.
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
RAM DISK FILE
OPERATION FAILED
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
RAM DISK FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
RAM DISK IS
WRITE PROTECTED
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted an illogical operation (for example, to download a file to a non-existent directory).
1 Printing can continue.
2 Turn the printer off and then on to remove the message from the control-panel display.
3 If the message reappears, a problem might exist with the software program.
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system. The attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full.
Turn the printer off and then on to remove the message from the controlpanel display.
This will also delete any files saved in
RAM.
The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.
1 To enable writing to the RAM disk, turn off write protection by using
HP Web Jetadmin software.
2 To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
Printer-error troubleshooting 273
Table 7-2
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
Ready
Diagnostics mode
To exit press Cancel Job button
Receiving upgrade
REINSTALL <COLOR> CARTRIDGE
alternates with
A firmware upgrade is in progress.
The cartridge is not fully seated.
Do not turn the printer off until the printer returns to the Ready state.
1
Press for detailed information.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
For help press
REMOVE ALL
PRINT CARTRIDGES
To exit press
Cancel Job key
REMOVE AT LEAST 1
PRINT CARTRIDGE
To exit press
Cancel Job key
REPLACE <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
The printer is executing a Component test and the Belt only component is selected.
The identified print cartridge has reached its end of life.
Printing will not continue until the cartridge is replaced.
Remove all of the print cartridges.
alternates with
For help press
The printer is executing a Disable cartridge check or Component test and
Cartridge Motor component is selected.
Remove one print cartridge.
1 Replace the identified print cartridge to continue printing.
2
Press for detailed information.
3
Press and to step through the instructions.
4 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
REPLACE FUSER KIT
The fuser kit is at its end of life.
REPLACE SUPPLIES
For status press
At least one supply item is out and needs to be replaced and another supply item is either out or low.
1 Replace the fuser to continue printing.
2
Press for detailed information.
3
Press and the instructions.
to step through
4 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
1
Press to identify which supplies should be replaced.
2 Replace the identified supplies to continue printing.
274 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-2
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
3
Press for detailed information.
4
Press and to step through the instructions.
5 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
REPLACE TRANSFER KIT
For help press
The transfer unit has reached its end of life.
1 Replace the transfer unit to continue printing.
2
Press for detailed information.
3
Press and to step through the instructions.
4 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
Attempt the upgrade again.
The firmware upgrade was not completed successfully.
The printer is testing the developing disengaging motor. (This motor is called the "alienation motor" in firmware messages.)
Press C
ANCEL stop this test.
J
OB
when you want to
Resend upgrade
Rotating. . .
alienation motor
To exit press
CANCEL JOB
Rotating. . .
belt drive
To exit press
CANCEL JOB
Rotating <color> cartridge motor
To exit press
CANCEL JOB
Rotating. . .
fuser motor
To exit press
CANCEL JOB
Rotating <color> Laser Scanner
To exit press
CANCEL JOB
The printer is executing a Component
Test and the Belt Only component is selected.
Press C
ANCEL
J
OB
when you want to stop this test.
The printer is executing a Component
Test and the <color> Cartridge motor component is selected.
Press C
ANCEL
J
OB
when you want to stop this test.
The printer is executing a Component test and the Fuser Motor component is selected.
Press C
ANCEL
J
OB
when you want to stop this test.
A scanner test is in progress.
Press C
ANCEL
J
OB
when you want to stop this test.
Printer-error troubleshooting 275
Table 7-2
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
Rotating. . .
transfer motors
To exit press
CANCEL JOB
SIZE MISMATCH
TRAY xx= <SIZE>
The printer is executing a Component test and the Transfer Motors component is selected.
The tray is loaded with media that is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size that is configured for the tray.
Press C
ANCEL
J
OB
when you want to stop this test.
For help press alternates with
Ready
For menus press
1 Adjust the side and rear guides against the media.
2 If the media used is Letter, A4,
Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal size, the tray switch should be set to STANDARD. Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes. The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel.
3 Reset the paper size in the paperhandling menu.
TRAY xx CONTAINS
UNKNOWN MEDIA
The media type in the specified tray cannot be determined.
1 To change the media type, press
. Use and to highlight the type, and then press to select.
2 To change the media size to
Letter, A4, Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal, leave the tray switch in the STANDARD position.
3 To change the media size to other sizes, move the tray switch to
CUSTOM, adjust the guides against the media, and close the tray.
4
Use and to highlight the media size, and then press to select.
The specified tray is empty and needs to be filled, but the current job does not need this tray to print correctly.
Refill the tray at a convenient time.
TRAY xx EMPTY
<TYPE> <SIZE>
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
TRAY xx OPEN
For help press alternates with
The specified tray is open or is not closed completely.
Close the tray.
276 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-2
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
Ready
For menus press
TRAY xx SIZE=
<XXXX SIZE>
For help press
An undetectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to STANDARD.
alternates with
TRAY xx SIZE=
<XXXX SIZE>
To change, move switch in tray xx
TRAY xx
<TYPE> <SIZE>
Size detected by tray
The size selected from the menu does not match the size that the tray detected. Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the
STANDARD position.
1 Adjust the side and rear guides against the media.
2 If the media used is Letter, A4,
Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal size, the tray switch should be set to STANDARD. Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes. The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel.
3 Reset the paper size in the paperhandling menu.
alternates with
TRAY xx
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To change type press
The printer is reporting the current configuration of tray xx. The tray switch is in the STANDARD position.
1 To change the media type, press
. Use and to highlight the type, and then press to select.
2 To change the media size to
Letter, A4, Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal, leave the tray switch in the STANDARD position.
3 To change the media size to other sizes, move the tray switch to
CUSTOM, adjust the guides against the media, and close the tray.
4
Use and to highlight the media size, and then press to select.
TRAY xx
<TYPE> <SIZE>
Size specified by user alternates with
TRAY xx
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To change type
press
The printer is reporting the current configuration of tray xx. The tray switch is in the CUSTOM position.
1 To change the media type, press
. Use and to highlight the type, and then press to select.
2 To change the media size to
Letter, A4, Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal, set the tray switch to the
STANDARD position and adjust the guides to the correct positions.
3 To change the media size to other sizes, leave the tray switch in the
CUSTOM position, adjust the guides against the media, and close the tray.
Printer-error troubleshooting 277
Table 7-2
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
4 Select the paper-handling menu from the control panel. Configure the size for the tray.
TYPE MISMATCH
TRAY xx= <TYPE>
alternates with
This warning appears after the printer has detected an overhead transparency in the paper path when the tray is configured for another type.
This results in a 41.5 Unexpected Type in Tray xx error. The user did not reconfigure the tray after the error message appeared, so the printer determines that the type of media is not what the tray is configured to hold.
To change media type, press . Use
and to highlight the type, and then press to select a choice.
Ready
To enter menus
press
Unable to store job
<JOBNAME>
A job cannot be stored because of a memory, disk, or configuration problem.
Install additional memory in the printer, or install a disk drive into the printer.
The printer is offering a selection of alternate media to use for the print job.
If a disk drive is installed, delete any previously stored print jobs.
Highlight the media with and .
Press to select a choice.
USE INSTEAD?
TRAY 2: <TYPE>
<SIZE>
TRAY 3: <TYPE>
Warming up
The printer is coming out of powersave mode. Printing will continue as soon as warmup is completed
NOTE
Not all messages are described in the tables; those messages that are not listed are self-explanatory.
278 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
NOTE
Many of the procedures in this section instruct you to replace the DC controller PCA, the ETB, the formatter, the drum drive motors, the drum drive gears, or a laser/scanner unit.
After replacing one of these items, you must access the Print Quality menu and select QUICK
CALIBRATE NOW/FULL CALIBRATE NOW to ensure proper print quality after the repair.
When the ETB or the fuser are replaced before their normal end of life, access the resets menu and reset the counter to zero. See
Quick Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
Message Description Action
Access denied
MENUS LOCKED
An attempt has been made to modify a menu item, but the printer administrator has enabled the control-panel security mechanism. The message will disappear shortly, and the printer will return to the READY or BUSY state.
BAD OPTIONAL TRAY CONNECTION
The 500-sheet input tray is not making a sufficient connection with the printer.
Contact the printer administrator to change settings.
1 Verify that the printer is on a level surface.
2 Turn the printer off.
3 Reseat the printer on the 500sheet input tray.
4 If the printer is on the optional printer stand, make sure that the support straps are attached to the rear of the stand and the printer.
5 Turn the printer on after reseating the 500-sheet input tray.
Calibrating
Canceling
Checking paper path
Checking printer
CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT
AVAILABLE
For help press
The printer is calibrating.
The printer is in the process of canceling a job. The message will continue to appear while the job is stopped, the paper path flushed, and any remaining incoming data on the active data channel is received and discarded.
The engine is turning its rollers to check for possible jams.
The engine is doing an internal test.
The PJL encountered a request for a personality that does not exist in the printer. The job is aborted and no pages will be printed.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
1
Press for detailed information.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
alternates with
Printer-error troubleshooting 279
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT
AVAILABLE
To continue press
Clearing event log
No action is necessary.
Clearing paper path
This message appears while the event log is cleared. The printer will exit the menus after the event log has been cleared.
The printer jammed or detected misplaced media when it was turned on. The printer is attempting to eject jammed pages automatically.
The covers have to be closed.
No action is necessary.
CLOSE FRONT COVERS
For help press
1
Press for more information.
2 Close the front covers.
CPR SENSOR
OUT OF RANGE
The CPR Sensor is not behaving properly.
NOTE
This message might also appear if the fuser is missing or incorrectly installed.
Ensure that the fuser is correctly installed.
1 Force a calibration by selecting
Full Calibrate Now on the Print
Quality menu. See Full Calibrate
Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
2 If the message persists, verify the cables are seated correctly and the connector J1024 is making good contact with the DC controller.
3 Replace the color-registration detection unit.
4 If the message persists, replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
.
DATA RECEIVED
To print last page press
Deleting. . . .
DETECTABLE SIZE
IN TRAY xx
For help press
The printer received data and is waiting for a form feed. When the printer receives another file, the message should disappear.
The printer is currently deleting the stored job.
A tray has been loaded with media that is a standard size and the switch in the tray is set to custom.
Press to continue.
No action is necessary.
1
2
Press for detailed information.
Press and to step through the instructions.
280 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
DISK DEVICE
OPERATION FAILED
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
DISK FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
alternates with
To clear press
Ready
DISK IS
WRITE PROTECTED
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
EIO DISK X
Initializing
EIO DISK X
NOT FUNCTIONAL
For help press
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
alternates with
DETECTABLE SIZE IN TRAY xx
Recommend move switch to STANDARD
DISK DEVICE
FAILURE
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
A device failure has occurred on the specified drive.
1 Printing can continue for jobs that do not require access to the disk drive.
2 To clear the message, turn the printer off and then on.
3 If the message persists, remove and reinstall the EIO disk drive.
4 If the message persists, replace the EIO disk drive.
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted an illogical operation (for example, to download a file to a non-existent directory).
1 Printing can continue.
2 Turn the printer off and then on.
3 If the message reappears, a problem might exist with the software program.
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system. The attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full.
1 Use the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the
EIO disk drive and then try again.
2 To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.
1 To enable writing to the disk, turn off write protection, by using HP
Web Jetadmin.
2 To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
The EIO disk device in slot X is initializing.
The EIO disk device in slot X is not working correctly.
No action is necessary.
Remove the EIO disk from the indicated slot and it replace with a new
EIO disk drive.
Printer-error troubleshooting 281
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
Event log empty
No action is necessary.
FLASH DEVICE
FAILURE
SHOW EVENT LOG was selected on the control-panel, and the event log is empty.
A device failure has occurred on the specified drive.
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
1 Printing can continue for jobs that do not require the Flash DIMM.
2 To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
3 If the message persists, remove and reinstall the flash DIMM.
4 If the message persists, replace the flash DIMM.
Flash disk X initializing
Do not power off
FLASH FILE
OPERATION FAILED
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
FLASH FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
FLASH IS
WRITE PROTECTED
To clear press
alternates with
The new flash DIMM that is installed in slot X is initializing.
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted an illogical operation (for example, to download a file to a non-existent directory).
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system. The attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full.
The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.
No action is necessary.
1 Printing can continue.
2 Turn the printer off and then on.
3 If the message reappears, a problem might exist with the software program.
1 Use HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the flash memory and then try again.
2 To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
1 To enable writing to the flash memory, turn off write protection, by using HP Web Jetadmin.
2 To remove this message from the control-panel display, turn the printer off and then on.
Ready
INCORRECT <COLOR> CARTRIDGE
An incorrect cartridge is installed in a slot and the cover is closed.
alternates with
For help press
NOTE
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
1
Press and then press for help.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
282 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
Incorrect
The wrong PIN was typed.
INCORRECT SUPPLIES
For status press
At least one supply item is incorrectly positioned in the printer and another supply item is missing, incorrectly placed, out, or low.
NOTE
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
Type the correct PIN. After three incorrect PIN entries, the printer returns to Ready.
1
Press and then press for help.
2 Follow the instructions on the control-panel display to locate and replace the incorrect supply.
3
Press and to step through the instructions.
Initializing
Initializing permanent storage
INSERT OR CLOSE
TRAY XX
For help press
INSTALL <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
This message appears when the printer is turned on, as soon as the individual tasks begin to initialize.
This message appears when the printer is turned on to show that permanent storage is being initialized.
Tray XX must be inserted or closed before the current job can be printed.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
1
Press for detailed information.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
alternates with
For help press
INSTALL FUSER
For help press
The cartridge is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer.
NOTE
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
1 Insert the cartridge or make sure that the cartridge is fully seated.
2
Press for detailed information.
3
Press and to step through the instructions.
4 If the error persists, replace the cartridge.
5 Verify that the connectors between the memory tag antenna, memory controller board, and the DC controller are seated correctly.
6 Replace the antenna PCA for the indicated color.
7 Replace the memory controller
PCA.
8 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
The fuser is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer.
1 Insert the fuser or make sure that the installed fuser is fully seated.
2
Press for detailed information.
Printer-error troubleshooting 283
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
3
Press and to step through the instructions.
4 If the error persists, verify that fuser connector J4034 is good.
Replace that connector if necessary.
5 Replace the fuser assembly.
6 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
.
INSTALL SUPPLIES
For status press
INSTALL TRANSFER
UNIT
For help press
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
alternates with
At least one supply item is missing or is not correctly seated in the printer and another supply item is missing, incorrectly placed, out, or low. Insert the supply item or make sure that the installed supply item is fully seated.
1
Press and then press for help.
2 Follow the instructions on the control-panel display to locate and replace the missing or incorrect supply.
NOTE
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
3
Press and to step through the instructions.
The transfer unit is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer.
1 Insert the transfer unit or make sure that the installed transfer unit is fully seated.
2
Press for detailed information.
3
Press and to step through the instructions.
4 If the error persists, verify that the
ETB connectors (J4017 on the
ETB and J1014 on the DC controller PCA) are good. Replace connectors as necessary.
5 Replace the ETB.
6 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
.
Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job.
1
Press for detailed information.
2
Press and the instructions.
to step through
284 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To use another tray press
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job.
1
Press for detailed information.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
alternates with
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To continue press
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
Move tray switch to custom
alternates with
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To use another tray press
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
Move tray switch to standard
alternates with
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To use another
Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job. The size specified in the job requires that the tray switch be in the custom position.
1 Load the specified media into the tray.
2 Confirm that the guides are in the correct position.
3 Verify that the tray switch is in the custom position.
4
To use another tray, press .
Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job. The size specified in the job is a detectable size.
1 Load the specified media into the tray.
2 Confirm that the guides are in the correct position.
3 Verify that the tray switch is in the
STANDARD position so that the printer will automatically detect the size.
Printer-error troubleshooting 285
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action tray press
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
Move tray switch to custom
Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job. The size specified in the job requires that the tray switch be in the custom position.
1 Load the specified media into the tray.
2 Confirm that the guides are in the correct position.
3 Verify that the tray switch is in the custom position.
LOAD TRAY xx:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
Recommended move tray switch to standard
Tray xx is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job. The size specified in the job is a detectable size.
1 Load the paper tray with the specified media.
2 Confirm that the guides are in the correct position.
3 Verify that the tray switch is in the
STANDARD position so that the printer will automatically detect the size.
LOAD TRAY XX:
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
Loading program XX
Do not power off
MANUALLY FEED
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than what is specified in the job. No other tray is available.
1
Press for detailed information.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
Programs and fonts can be stored in the printer file system. They are loaded into RAM when the printer is turned on.
The XX specifies a sequence number that indicates the program that is being loaded.
A job requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available.
No action is necessary.
1
2
Press for detailed information.
Press and the instructions.
to step through alternates with
MANUALLY FEED
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To continue press
If no paper in tray:
MANUALLY FEED
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
A job requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available.
1
Press for detailed information.
2
Press and the instructions.
to step through
286 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
alternates with
MANUALLY FEED
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To use another tray press
MANUALLY FEED
<TYPE> <SIZE>
For help press
Moving solenoid
To exit press
Stop key
No job to cancel
NON HP CARTRIDGE DETECTED
NON HP SUPPLY
IN USE
alternates with
Ready
OPTIONAL TRAYS
NOT SUPPORTED
A job requires a specific paper type and size that is not currently available.
1
Press for detailed information.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
The printer is executing a Component
Test and Solenoid is the component selected.
No action is necessary.
The S
TOP
button was pressed, but no active job or buffered data is available to cancel. This message appears for approximately two seconds before the printer returns to the Ready state.
A new cartridge has been installed that is not made by HP. This message appears until an HP cartridge is installed or S
TOP
NOTE
is pressed.
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
The printer has detected that a non-HP print cartridge is currently installed.
No action is necessary.
If you believe the cartridge is an HP cartridge, please call the HP fraud hotline.
Any printer repair that is required as a result of using non-HP cartridges is not covered under HP warranty.
To continue printing, press S
TOP
. The first pending job will be cancelled.
If the job does not print, try resending the job to the printer.
If you believe the cartridge is an HP cartridge, please call the HP fraud hotline.
NOTE
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
CAUTION
Any printer repair that is required as a result of using non-HP cartridges is not covered under HP warranty.
The printer detects that an optional sheet-feeder is installed.
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer does not support optional sheet-feeders.
Remove any optional trays that might have been installed.
Printer-error troubleshooting 287
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
ORDER <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
alternates with
Ready
The identified print cartridge is near its end of life.
1 Order the identified print cartridge.
2 The estimated pages remaining is based upon historical page coverage for this printer.
3 Printing will continue until
REPLACE <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE appears.
4
Press for detailed information.
5
Press and the instructions.
to step through
6 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
ORDER FUSER KIT
LESS THAN XXXX PAGES
alternates with
Ready
ORDER SUPPLIES
For menus press
alternates with
Ready
For help press
ORDER TRANSFER KIT
LESS THAN XXXX PAGES LEFT
For help press alternates with
Ready
The fuser is near its end of life. The printer is ready and will continue for the estimated number of pages appears.
1 Order the image fuser kit.
2
Press for detailed information.
3 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
More than one supply item is low.
NOTE
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
1
Press to identify which supplies should be ordered.
2 Order the identified supplies.
3 Printing can continue until supplies reach its end of life.
4
Press for detailed information.
5
Press and the instructions.
to step through
6 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
The transfer unit is near its end of life.
1 Order an image transfer kit.
2 Printing can continue until the transfer unit reaches its end of life.
3
Press for detailed information.
4
Press and to step through the instructions.
5 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
288 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
OUTPUT BIN FULL
Remove all paper from bin
Paused
To return to ready press STOP key
Performing
PAPER PATH TEST
Performing
PRINT/STOP TEST
Performing upgrade please wait
Powersave on
The output bin is full and must be emptied in order for printing to continue.
Remove media from the output bin.
The printer is paused, and no error messages are pending at the controlpanel display. The I/O continues receiving data until the memory is full.
The printer is performing a Paper Path test.
The printer is performing a Print/Stop test.
Press S
TOP
.
No action is necessary; however, the data is useful to help troubleshoot jams.
No action is necessary.
A firmware upgrade is in process.
The printer is clearing data.
The printer is in Powersave mode. Any button pressed or error condition, or the receipt of printable data, clears the message.
This message appears while the printer
CMYK samples are generated.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
Printing. . .
CMYK SAMPLES
Printing. . .
CONFIGURATION
No action is necessary.
Printing. . .
DEMO PAGE
Printing. . .
EVENT LOG
Printing. . .
FILE DIRECTORY
Printing. . .
FONT LIST
Printing. . .
MENU MAP
Printing...
The printer is generating a configuration page. The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed.
The printer is generating a demo page.
The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed.
The printer is generating a event log page. The printer will return to the
Ready state when the page is completed.
The printer is generating a file directory page. The printer will return to the
Ready state when the page is completed.
The printer is generating a font list page. The printer will return to the
Ready state when the page is completed.
The printer is generating a menu map page. The printer will return to the
Ready state when the page is completed.
The printer is generating the print quality troubleshooting pages. The
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
Follow the instructions on the printed pages.
Printer-error troubleshooting 289
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
PQ TROUBLESHOOTING
Printing...
REGISTRATION PAGE
printer will return to the Ready state when the pages are printed.
The printer is generating the registration page. The printer will return to the SET REGISTRATION menu when the page is completed.
This message appears while the printer
RGB samples are generated.
Follow the instructions on the printed pages.
No action is necessary.
Printing...
RGB SAMPLES
Printing...
SUPPLIES STATUS
No action is necessary.
Printing...
USAGE PAGE
Processing duplex job
Do not grab paper until job completes
Processing. . .
The printer is generating a supplies status page. The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed.
The printer is generating a usage page page. The printer will return to the
Ready state when the page is completed.
Paper temporarily comes into the output bin while printing a duplex job.
Do not attempt to remove the pages until the job is complete.
No action is necessary.
Do not grab paper when it comes into the output bin. The message will disappear when the job is finished. You can then remove pages from the bin.
No action is necessary.
Processing. . .
copy <X> of <Y>
The printer is currently processing a job but is not yet picking sheets. When paper motion begins, this message will be replaced by a message that indicates which tray the job is being printed from.
The printer is currently processing or printing collated copies. The message indicates that copy X of Y total copies is currently being processed.
The printer is actively processing a job from the designated tray.
No action is necessary.
No action is necessary.
Processing. . .
from tray XX
RAM DISK DEVICE
FAILURE
A device failure has occurred on the specified drive.
Turn the printer off and then on to remove this message from the display.
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
RAM DISK FILE
OPERATION FAILED
To clear press
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted an illogical operation (for example, to download a file to a non-existent directory).
1 Printing can continue.
2 Turn the printer off and then on to remove the message from the control-panel display.
3 If the message reappears, a problem might exist with the software program.
290 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
alternates with
Ready
RAM DISK FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
RAM DISK IS
WRITE PROTECTED
To clear press
alternates with
Ready
Ready
Diagnostics mode
To exit press Stop button
Receiving upgrade
REMOVE ALL
PRINT CARTRIDGES
To exit press Stop button
REMOVE AT LEAST ONE
PRINT CARTRIDGE
To exit press Stop button
REPLACE <COLOR>
CARTRIDGE
alternates with
For help press
The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system. The attempt was unsuccessful because the file system is full.
Turn the printer off and then on to remove the message from the controlpanel display.
This will also delete any files saved in
RAM.
The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.
1 To enable writing to the RAM disk, turn off write protection by using
HP Web Jetadmin software.
2 To remove this message from the display, turn the printer off and then on.
The printer is in a special diagnostics mode.
A firmware upgrade is in progress.
Press S
TOP
to exit the special diagnostics mode.
OR
No action is necessary.
Do not turn the printer off until the printer returns to the Ready state.
The printer is executing a Component test and the component selected is Belt only.
Remove all of the print cartridges.
The printer is executing a Disable cartridge check or Component test where the Cartridge Motor is the component selected.
The identified print cartridge has reached its end of life.
Printing will not continue until the cartridge is replaced.
NOTE
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
Remove one print cartridge.
1 Replace the identified print cartridge to continue printing.
2
Press for detailed information.
3
Press and to step through the instructions.
4 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
Printer-error troubleshooting 291
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
REPLACE FUSER KIT
The fuser kit is at its end of life.
For help press
1 Replace the fuser to continue printing.
2
Press for detailed information.
3
Press and the instructions.
to step through
4 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
REPLACE SUPPLIES
For status press
REPLACE SUPPLIES
Printing black only
alternates with
Ready
For help press
At least one supply item is out and needs to be replaced and another supply item is either out or low.
NOTE
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
1
Press to identify which supplies should be replaced.
2 Replace the identified supplies to continue printing.
3
Press for detailed information.
4
Press and to step through the instructions.
5 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
At least one color supply item is out and needs to be replaced. Printing can continue, but only black toner will be used.
NOTE
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
1
Press to identify which supplies should be replaced.
2 Replace the identified supplies to continue printing.
3
Press for detailed information.
4
Press and to step through the instructions.
5 Supplies-ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
REPLACE TRANSFER KIT
For help press
Request accepted please wait
The transfer unit has reached end of life. 1 Replace the transfer unit to continue printing.
2
Press for detailed information.
3
Press and to step through the instructions.
4 Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded
Web server.
The printer has accepted a request to print an internal page, but the current job must finish printing before the internal page can print.
No action is necessary.
292 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
Resend upgrade
Resetting kit count
The firmware upgrade was not completed successfully.
Attempt the upgrade again.
Restoring factory settings
Restoring
YES is selected in the Reset Supplies menu. Counts for any of the supplies that cannot be detected as new will be reset.
The printer is executing a Component
Test and Motor is the component selected.
The printer is executing a Component
Test and the Belt Only is the component selected.
No action is necessary.
The printer is restoring factory settings.
No action is necessary.
The printer is restoring the last saved state.
No action is necessary.
Press S
TOP
when ready to stop this test.
Press S
TOP
when ready to stop this test.
Rotating motor
To exit press Stop button
Rotating. . .
belt drive
To exit press Stop button
Rotating <color> motor
To exit press Stop button
Rotating. . .
fuser motor
To exit press Stop button
Setting saved
SIZE MISMATCH
TRAY XX=<SIZE>
For help press
alternates with
Ready
A component test is in progress The component selected is the <color>
Cartridge motor.
The printer is executing a Component test and the Fuser Motor is the component selected.
A menu selection has been saved
The tray is loaded with media that is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size that is configured for the tray.
Press S
TOP
when you want to stop this test.
Press S
TOP
when you want to stop this test.
No action is necessary.
1 Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper.
2 If the media used is Letter, A4,
Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal size, the tray switch should be set to STANDARD. Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes. The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel.
3 Reset the paper size in the paperhandling menu.
The specified tray is empty and needs to be filled, but the current job does not need this tray to print correctly.
Refill the tray at a convenient time.
TRAY XX EMPTY
<TYPE> <SIZE>
alternates with
Ready
TRAY XX OPEN
The specified tray is open or is not closed completely.
Close the tray.
Printer-error troubleshooting 293
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
For help press
alternates with
Ready
TRAY XX SIZE=
< SIZE>
Setting saved
TRAY XX SIZE=
< SIZE>
Setting not saved
To change move tray switch to
CUSTOM
A non-detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to STANDARD.
1 Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper.
The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray.
Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position.
2 If the media used is Letter, A4,
Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal size, the tray switch should be set to STANDARD. Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes. The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel.
3 Reset the paper size in the paperhandling menu.
TRAY XX SIZE=
< SIZE>
Setting not saved
To change size move guides in tray
A non-detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to STANDARD.
1 Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper.
The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray.
Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position.
2 If the media used is Letter, A4,
Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal size, the tray switch should be set to STANDARD. Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes. The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel.
3 Reset the paper size in the paperhandling menu.
A non-detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to STANDARD.
1 Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper.
The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray.
Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position.
2 If the media used is Letter, A4,
Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal size, the tray switch should be set to STANDARD. Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes. The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel.
3 Reset the paper size in the paperhandling menu.
294 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
TRAY XX SIZE=
< SIZE>
Setting saved
To change move tray switch to
STANDARD
A non-detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to STANDARD.
1 Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper.
The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray.
Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position.
2 If the media used is Letter, A4,
Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal size, the tray switch should be set to STANDARD. Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes. The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel.
3 Reset the paper size in the paperhandling menu.
TRAY XX SIZE=
< SIZE>
Verify tray switch set to CUSTOM then close tray
A non-detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to STANDARD.
1 Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper.
The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray.
Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position.
2 If the media used is Letter, A4,
Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal size, the tray switch should be set to STANDARD. Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes. The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel.
3 Reset the paper size in the paperhandling menu.
TRAY XX SIZE=
< SIZE>
Recommend move switch in tray to
STANDARD then close tray
A non-detectable media size was selected from the menu and the tray switch is set to STANDARD.
1 Adjust the side and rear guides against the paper.
The size selected from the menu does not match the size detected by the tray.
Size detection occurs when the tray switch is set in the STANDARD position.
2 If the media used is Letter, A4,
Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal size, the tray switch should be set to STANDARD. Set the tray switch to CUSTOM for all other media sizes. The tray switch must be set before the size can be selected from the control panel.
3 Reset the paper size in the paperhandling menu.
TRAY XX
<TYPE> <SIZE>
Size detected by tray
alternates with
TRAY XX
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To change size or type
The printer is reporting the current configuration of tray XX. The tray switch is in the STANDARD position.
1 To change the media type, press
. Use and to highlight the type, and then press to select.
2 To change the media size to
Letter, A4, Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal, leave the tray switch in the STANDARD position.
3 To change the media size to other sizes, move the tray switch to
CUSTOM, adjust the guides
Printer-error troubleshooting 295
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action press
against the media, and close the tray.
4
Use and to highlight the media size, and then press to select.
TRAY XX
<TYPE> <SIZE>
Size specified by user
alternates with
TRAY XX
<TYPE> <SIZE>
To change size or type press
TYPE MISMATCH
TRAY XX= <TYPE>
For help press
alternates with
Ready
Unable to mopy job
<JOBNAME>
Unable to store job
<JOBNAME>
USE TRAY XX
<TYPE><SIZE>
To change press /
To use press
Wait for printer to reinitialize
The printer is reporting the current configuration of tray XX. The tray switch is in the CUSTOM position.
1
To change media type, press .
Use and to highlight the type, and then press to select.
2 To change the media size to
Letter, A4, Executive, B5 JIS, A5, or Legal, set the tray switch to the
STANDARD position and adjust the guides to the correct positions.
3 To change the media size to other sizes, leave the tray switch in the
CUSTOM position, adjust the media guides against the media, and close the tray.
4 Select the paper-handling menu from the control panel. Configure the size for the tray.
This warning appears after the printer has detected an overhead transparency in the paper path when the tray is configured for another type.
This results In a 41.5 Unexpected Type in Tray xx error. The user did not reconfigure the tray after the error message appeared, so the printer determines that the type of media is not what the tray is configured to hold.
To change media type, press . Use
and to highlight the type, and then press to select.
A mopy job cannot be mopied because of a memory, disk, or configuration problem. Only one copy will be printed.
No action is necessary.
A job cannot be stored because of a memory, disk, or configuration problem.
Install additional memory in the printer, or install a disk drive into the printer.
The printer is offering a selection of alternate media to use for the print job.
If a disk drive is installed, delete any previously stored print jobs.
Highlight the media with and .
Press to select a choice.
RAM Disk settings have been changed before the printer automatically
No action is necessary.
296 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Table 7-3
Alphabetical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
Warming up
restarts, or external device modes have changed.
The printer is coming out of powersave mode. Printing will continue as soon as warmup is completed.
No action is necessary.
NOTE
Not all messages are described in the tables; those messages that are not listed are self-explanatory.
ENWW Printer-error troubleshooting 297
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
NOTE
Many of the procedures in this section instruct you to replace the DC controller PCA, the ETB, the formatter, the drum drive motors, the drum drive gears, or a laser/scanner unit.
After replacing one of these items, you must access the Print Quality menu and select
CALIBRATE NOW to ensure proper print quality after the repair. When the ETB or the fuser are replaced before their normal end of life, access the resets menu and reset the counter to zero. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) .
Table 7-4
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Message
10.XX.YY SUPPLIES
ERROR
For help press
NOTE
The printer cannot always determine whether the error is in the cartridge or with the printer reader/writer.
Description
The printer cannot read or write to at least one print cartridge memory tag or at least one memory tag is missing.
10.00.00 black print cartridge
10.00.01 cyan print cartridge
10.00.02 magenta print cartridge
10.00.03 yellow print cartridge
Action
1 Turn the printer off and then on.
2 Exchange the cartridge for the indicated color with a cartridge in another slot to determine whether the error follows the cartridge or stays with the slot. If the error follows the cartridge, replace that cartridge.
Otherwise, continue with step 3.
3 Reseat the connectors between the memory PCA (J602-J605) and the antenna PCAs (J901A-D), the memory
PCA, and the DC controller PCA
(J1028).
4 Replace the antenna PCA.
5 Replace the memory PCA.
6 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the
DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP
13.XX.YY.DUPLEX
JOB INTERRUPTED
For help press
A duplex job was interrupted by interference as media passed through the output bin during duplexing.
1
Press for more information.
2 Remove one or two pages from the output bin as directed by the message on the control-panel display.
3
Press to continue printing.
alternates with
13.XX.YY.DUPLEX
JOB INTERRUPTED
Discard top sheet and press
NOTE
If JAM RECOVERY =
OFF, some pages will not be reprinted. Resend the missing pages.
or
13.XX.YY.DUPLEX
298 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Table 7-4
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
JOB INTERRUPTED
Discard top two sheets and press
13.XX.YY.JAM IN
DUPLEX PATH
For help press
A jam exists in the duplex path.
1
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
3 Determine whether the ETB rollers or gears are worn or defective. Replace the ETB if they are.
4 Check the duplex feed guide, which is part of the control-panel crossmember assembly. If the guide is worn or damaged, replace the crossmember assembly.
13.XX.YY.JAM IN
PAPER INPUT PATH
For help press
A jam exists in the media input path.
1
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
3 Check the registration shutter, and make sure that it is in place. Replace the paper pickup assembly if the shutter is damaged.
4 Check the paper pickup feed rollers, and replace them if they are worn or damaged.
5 Check the connectors, gears, solenoids, motors, and PCA on the paper pickup assembly. Replace the paper pickup assembly if necessary.
13.XX.YY JAM IN
PAPER PATH
For help press
There is a jam in the media path.
1
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
3 If paper is folding into an accordion shape, check whether the shutter on each print cartridge opens as you close the ETB and each cartridge is turning correctly. Replace defective print cartridges or drive motors.
4 Clean the attaching roller at the bottom of the ETB and make sure that the spring is holding it in place.
ENWW Printer-error troubleshooting 299
Table 7-4
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
5 If the attaching roller gears are defective, replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
6 Replace the paper pickup PCA.
7 Replace the ETB if it is not moving paper correctly. Calibrate the printer.
8 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the
DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP
13.XX.YY.JAM IN
TRAY 1
For help press
13.XX.YY.JAM IN
TRAY 2
For help press
A page is jammed in the multipurpose tray.
1
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2
Press and instructions.
to step through the
3 Clean the pickup roller. If it is worn or damaged, replace it.
4 Clean or replace the separation pad.
5 Replace the tray 1 pickup solenoid.
6 Replace the tray 1 pickup motor.
7 Replace the paper pickup assembly.
8 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the
DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP
A page is jammed in tray 2.
1
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
3 Clean the pickup roller. If it is worn or damaged, replace it.
4 Clean the feed roller. If it is worn or damaged, replace it.
5 Replace the tray 2 pickup solenoid.
6 Replace the tray 2 pickup motor.
7 Replace the paper pickup assembly.
8 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the
DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP
300 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Table 7-4
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
13.XX.YY.JAM IN
TRAY 3
For help press
A page is jammed in tray 3.
1
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
3 Clean the pickup roller. If it is worn or damaged, replace it.
4 Clean the feed roller. If it is worn or damaged, replace it.
5 Replace the tray 3 pickup solenoid.
6 Replace the tray 3 pickup motor.
7 Replace the tray 3 paper feeder PCA.
8 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the
DC controller. See
.
A jam exists in the top-cover area.
13.20.00 JAM IN TOP
COVER AREA
For help press
1
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
3 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the
DC controller. See
.
4 Replace the fuser.
WARNING!
The fuser might be hot.
5 Check that the fuser paper sensor is in place and is functioning correctly. If it is defective, replace it.
20 INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY
For help press alternates with
20 INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY
To continue press
The printer has received more data from the computer than fits in the available memory.
1
Press to resume printing.
NOTE
A loss of data will occur.
2 Reduce the complexity of the print job to avoid this error.
3 Adding memory to the printer may allow printing of more complex pages.
ENWW Printer-error troubleshooting 301
Table 7-4
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
22 EIO X
BUFFER OVERFLOW
To continue
The printer EIO card in slot X has overflowed its I/O buffer during a busy state.
Press to resume printing.
NOTE
A loss of data will occur.
press
22 PARALLEL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
For help press
The printer parallel buffer has overflowed during a busy state.
Press to resume printing.
NOTE
A loss of data will occur.
alternates with
22 PARALLEL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
To continue press
40 EIO X BAD
TRANSMISSION
To continue
press
41.3 UNEXPECTED
SIZE IN TRAY XX
For help press
alternates with
LOAD TRAY XX:
[TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press
41.5 UNEXPECTED
TYPE IN TRAY XX
For help press
A connection with the card in EIO slot X has been broken abnormally.
The media that is loaded is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size that is configured for the tray.
1
Press to resume printing.
NOTE
A loss of data will occur.
2 Check that all cables are connected to the EIO ports and that the EIO board is seated properly.
3 If possible, print to another network printer to verify the network is working properly.
1 If the incorrect size was selected, cancel the job or press for more information.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
The printer senses a different media type in the media path than the type that is configured in the tray.
1 If the incorrect type was selected, cancel the job or press for more information.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
302 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Table 7-4
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
alternates with
LOAD TRAY XX:
[TYPE] [SIZE]
For help press
41.X
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
41.X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue press
49.XXXX
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
A printer error has occurred.
X Description
1 unknown misprint error
2 beam detect misprint error
3 media feed error (size)
4 no VSYNC error
5 media feed error (type)
6 ETB detection error
7 feed delay error
9 noise VSREQ
A critical firmware error has occurred that caused the processor on the formatter to abort operation. This type of error can be caused by invalid print commands, corrupt data, or invalid operations. In some cases, electrical noise in the cable can corrupt data during transmission to the printer.
Other causes include poor-quality parallel cables, poor-connections, or home-grown programs. On rare occasions, the formatter is at fault, which is usually indicated by a 79
Service Error.
1
Press to continue or press for more information.
2 If the message persists, turn the printer off and then on.
1 Press C
ANCEL
J
OB
to clear the print job from the printer memory.
2 Turn the printer off and then on.
3 Try printing a job from a different software program. If the job prints, go back to the first program and try printing a different file. If the message appears only with a certain software program or print job, contact the software vendor for assistance.
4 If the message persists with different software programs and print jobs, disconnect all of the cables to the printer that connect it to the network or computer.
5 Turn the printer off.
6 Remove all memory DIMMs or thirdparty DIMMs from the printer. (Do not remove the firmware DIMM in slot J1.)
7 Remove all EIO devices from the printer.
8 Turn the printer on.
9 If the error no longer exists, install each
DIMM and EIO device one at a time,
ENWW Printer-error troubleshooting 303
Table 7-4
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
making sure to turn the printer off and on again as you install each device.
10 Replace a DIMM or EIO device if you determine that it causes the error.
11 Remember to reconnect all of the cables that connect the printer to the network or computer.
12 If the error persists, replace the firmware DIMM.
13 Replace the formatter and calibrate the
printer. See Calibrate Now (HP Color
50.X FUSER ERROR
For help press
51.XY
PRINTER ERROR
For help press alternates with
51.XY
PRINTER ERROR
A fuser error has occurred.
X Description
1 low fuser temperature
2 fuser warmup service
3 high fuser temperature
4 faulty fuser
5 inconsistent fuser
6 open fuser
7 fuser pressure-release mechanism failure
1 Turn the printer off and allow it to cool down.
2 Reinstall the fuser, and check the connector J4034 that connects the fuser and the printer. Replace the connector if it is damaged.
3 Turn the printer off and remove the fuser. Measure the resistance between the connector pins on the fuser. If resistance does not meet the following guidelines, replace the fuser.
● J4034-5 to J4034-6: 300 - 500
KOhms
● J4034-1 to J4034-2: less than 1
KOhm
4 Check for continuity between connector pins J4034-4 and J4034-2. If no continuity exists, replace the fuser.
5 Replace the fuser power supply PCA.
6 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the
DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP
A printer error has occurred.
X Description
1 beam detect error
2 laser error
Y Description
0 no color / black
1
Press to continue.
2 Turn the printer off and then on.
3 Reseat the connectors between the laser/scanner and DC controller PCA
(J1009 - J1012).
4 Replace the defective laser/scanner assembly. Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/scanner. See
304 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Table 7-4
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
To continue turn off then on
1 cyan
2 magenta
3 yellow
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
5 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the
DC controller. See
.
52.XY
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
52.XY
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
53.X0.ZZ
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
53.XY.ZZ
CHECK RAM DIMM SLOT
To continue press
CANCEL JOB
A printer error has occurred.
1
Press to continue.
2 Turn the printer off and then on.
X Description
1 scanner error
2 scanner startup error
3 scanner rotation error
Y Description
0 no color/black
1 cyan
2 magenta
3 Reseat the connectors between the laser/scanner and DC controller PCA
(J1009 - J1012).
4 Replace the defective laser/scanner assembly. Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/scanner. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
5 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the
DC controller. See
.
3 yellow
An error has occurred in the on board RAM.
1
Press to continue.
2 Turn the printer off and then on.
An error occurred in some printer memory.
Values for X, Y, and Z are as follows:
X Device Location
1 Slot 1
2 Slot 2
Y Device Location
1 DIMM Slot 1
2 DIMM Slot 2
3 DIMM Slot 3
4 DIMM Slot 4
ZZ Error Number
0 unsupported memory
1 unrecognized memory
NOTE
The HP Color LaserJet
4610n printer has only one DIMM slot.
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Verify that all of the memory meets specifications and is correctly installed.
3 Turn the printer on.
4 If the problem persists, replace the memory device in the location indicated.
ENWW Printer-error troubleshooting 305
Table 7-4
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
53.10.05
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
54.XX PRINTER ERROR
2 unsupported memory size
3 failed RAM test
4 exceeded maximum RAM size
5 invalid DIMM speed
A DIMM is installed in both the 168-pin
DIMM Slot 4 and the 100-pin DIMM Slot 5.
This is an invalid configuration. DIMMs can not be installed in both of these slots at the same time.
Remove one of the DIMMs, or move one of the DIMMs to a different slot.
X Description
Turn the printer off and then on, and then check the following items in the order listed.
1 low fuser temperature
3 Dmax density sensor
20 color-plane-registration sensor
24 black toner-level sensor
54.1 error: Check the fuser. See 50.X
fuser error.
5 CPR sensor
6 OHT sensor
54.3 error: Check the connections.
Replace the color registration detection assembly.
7 yellow drum phase (home) position sensor
8 magenta drum phase (home) position sensor
54.5 error: Check the connections.
Replace the color registration detection assembly.
9 cyan drum phase (home) position sensor
17 cyan CPR sensor
18 black CPR sensor
19 ETB speed control sensor
54.6 error: Check the connections.
Replace the paper pickup unit.
10 black drum phase (home) position sensor
11 yellow density sensor
54.7, 54.8, 54.9, or 54.10 error: Check the connections. Replace the drum-phase sensor for the indicated color.
12 magenta density sensor
13 cyan density sensor
14 black density sensor
54.11, 54.12, 54.13, or 54.14 error: Check the connections. Check the cartridge and replace it if necessary. Replace the colorregistration detection assembly.
15 yellow CPR sensor
16 magenta CPR sensor
54.15, 54.16, 54.17, 54.18: Check the connections. Replace the color-registration detection assembly.
54.19 error: Check the ETB connection.
Replace the ETB. Replace the DC controller. Calibrate the printer. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) .
54.20 error: Check the connection.
Replace the color-registration detection assembly.
1E or 30 half tone calibration error
01 humidity environmental sensor abnormal
54.21, 54.22, 54.23, or 54.24 error: Check the connections. Replace the toner-level sensing PCA. Replace the DC controller.
Calibrate the printer. See
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
.
306 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Table 7-4
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
55.01.XY
DC CONTROLLER ERROR
For help press alternates with
55.X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue
The DC controller is not communicating with the formatter. The problem could be caused by a timing error or an intermittent connection.
X Description
0 communication error
1 DC controller memory error
2 outgoing party error
3 no engine response
4 communication timeout
1
Press to continue.
2 Turn the printer off and then on.
3 Reseat or replace the connectors between the DC controller and the formatter.
4 If the problem persists, replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
5 Replace the formatter. Initialize
NVRAM. See
press
56.XX
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
57.X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
A printer error has occurred.
XX Description
01 illegal input
02 illegal output
A printer-fan error has occurred.
X Description
3 cartridge fan (vertical fan, F2)
4 formatter fan (horizontal fan, F1)
Turn the printer off and then on again.
If the error persists, record the message and contact support.
Turn the printer off and then on.
57.3 Cartridge fan error (F2)
1 Reconnect the connector J1004 on the
DC controller PCA.
2 Immediately after starting the print operation, measure the voltage between pins 1 and 3 on the J1004 connector. If the voltage changes from
0 V to 24 V, replace the cartridge fan.
3 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the
DC controller. See
.
57.4 Formatter fan error (F1)
1 Reconnect the connector J1003 on the
DC controller PCA.
2 Immediately after turning the printer on, measure the voltage between pins 1 and 3 on the J1004 connector. If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V, replace the formatter fan.
3 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the
DC controller. See
.
ENWW Printer-error troubleshooting 307
Table 7-4
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
58.X
PRINTER ERROR
A memory tag error was detected.
For help press
alternates with
X Description
3 CPU
4 power supply
1 Turn the printer off and then on.
2 Replace the memory PCA.
3 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the
DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP
58.X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
59.XY
PRINTER ERROR
For help press alternates with
59.X Y
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
A printer motor error has occurred.
1 Turn the printer off and then on.
X Description
0 motor error
2 This message might also appear if the transfer unit is missing or incorrectly installed. Ensure that the transfer unit is correctly installed.
1 motor startup error
1 cyan
2 magenta
ETB motor error
2 motor rotation error
1 Clean the ETB unit intermediate connector, J4017.
3 fuser motor startup error
4 fuser motor rotation error
5 print cartridge motor startup error
2 Reconnect the connectors J4022 for the ETB motor, J4017 between the
ETB and the printer, and J4014 on the
DC controller PCA.
6 print cartridge motor rotation error
3 Replace the ETB motor.
9 ETB motor startup error
A ETB motor rotation error
B developing disengaging motor startup error
4 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the
DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP
Fuser motor error
C developing disengaging motor rotation error
Y Description
1 Reconnect the connectors J4030 for the fuser motor and J1002 on the DC controller PCA.
0 no color/Black
2 Replace the fuser drive assembly.
3 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the
DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP
3 yellow
308 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
62 NO SYSTEM
To continue turn off then on
64 PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
64 PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE ERROR
For help press alternates with
68.X PERMANENT
Table 7-4
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
Print cartridge motor error
1 Reconnect the print cartridge connector on the DC controller PCA (J1013 for cyan, J1031 for magenta, J1032 for yellow, and J1033 for black).
2 Replace the drum drive assembly for the indicated print cartridge.
3 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the
DC controller. See
.
59.X Y
continued
No system was found.
A scan buffer error occurred.
Developing disengaging motor error
1 Reconnect the connectors J4024 and
J1019 between the developing disengaging motor and the DC controller PCA.
2 Replace the developing disengaging drive assembly.
3 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the
DC controller. See
.
1 Turn the printer off and then on.
2 Reseat the firmware DIMM, making sure that it is in the 168-pin slot J1.
1 Turn the printer off and then on.
2 Perform a cold reset.
3 If the message persists, replace the formatter or firmware DIMM.
One or more printer settings that were saved in the non-volatile storage device are invalid and have been reset to its factory default. Pressing should clear the message. Printing can continue, but unexpected behavior might occur.
1
Press to continue.
2 Turn the printer off and then on.
3 Check the printer settings to determine which settings have been changed.
X Description
0 on board NVRAM
ENWW Printer-error troubleshooting 309
Table 7-4
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
STORAGE ERROR
To continue
1 removable disk (flash or hard)
press
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE FULL
For help press
A non-volatile storage device is full.
Pressing should clear the message.
Printing can continue, but unexpected behavior might occur.
alternates with
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE FULL
To continue
press
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE WRITE FAIL
To continue press
X Description
0 on board NVRAM
1 removable disk (flash or hard)
A non-volatile storage device is failing to write. Pressing should clear the message. Printing can continue, but unexpected behavior might occur.
1
Press to continue.
2 For 68.0 errors, turn the printer off and then on.
3 If a 68.0 error persists, perform an
NVRAM intitialization.
4 For 68.1 errors, use the HP Web
Jetadmin software to delete files from the disk drive.
5 If a 68.1 errors persists, reinitialize the hard disk.
1
Press to continue.
2 Turn the printer off and then on.
3 If the problem persists, initialize
NVRAM.
4 Reinitialize the hard disk.
X Description
0 on board NVRAM
1 removable disk (flash or hard)
A critical hardware error has occurred.
79.XXXX
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
1 Turn the printer off and then on.
2 If the problem persists, reseat the firmware DIMM.
3 Reseat the formatter.
4 Replace the firmware DIMM.
5 Replace the formatter. Calibrate the
printer. See Calibrate Now (HP Color
8X.YYYY
EIO ERROR
The EIO accessory card in slot X has encountered a critical error.
1 Turn the printer off and then on.
2 If the problem persists, reseat the EIO card.
3 Replace the EIO card.
310 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
NOTE
Many of the procedures in this section instruct you to replace the DC controller PCA, the ETB, the formatter, the drum drive motors, the drum drive gears, or a laser/scanner unit.
After replacing one of these items, you must access the Print Quality menu and select QUICK
CALIBRATE NOW/FULL CALIBRATE NOW to ensure proper print quality after the repair.
When the ETB or the fuser are replaced before their normal end of life, access the resets menu and reset the counter to zero. See
Quick Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Table 7-5
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
Message
10.XX.YY SUPPLYY
MEMORY ERROR
alternates with
For help press
Description Action
The printer cannot read or write to at least one print cartridge memory tag or at least one memory tag is missing.
10.00.00 black print cartridge
10.00.01 cyan print cartridge
1 Turn the printer off and then back on.
2
Press for more information
10.00.02 magenta print cartridge
10.00.03 yellow print cartridge
NOTE
The supplies gauge shows the print cartridge consumption levels.
10.10.YY SUPPLY
MEMORY ERROR
alternates with
For help press
The printer cannot read or write to the print cartridge memory tag or the memory tag is missing.
1 Turn the printer off and then back on.
10.10.00 black print cartridge
10.010.01 cyan print cartridge
10.10.02 magenta print cartridge
10.10.03 yellow print cartridge
2 Exchange the cartridge for the indicated color with a cartridge in another slot to determine whether the error follows the cartridge or stays with the slot. If the error follows the cartridge, replace that cartridge.
Otherwise, continue with step 3.
3 Reseat the connectors between the memory
PCA (J602-J605) and the antenna PCAs
(J901A-D), the memory
Printer-error troubleshooting 311
Table 7-5
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
PCA, and the DC controller PCA (J1028).
4 Replace the antenna
PCA.
5 Replace the memory
PCA.
6 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
or
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
10.30.YY
alternates with
For help press
13.0A JAM IN
TOP COVER AREA
For help press
13.02.00 JAM IN
Tray X
For help press
A non-HP print cartridge is installed.
1 Turn the printer off and then on.
10.30.00 black print cartridge
10.30.01 cyan print cartridge
2 Remove all of the print cartridges and turn the printer off and then on.
10.30.02 magenta print cartridge
10.30.03 yellow print cartridge
A jam exists in the top cover.
1
3 If the error persists, replace the indicated cartridge.
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
A page is jammed in tray 2, tray 3, or tray 4.
1
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
3 Clean the pickup roller.
If it is worn or damaged, replace it.
4 Clean the feed roller. If it is worn or damaged, replace it.
5 Replace the tray X pickup solenoid.
6 Replace the pickup motor.
312 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-5
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
7 Replace the paper pickup assembly (for tray 2).
8 Replace the tray X paper feeder PCA (for the 500-sheet tray 3 or the 2 x 500-sheet feeder).
9 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
13.05.00 JAM IN
PAPER PATH
For help press
A page has jammed in the media path.
1
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
3 If paper is folding into an accordion shape, check whether the shutter on each print cartridge opens as you close the
ETB and each cartridge is turning correctly.
Replace defective print cartridges or drive motors.
4 Clean the attaching roller at the bottom of the ETB and make sure that the spring is holding it in place.
5 If the attaching roller gears are defective, replace the ETB.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB.
.
6 Replace the paper pickup PCA.
7 Replace the ETB if it is not moving paper correctly. Calibrate the printer.
Printer-error troubleshooting 313
Table 7-5
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
8 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
13.09.00 JAM IN
TOP COVER AREA
For help press
alternates with
13.09.00 JAM IN
TOP COVER AREA
Then open and close top cover
A page jammed as it entered the fuser.
1
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
3 Check that the fuser paper sensor is in place and is functioning correctly. If it is defective, replace it.
4 Replace the fuser.
WARNING!
The fuser might be hot.
5 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
13.12.00.JAM IN
DUPLEX PATH
For help press
A jam exists in the duplex path.
1
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
3 Determine whether the
ETB rollers or gears are worn or defective.
Replace the ETB if they are.
4 Check the duplex feed guide, which is part of the control-panel crossmember assembly.
If the guide is worn or damaged, replace the crossmember assembly.
314 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-5
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
13.20.00 JAM IN
TOP COVER AREA
For help press
alternates with
13.20.00 JAM IN
TOP COVER AREA
Then open and close top cover
A page has jammed as it entered the fuser.
1
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
3 Check that the fuser paper sensor is in place.
If it is defective, replace it.
4 Replace the fuser.
WARNING!
The fuser might be hot.
5 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
13.XX.YY.JAM IN
TRAY 1
For help press
A page is jammed in the multipurpose tray.
1
Press for detailed information about clearing the jam.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
3 Clean the pickup roller.
If it is worn or damaged, replace it.
4 Clean or replace the separation pad.
5 Replace the tray 1 pickup solenoid.
6 Replace the tray 1 pickup motor.
7 Replace the paper pickup assembly.
8 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Printer-error troubleshooting 315
Table 7-5
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
20 INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY
For help press alternates with
20 INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY
To continue
The printer has received more data from the computer than fits in the available memory.
1
Press to resume printing (see the note below).
2 Reduce the complexity of the print job to avoid this error.
3 Adding memory to the printer may allow printing of more complex pages.
NOTE
A loss of data will occur.
press
22 EIO X
BUFFER OVERFLOW
To continue
The printer EIO card in slot
X has overflowed its I/O buffer during a busy state.
Press to resume printing.
NOTE
A loss of data will occur.
press
22 PARALLEL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
The printer parallel buffer has overflowed during a busy state.
Press to resume printing.
NOTE
A loss of data will occur.
For help press alternates with
22 PARALLEL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
To continue press
22 SERIAL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
To continue
The printer serial buffer has overflowed during a busy state.
Press to resume printing.
NOTE
A loss of data will occur.
press
40 BAD SERIAL
TRANSMISSION
To continue
A serial data error (parity, framing, or line overrun) has occurred while the printer was receiving data.
Press
to resume printing.
NOTE
A loss of data will occur.
press
316 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-5
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
40 EIO X BAD
TRANSMISSION
To continue
press
A connection with the card in
EIO slot X has been broken abnormally.
1
Press to resume printing (see note below).
2 Check that all cables are connected to the
EIO ports and that the
EIO board is seated properly.
3 If possible, print to another network printer to verify the network is working properly.
41.3 UNEXPECTED
SIZE IN TRAY XX
For help press
alternates with
NOTE
A loss of data will occur.
The media that is loaded is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size that is configured for the tray.
1 If the incorrect size was selected, cancel the job or press for more information.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
LOAD TRAY XX:
[TYPE] [SIZE]
To use another tray press
41.5 UNEXPECTED
TYPE IN TRAY X
For help press
alternates with
LOAD TRAY XX:
[TYPE] [SIZE]
To use another tray press
The printer senses a different media type in the media path than the type that is configured in the tray.
1 If the incorrect type was selected, cancel the job or press for more information.
2
Press and to step through the instructions.
41.X
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
A printer error has occurred.
X Description
1 unknown misprint error
2 beam detect misprint error
3 media feed error (size)
1
Press to continue or press for more information.
2 If the message persists, turn the printer off and then on.
Printer-error troubleshooting 317
Table 7-5
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
41.X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue
press
49.XXXX
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
no VSYNC error
5 media feed error (type)
6 ETB detection error
7 feed delay error
9 noise VSREQ
A critical firmware error has occurred that caused the processor on the formatter to abort operation. This type of error can be caused by invalid print commands, corrupt data, or invalid operations. In some cases, electrical noise in the cable can corrupt data during transmission to the printer.
Other causes include poorquality parallel cables, poorconnections, or home-grown programs. On rare occasions, the formatter is at fault, which is usually indicated by a 79 Service
Error.
1 Press C
ANCEL
J
OB
to clear the print job from the printer memory.
2 Turn the printer off and then on.
3 Try printing a job from a different software program. If the job prints, go back to the first program and try printing a different file. If the message appears only with a certain software program or print job, contact the software vendor for assistance.
4 If the message persists with different software programs and print jobs, disconnect all of the cables to the printer that connect it to the network or computer.
5 Turn the printer off.
6 Remove all memory
DIMMs or third-party
DIMMs from the printer.
7 Remove all EIO devices from the printer.
8 Turn the printer on.
9 If the error no longer exists, install each
DIMM and EIO device one at a time, making sure to turn the printer off and on again as you install each device.
10 Replace a DIMM or EIO device if you determine that it causes the error.
318 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-5
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
11 Remember to reconnect all of the cables that connect the printer to the network or computer.
12 If the error persists, replace the firmware
DIMM.
13 Replace the formatter and calibrate the printer.
.
50.X FUSER ERROR
For help press
A fuser error has occurred.
X Description
1 low fuser temperature o
2 fuser warmup service
3 high fuser temperature
4 faulty fuser
5 inconsistent fuser
6 open fuser
7 fuser pressure-release mechanism failure
1 Turn the printer off and allow it to cool down.
2 Reinstall the fuser, and check the connector
J4034 that connects the fuser and the printer.
Replace the connector if it is damaged.
3 Turn the printer off and remove the fuser.
Measure the resistance between the connector pins on the fuser. If resistance does not meet the following guidelines, replace the fuser.
● J4034-5 to J4034-6:
300 - 500 KOhms
● J4034-1 to J4034-2: less than 1 KOhm
4 Check for continuity between connector pins
J4034-4 and J4034-2. If no continuity exists, replace the fuser.
5 Replace the fuser power supply PCA.
6 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Printer-error troubleshooting 319
Table 7-5
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
51.XY
PRINTER ERROR
A printer error has occurred.
For help press
alternates with
To continue turn off then on
X Description
1 beam detect error
2 laser error
Y Description
0 no color/black
1 cyan
2 magenta
3 yellow
1
Press to continue.
2 Turn the printer off and then on.
3 Reseat the connectors between the laser/ scanner and DC controller PCA (J1009 -
J1012).
4 Replace the defective laser/scanner assembly.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
5 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
52.XY
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
52.XY
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
A printer error has occurred.
X Description
1 scanner error
2 scanner startup error
3 scanner rotation error
Y Description
0 no color/black
1 cyan
2 magenta
3 yellow
1
Press to continue.
2 Turn the printer off and then on.
3 Reseat the connectors between the laser/ scanner and DC controller PCA (J1009 -
J1012).
4 Replace the defective laser/scanner assembly.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
5 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
320 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-5
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
53.XY.ZZ
CHECK RAM DIMM SLOT
alternates with
To continue press Stop
54.X PRINTER ERROR
An error occurred in some printer memory.
NOTE
The
HP Color LaserJet
4610n printer has only one DIMM slot.
X DIMM Type
1 Slot 1
2 Slot 2
Y Device Location
1 DDR Slot 1
2 DDR Slot 2
ZZ Error Number
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Verify that the memory meets specifications and is correctly installed.
3 Turn the printer on.
4 If the problem persists, replace the DDR card in the slot indicated.
0 unsupported memory
1 unrecognized memory
2 unsupported memory size
3 failed RAM test
4 exceeded maximum RAM size
5 invalid DDR speed
X Description
1 low fuser temperature
3 Dmax density sensor
5 CPR sensor
Turn the printer off and then on, and then check the following items in the order listed.
54.1 error: Check the fuser.
See 50.X fuser error.
6 OHT sensor
7 yellow drum phase (home) position sensor
8 magenta drum phase
(home) position sensor
9 cyan drum phase (home) position sensor
54.3 error: Check the connections. Replace the color registration detection assembly.
54.5 error: Check the connections. Replace the color registration detection assembly.
10 black drum phase (home) position sensor
11 yellow density sensor
12 magenta density sensor
13 cyan density sensor
54.6 error: Check the connections. Replace the paper pickup unit.
54.7, 54.8, 54.9, or 54.10
error: Check the connections. Replace the drum-phase sensor for the indicated color.
14 black density sensor
15 yellow CPR sensor
16 magenta CPR sensor
54.11, 54.12, 54.13, or
54.14 error: Check the connections. Check the cartridge and replace it if
Printer-error troubleshooting 321
Table 7-5
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
54.XX.00
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
54.20.00
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
55.01.XY
DC CONTROLLER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
17 cyan CPR sensor
18 black CPR sensor necessary. Replace the color-registration detection assembly.
19 ETB speed control sensor
20 color-plane-registration sensor
21 black toner-level sensor
54.15, 54.16, 54.17, 54.18:
Check the connections.
Replace the color registration detection assembly.
1E or 30 halftone calibration error
01 humidity environmental sensor abnormal
54.19 error: Check the ETB connection. Replace the
ETB. Replace the DC controller. Calibrate the
.
54.20 error: Check the connection. Replace the color-registration detection assembly.
54.21, 54.22, 54.23, or
54.24 error: Check the connections. Replace the toner-level sensing PCA.
Replace the DC controller.
Calibrate the printer. See
.
Printing cannot continue.
The CPR sensor out of range.
1 For step-by-step information, press
X values
2 Turn the printer off and then on.
15 = yellow
16 = magenta
17 = cyan
18 = black
Printing cannot continue.
The CPR sensor out of range.
1 For step-by-step information, press
2 Turn the printer off and then on.
The DC controller is not communicating with the formatter. The problem could be caused by a timing error or an intermittent connection.
X Description
1
Press to continue.
2 Turn the printer off and then on.
3 Reseat or replace the connectors between the
322 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-5
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
55.X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
0 communication error
1 DC controller memory error
2 outgoing party error
3 no engine response
4 communication timeout
DC controller and the formatter.
4 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
5 Replace the formatter.
Initialize NVRAM. See
.
56.XX
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
57.X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
A printer error has occurred.
XX Description
01 illegal input
02 illegal output
A printer-fan error has occurred.
Turn the printer off then on again.
If the error persists, record the message and call support.
Turn the printer off and then on.
57.3 Cartridge fan error (F2)
X Description
3 cartridge fan (vertical fan,
F2)
1 Reconnect the connector J1004 on the
DC controller PCA.
4 formatter fan (horizontal fan, F1)
7 power supply fan (F3; HP
Color LaserJet 4650 models)
2 Immediately after starting the print operation, measure the voltage between pins 1 and 3 on the J1004 connector. If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24
V, replace the cartridge fan.
3 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Printer-error troubleshooting 323
Table 7-5
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
57.4 Formatter fan error
(F1)
1 Reconnect the connector J1003 on the
DC controller PCA.
2 Immediately after turning the printer on, measure the voltage between pins 1 and 3 on the J1004 connector. If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V, replace the formatter fan.
3 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
57.5 Power-supply fan
error (F3) (HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models)
1 Reconnect the connector J1037 on the
DC controller PCA.
2 Immediately after turning the printer on, measure the voltage between pins 1 and 3 on the J1037 connector. If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V, replace the powersupply fan.
3 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
58.X
PRINTER ERROR
For help press
alternates with
A memory tag error was detected.
X Description
2 air-temperature sensor
3 CPU
1 Turn the printer off and then on.
2 Replace the memory
PCA.
3 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer
324 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-5
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
58.X
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
59.XY
PRINTER ERROR
4 power supply
A printer motor error has occurred.
after replacing the DC controller. See
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
For help press
alternates with
59.X Y
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
X Description
0 motor error
1 motor startup error
2 motor rotation error
3 fuser motor startup error
4 fuser motor rotation error
5 print cartridge motor startup error
6 print cartridge motor rotation error
9 ETB motor startup error
A ETB motor rotation error
B developing disengaging motor startup error
C developing disengaging motor rotation error
Y Description
0 no color/black
1 cyan
2 magenta
3 yellow
1 Turn the printer off and then on.
2 This message might also appear if the transfer unit is missing or incorrectly installed.
Ensure that the transfer unit is correctly installed.
ETB motor error
1 Clean the ETB unit intermediate connector,
J4017. .
2 Reconnect the connectors J4022 for the ETB motor, J4017 between the ETB and the printer, and J4014 on the DC controller
PCA.
3 Replace the ETB motor.
4 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Fuser motor error
1 Reconnect the connectors J4030 for the fuser motor and
J1002 on the DC controller PCA.
2 Replace the fuser drive assembly.
3 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Printer-error troubleshooting 325
Table 7-5
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
Print cartridge motor error
1 Reconnect the print cartridge connector on the DC controller PCA
(J1013 for cyan, J1031 for magenta, J1032 for yellow, and J1033 for black).
2 Replace the drum drive assembly for the indicated print cartridge.
3 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Developing-disengaging motor error
1 Reconnect the connectors J4024 and
J1019 between the developing-disengaging motor and the DC controller PCA.
2 Replace the developingdisengaging drive assembly.
3 Replace the DC controller PCA.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
62 NO SYSTEM
To continue turn off then on
68.X STORAGE ERROR
SETTING CHANGE
For help press
alternates with
No system was found.
1 Turn the printer off and then on.
2 Reseat the firmware
DIMM.
One or more printer settings that were saved in the nonvolatile storage device are invalid and have been reset to its factory default.
Pressing should clear the message. Printing can
1
Press to continue.
2 Turn the printer off and then back on.
3 Check the printer settings to determine
326 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-5
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
continue, but unexpected behavior might occur.
which settings have been changed.
68.X STORAGE ERROR
SETTING CHANGE
To continue press
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE FULL
X Description
0 on board NVRAM
1 removable disk (flash or hard)
A non-volatile storage device is full. Pressing should clear the message.
Printing can continue, but unexpected behavior might occur.
For help press
alternates with
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE FULL
To continue press
X Description
0 on board NVRAM
1 removable disk (flash or hard)
1
Press to continue.
2 For 68.0 errors, turn the printer off and then on.
3 If a 68.0 error persists, perform an NVRAM inititialization.
4 For 68.1 errors, use the
HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the disk drive.
5 If a 68.1 errors persists, reinitialize the hard disk.
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE WRITE FAIL
To continue press
79.XXXX
PRINTER ERROR
To continue turn off then on
NOTE
The removable hard disk is not available for the HP Color
LaserJet 4610n printer.
A non-volatile storage device is failing to write.
Pressing should clear the message. Printing can continue, but unexpected behavior might occur.
X Description
0 on board NVRAM
1 removable disk (flash or hard)
A critical hardware error has occurred.
1
Press to continue.
2 Turn the printer off and then on.
3 If the problem persists, initialize NVRAM.
4 Reinitialize the hard disk.
1 Turn the printer off and then on.
2 If the problem persists, reseat the firmware
DIMM.
3 Reseat the formatter.
4 Replace the firmware
DIMM.
Printer-error troubleshooting 327
Table 7-5
Numerical printer messages (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) (continued)
Message Description Action
5 Replace the formatter.
Calibrate the printer.
.
8X.YYYY
EIO ERROR
The EIO accessory card in slot X has encountered a critical error.
81 EIO ERROR = error in slot 1
82 EIO ERROR = error in slot 2
1 Turn the printer off and then on.
2 If the problem persists, reseat the EIO card.
3 Replace the EIO card.
328 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Replacement-parts configuration (HP Color
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
When the following parts are replaced, perform the procedures in this section.
■ Formatter and DC controller
■ Formatter (new or previously installed in another printer)
■ DC controller (new or previously installed in another printer)
NOTE
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models store printer-configuration information in the flash memory. Always print a configuration page before and after installing the formatter or DC controller to verify that the printer configuration information is restored from the CompactFlash memory to the NVRAM. Wait five minutes after the printer power is turned on before printing the after installation configuration page.
Formatter and DC controller
WARNING!
Do not replace the formatter and the DC controller at the same time. If the formatter and DC controller must both be replaced, install a replacement formatter first and make sure that you install the CompactFlash memory from the removed formatter on the replacement formatter before you turn the printer power on.
If the formatter and DC controller both need to be replaced, install a replacement formatter first. The
HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models store printer-configuration information in the flash memory. The flash memory from the removed formatter must be installed on the replacement formatter, so that the printer-configuration information (for example, the duplexing option, page counts, and serial number) can be restored to the formatter and the DC controller. After replacing the formatter and installing the flash memory, turn the printer power on. When the READY message appears on the control-panel display, you must wait five minutes before using the printer so that the printer-configuration information can be restored from the flash memory to the NVRAM.
After completing the preceding procedure, turn the printer power off and replace the DC controller.
Turn the printer power on. When the READY message appears on the control-panel display, wait five minutes before using the printer so that the printer-configuration information can be restored from the flash memory to the NVRAM.
After installing the replacement formatter and DC controller, perform a full calibration procedure three
times. See Quick Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
Formatter (new or previously installed in another printer)
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models store printer-configuration information in the flash memory. The flash memory from the removed formatter must be installed on the replacement formatter, so that the printer-configuration information (for example, the duplexing option, page counts, and serial number) can be restored to the formatter and the DC controller. After replacing the formatter and installing the flash memory, turn the printer power on. When the READY message appears on the control-panel display, you must wait five minutes before using the printer so that the printer-configuration information can be restored from the flash memory to the NVRAM.
NOTE
The transfer kit page count is not reset by replacing the formatter.
ENWW Replacement-parts configuration (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) 329
After installing the replacement formatter, perform a full calibration procedure three times. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
DC Controller (new or previously installed in another printer)
After replacing the DC controller, turn the printer power on. When the READY message appears on the control-panel display, you must wait five minutes before using the printer so that the printer configuration information (for example, the duplexing option, page counts, and serial number) can be restored from the CompactFlash memory to the NVRAM.
After installing the replacement DC controller, perform a quick calibration procedure three times. See
Quick Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
330 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Paper-path troubleshooting
Use the information in this section to troubleshoot errors in the printer paper path.
Jams
Jam error messages occur if media fails to arrive at or clear the paper-path sensors in the allowed time. Dedicated paper sensors detect whether media is present in the sensor and whether media is feeding normally. When the DC controller detects a jam, it immediately stops the printing process and the appropriate jam message appears for the sensor that detects the jam.
shows the locations of all the sensors in the printer.
Jam locations
Jams occur in the areas shown in
Figure 7-1 Jam locations (HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer) .
Jam messages correlate with these areas. For instructions about clearing jams, see the sections later in this chapter.
ENWW
Figure 7-1
Jam locations (HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer)
3
4
5
1
2
Top cover area
Duplex path
Paper path
Paper input path
Trays
Paper-path troubleshooting 331
Figure 7-2
2 x 500-sheet feeder (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only)
1
2
Pickup area
Paper feed area
Jam locations by error message
Use
Table 7-6 Error messages and associated jam locations table to identify jam locations and to
help pinpoint and clear specific paper jams. See Figure 7-1 Jam locations (HP Color LaserJet 4600
Figure 7-2 2 x 500-sheet feeder (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only) for jam
locations.
Table 7-6
Error messages and associated jam locations
Error message
13.01.00 JAM IN TRAY x
Jam location
5; printer
Action
A 13.01.00 jam occurs when the paper is late in arriving at the paper leading-edge sensor (PS3) in the paper pickup assembly. This event could be a no pick resulting in the absence of media in the paper path, or could be a sheet that was delayed and jammed somewhere in the feed area between the specified tray and the paper pickup assembly.
If the jam occurs during a multiple-page document, media might arrive in the fuser, but the
332 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-6
Error messages and associated jam locations (continued)
Error message Jam location Action
13.02.00 JAM IN TRAY x
13.09.00 JAM IN TOP COVER AREA
4 or 5; printer
1; printer jam is still a result of the media arriving late to the paper leading-edge sensor (PS3) from the specified tray. The printer will not boot up if a
13.01.00 jam occurs.
A 13.02.00 jam occurs when the paper leadingedge sensor (PS3) has been triggered, but never clears. The media remains in the registration assembly. After opening and closing the front covers and ETB, the printer can boot up when a
13.02.00 error exists, if the sensor is stuck or media remains in the sensor.
A 13.09.00 jam occurs when the media has successfully left the paper pick unit, cleared the paper leading-edge sensor (PS3), and arrived at the fuser, triggering the fuser inlet paper sensor
(PS11). The media folds into an accordion jam in the fuser and never triggers the fuser delivery sensor (PS12), causing a 13.09.00 error message.
13.0A.00 JAM IN TOP COVER AREA or
13.20.00 JAM IN TOP COVER AREA
13.12.00 JAM IN DUPLEX PATH
1; printer
1, 2, 3; printer
WARNING!
The fuser is hot, wait 10 minutes for it to cool down.
A 13.0A.00 jam occurs when the printer is trying to deliver sheets to the output bin for a simplex job or, for a duplex turnaround, when the paper was late leaving or never left the fuser delivery sensor
(PS12). The media might have been incorrectly loaded in the paper trays, something in the fuser might be obstructing the media, or the sensor could be stuck or broken.
WARNING!
The fuser is hot, wait 10 minutes for it to cool down.
A 13.12.00 jam occurs when the printer is trying to print a duplex print job after the media has entered the fuser and started back down the paper path, but has never arrived at or was late getting to the paper leading-edge sensor (PS3). The media might have been disturbed by an outside source,
(for example, someone might have grabbed the media while it was turning around), or something might be in the fuser that is obstructing the media.
Jam recovery
This printer automatically provides jam recovery, a feature that you can use to set whether the printer should attempt to automatically reprint jammed pages. Two options are:
■ AUTO. The printer will attempt to reprint jammed pages.
■ OFF. The printer will not attempt to reprint jammed pages.
NOTE
During the recovery process, the printer might reprint several pages that were printed correctly before the jam occurred. Be sure to remove any duplicated pages.
Paper-path troubleshooting 333
To disable paper jam recovery
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3
Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4
Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP.
5
Press to select SYSTEM SETUP.
6
Press to highlight JAM RECOVERY.
7
Press to select JAM RECOVERY.
8
Press to highlight OFF.
9
Press to select OFF.
10
Press the P
AUSE
/R
ESUME
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to return to the READY state.
To improve print speed and increase memory resources, you might want to disable jam recovery. If jam recovery is disabled, any pages that are involved in a jam will not be reprinted.
Avoiding jams
Table 7-7
Common causes of jams
Cause Solution
The print media does not meet HP-recommended media specifications.
Use only media that meets HP specifications.
A supply item is installed incorrectly, causing repeated jams.
Verify that all print cartridges, the ETB, and the fuser are correctly installed.
You are reloading media that has already passed through a printer or copier.
An input tray is loaded incorrectly.
Do not use media that has been previously printed on or copied.
Remove any excess media from the input tray. Press the media down in the input tray so that it fits below the tabs and within the media width guides.
The printed pages are skewed.
The print media is binding or sticking together.
The print media is removed before it settles into the output bin.
When duplexing, the print media is removed before the second side of the document is printed (HP Color LaserJet
4600 and 4650 models only).
The print media is in poor condition.
The input-tray guides are not adjusted correctly. Adjust input tray guides so they hold media firmly in place without bending it. If media heavier than 105 g/m 2 (28 lb) is loaded into tray 2 or tray 3, or tray 3/4, the media might skew.
Remove the media, flex it, rotate it 180°, or flip it over.
Reload the media into the input tray. Do not fan media.
Reset the printer. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it.
Reset the printer and print the document again. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it.
Replace the print media.
334 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-7
Common causes of jams (continued)
Cause
The internal rollers do not pick up print media from tray 2, tray 3, or tray 3/tray 4 (2 x 500-sheet feeder, HP CLJ 4650 only).
Solution
Remove the top sheet of media. If the media is heavier than
105 g/m 2 (28 lb), it might not be picked from the tray.
NOTE
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n printer does
not support tray 3 or tray 3/tray 4.
The print media has rough or jagged edges.
The print media is perforated or embossed.
One or more printer supply items have reached the end of their useful life.
The print media was not stored correctly.
Replace the media.
This media does not separate easily. You might need to feed single sheets from tray 1.
Check the printer control panel for messages prompting you to replace supplies, or print a supplies status page to verify the remaining life of the supplies.
Replace the print media. Media should be stored in its original packaging in a controlled environment.
Persistent jams
If jams occur repeatedly, use the information in this section to diagnose the root cause of the problem. The tables in this section list possible causes and recommended solutions for jams in each area of the paper path. Items are listed in the order that you should use to investigate. In general, items at the beginning of the list are relatively minor repairs. Items at the end of the list are more complex repairs.
Basic troubleshooting for jams
Use the following basic troubleshooting process for jams:
1
Gather data.
2
Identify the cause of the problem.
3
Fix the problem.
Data collection
To troubleshoot jams, gather the following information:
■ The exact jam error code tat appears on the control-panel display
■ The location of the leading edge of the media that is in the paper path
■ Whether media is in the paper path when the jam occurs or in the input tray
■ Whether the jam occurs at power-up or while media is moving
■ Whether the media is damaged and, if it is, where the damage occurs on the paper and where in the paper path the sheet stops
■ Whether the jam occurs when feeding from one particular tray
■ Whether the jam occurs only when using duplex printing (HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models only)
Paper-path troubleshooting 335
■ Whether a particular type of media is jamming or not jamming
■ Whether any of the supplies are non-HP (non-HP supplies are known to cause jams)
■ Whether the customer is storing the media correctly, overloading the trays, damaging the edge of the media during loading, or using media that has already been fed through the printer
General paper-path troubleshooting
Use the following suggestions to isolate the cause of the problem. After you have identified the cause, use the tables in this section to find a recommended solution.
NOTE
Use the paper-path test in the Diagnostics menu to print pages while troubleshooting.
■ View or print the event log and determine if a particular jam error occurs more often than others.
Try to identify a pattern.
■ Use the event log to determine the frequency of a particular jam. If a jam occurs repeatedly at approximately the same page count, consider it a single jam that the customer tried to clear.
■ Try printing from all available input trays to identify whether the problem is isolated to one tray.
■ Print the job in both simplex and duplex modes to identify whether the problem occurs only in one mode or the other.
■ Try printing on media from an unopened ream that has been stored correctly. If the jam does not occur with this media, then the customer's media might be causing the problem.
■ If the jam occurs from when the printer is turned on, check the paper path for small, torn pieces of media. Also check for broken sensors or flags, and check for loose or defective connections.
■ If the media is torn, folded, or wrinkled (typically along the leading edge), inspect the paper path for items that could be causing the damage.
■ If the user is using non-HP supplies, try replacing those supplies with genuine HP supplies to see if the problem goes away.
■ If necessary, instruct the user about proper media storage, correct loading technique, and printer operation. Make sure the user knows not to grab paper in the output bin during duplex printing.
Paper-path checklist
■ Verify that media is correctly loaded in the input trays and that all length and width guides are set correctly.
■ Clean the printer. Toner and paper dust in the paper path can inhibit the free movement of media through the printer and can block the sensors.
■ Use the paper-path test in the Diagnostic menu to vary the input selections of the printer to determine if the problem is associated with a particular area of the printer.
■ Worn rollers or separation pads can cause multifeeds. Check the condition of the pickup rollers and separation pads. Bent separation tabs (on the front corners of the input trays) can cause misfeeds and multifeeds. Replace the tray if necessary.
336 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
■ Defective paper-tray switches can cause jams by communicating the wrong paper size to the formatter.
■ Defective paper sensors along the paper path might falsely signal a jam.
■ Scraps of media that remain in the paper path can cause intermittent jams. Always check that the paper path is clear when cleaning the printer and when clearing jams. Also, remove the fuser and carefully check it for debris from jams.
Jams in tray 1
The following table describes the cause of and solution for jams in tray 1.
Table 7-8
Causes for jams in tray 1
Cause
The pickup roller is dirty, worn, or damaged.
The separation pad is defective.
The drive gears are damaged.
The multipurpose tray pickup solenoid is defective.
Solution
Clean the pickup roller. If it is still dirty after cleaning, or if it is worn or damaged, replace the pickup roller.
Clean the separation pad. If it is still dirty after cleaning, or if it is worn or damaged, replace the separation pad.
Check the drive gears in the paper pickup unit. Replace the pickup drive assembly if the gears are damaged.
1 Disconnect the connector J1020 for the multipurpose tray pickup solenoid from the DC controller PCA.
2 Measure the resistance between the cable-side connectors J1020-11 and J1020-10.
3 If the measured resistance is not about 160 ohms, replace the multipurpose tray pickup solenoid.
The pickup motor is defective.
The paper pickup assembly is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Replace the paper pickup drive assembly.
Replace the paper pickup assembly.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after
replacing the DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP Color
or
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
Jams in tray 2
The following table describes the cause of and solutions for jams in tray 2.
Table 7-9
Causes for jams in tray 2
Cause
The separation tabs in the paper cassette are deformed.
The pickup roller is worn or damaged.
The feed roller is dirty, worn, or damaged.
Solution
Straighten the tabs on the front corners of the tray, or replace the cassette.
Replace the pickup roller.
Clean the feed roller. If it is still dirty after cleaning, or if it is worn or damaged, replace the feed roller.
Paper-path troubleshooting 337
Table 7-9
Causes for jams in tray 2 (continued)
Cause
The drive gears are damaged.
The cassette pickup solenoid is damaged.
The pickup motor is defective.
The paper pickup assembly is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Check the drive gears in the paper pickup unit. Replace the pickup drive assembly if the gears are damaged.
1 Disconnect the connector for the cassette pickup solenoid from the DC controller PCA.
2 Measure the resistance between the cable-side connectors J1020-13 and J1020-12.
3 If the measured resistance is not about 160 ohms, replace the cassette pickup solenoid.
Replace the paper pickup drive assembly.
Replace the paper pickup assembly.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Jams in tray 3 or tray 3/tray 4 (2 x 500-sheet paper feeder, HP CLJ 4650 only)
The following table describes the cause of and solutions for jams in tray 3 or 3/4.
NOTE
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n does not support tray 3 or tray 3/tray 4. Tray 3/tray 4 is supported only on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models.
Table 7-10
Causes for jams in tray 3 or tray 3/tray 4 (2 x 500-sheet paper feeder, )
Cause
The separation tabs in the paper cassette are deformed.
The pickup roller is worn or damaged.
The feed roller is dirty, worn, or damaged.
The drive gears are damaged.
The connector to the printer has poor contact.
The paper feeder pickup solenoid is damaged.
Solution
Straighten the tabs on the front corners of the tray, or replace the cassette.
Replace the pickup roller.
Clean the feed roller. If it is still dirty after cleaning, or if it is worn or damaged, replace the feed roller.
Check the drive gears in the paper pickup unit. Replace the pickup drive assembly if the gears are damaged.
Reconnect all of the connectors to the printer. Replace any damaged connectors.
1 Disconnect the connector J4006 for the paper feeder solenoid from the paper feeder PCA.
2 Measure the resistance between the cable-side connectors J4006-2 and J4006-1.
3 If the measured resistance is not about 160 ohms, replace the paper feeder pickup solenoid.
The pickup motor is defective.
The paper feeder PCA is defective.
Replace the paper pickup drive assembly.
Replace the paper feeder PCA.
338 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-10
Causes for jams in tray 3 or tray 3/tray 4 (2 x 500-sheet paper feeder, ) (continued)
Cause Solution
The paper pickup assembly is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Replace the paper pickup assembly.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after
replacing the DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP Color
or
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
Jams in the paper path
The following table describes the cause of and solution for jams in the paper path.
Table 7-11
Causes for jams in the paper path
Cause Solution
The registration shutter is defective.
(This applies to jams that occur before the registration roller.)
Make sure that the shutter is clean and moves smoothly, and that the spring is in place. If the shutter is damaged, replace the paper pickup assembly.
The drive gears are damaged.
(This applies to jams that occur in advance of the registration roller.)
Check the drive gears in the paper pickup unit. Replace the pickup drive assembly if the gears are damaged.
The registration roller and registration sub roller are dirty, worn, or damaged.
(This applies to jams that occur in advance of the registration roller.)
The attaching roller is damaged.
(This applies to jams in which media is crumpled into an accordion when it enters the ETB.)
Clean the registration roller or registration sub-roller if it is dirty. If it is still dirty after cleaning, or if it is worn or damaged, replace the paper pickup assembly.
The cartridge shutter open/close mechanism is damaged.
(This applies to jams in which media is crumpled into an accordion fold somewhere on the ETB belt.)
The cartridge drive motor assembly is damaged.
The attaching roller is defective.
The paper leading edge sensor is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Check the attaching roller to see if it is damaged. If it is damaged, replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after
replacing the ETB. See Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
.
The shutters in each print cartridge should open as you close the ETB. If a shutter does not open, replace that print cartridge. Also check for a damaged shutter mechanism in the printer.
Inspect the cartridge drive assembly in each print cartridge.
If any are damaged, replace the assembly for that print cartridge.
Make sure that the attaching roller is clean and the spring is in place. If the roller is damaged, replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB. See
Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Replace the pickup PCA.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after
replacing the DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP Color
or
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
Paper-path troubleshooting 339
Jams in the top cover
The following table describes the causes of and solutions for jams in the top cover.
Table 7-12
Causes for jams in the top cover
Cause Solution
The fuser paper sensor or sensor lever is defective.
Make sure that the fuser paper sensor lever moves smoothly and is set in place. Replace the lever if it is damaged.
Replace the sensor if it is defective.
The fuser sleeve or pressure roller does not rotate smoothly.
If the fuser drive gears are worn or damaged, replace the fuser.
The fuser inlet guide is dirty or is covered with toner.
Clean the fuser inlet guide.
The fuser sleeve or pressure roller is dirty, worn, or damaged. Clean the fuser sleeve or pressure roller. If it is damaged, replace the fuser.
The fuser delivery sensor or sensor lever is defective.
The fuser delivery roller is worn.
The fuser delivery roller drive gears are worn or damaged.
The face-down delivery roller is defective.
DC controller PCA is defective.
Make sure that the fuser delivery sensor lever moves smoothly and is set in place. Replace the lever if it is damaged. Replace the sensor if it is defective.
Replace the fuser.
Replace the fuser.
Replace the fuser.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Jams in the duplex path (HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models only)
The following table describes the causes of and solution for jams in the duplex path.
Table 7-13
Causes for jams in the duplex path
Cause
The oblique rollers are worn or damaged.
The oblique roller drive gears are worn or damaged.
The duplex feed guide is damaged.
Solution
Replace the oblique rollers.
Replace the ETB unit. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
or
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
.
Replace the ETB unit. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
or
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet
.
340 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Media-transport troubleshooting
If media is feeding incorrectly, use the information in this section to identify and resolve the problem.
Multiple pages are fed
The following table describes the causes of and solutions for multiple pages feeding.
Table 7-14
Causes for multiple pages feeding
Cause
The separation tabs in the cassette are damaged (tray 2, tray 3, or tray 3/4 [2 x 500 sheet feeder]).
Solution
Straighten the tabs on the front corners of the tray, or replace the cassette.
NOTE
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n does not support tray 3 or tray 3/tray 4. Tray 3/tray 4 is supported only on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models.
The multipurpose tray separation pad is worn.
Replace the separation pad assembly.
The multipurpose tray separation pad has a defective spring.
Make sure that the spring is set in place. If the spring is damaged, replace the separation pad assembly.
Media is wrinkled or folded
To diagnose the cause of wrinkled or folded media, use the Print/Stop test in the Diagnostics menu. Adjust the stop time to stop the media before it enters the fuser. Open the ETB. If the media is
to diagnose the problem. If the media is not wrinkled at this stage, use
Table 7-15 Causes for wrinkled or folded media (part one: paper-path entrance)
to diagnose the problem.
Table 7-15
Causes for wrinkled or folded media (part one: paper-path entrance)
Cause
The registration shutter is defective.
The feed roller or registration roller is dirty or defective.
The paper path has foreign substances or dirt.
The cartridge shutter open/close mechanism is damaged.
(This applies to jams in which paper is crumpled into an accordion fold somewhere on the ETB belt.)
Solution
Make sure that the registration shutter is clean and moves smoothly. If the registration shutter is worn or damaged, replace the paper pickup assembly.
Replace the paper pickup assembly.
Remove any foreign substances or dirt from the paper path.
If the feed guide is damaged, replace the paper pickup assembly.
The shutters in each print cartridge should open as you close the ETB. If a shutter does not open, replace that print cartridge. Also check for a damaged shutter mechanism in the printer.
Table 7-16
Causes for wrinkled or folded paper (part two: paper-path exit)
Cause
The fuser inlet guide is dirty.
Solution
Clean the fuser inlet guide.
ENWW Media-transport troubleshooting 341
Table 7-16
Causes for wrinkled or folded paper (part two: paper-path exit) (continued)
Cause Solution
The fuser pressure roller is dirty or damaged.
The fuser sleeve is dirty or damaged.
The fuser delivery roller is dirty.
Clean the pressure roller. If the pressure roller is damaged, replace the fuser.
Clean the fuser sleeve. If the fuser sleeve is damaged, replace the fuser.
Clean the fuser delivery roller.
Paper is skewed
Table 7-17
Causes for skewed paper
Cause
The paper dust or dirt has accumulated in the cassette feed roller or registration roller.
The cassette feed roller and registration roller are worn irregularly.
The separation tabs in the cassette are damaged (tray 2, tray 3, or tray 3/4 [2 x 500-sheet feeder]).
NOTE
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n does not support tray 3 or tray 3/tray 4. Tray 3/tray 4 is supported only on the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models.
Solution
Clean the rollers.
Replace the paper pickup assembly.
Straighten the tabs on the front corners of the tray, or replace the cassette.
The registration shutter is defective.
Make sure that the registration shutter moves smoothly, its spring is in place, and it is clean. If the registration shutter is damaged, replace the paper pickup assembly.
342 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Image-formation troubleshooting
The image-formation system is the central hub of the printer. During image formation, an image of colored toner is formed and then fused onto the paper. The image-formation system consists of the following physical components:
■ Four laser/scanners
■ Four print cartridges
■ ETB
■ Fuser
Before beginning image-formation troubleshooting, check that the media meets the specifications in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide.
Online print-quality troubleshooting tools (HP Color
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
Go to www.hp.com/go/printquality/clj4600 , www.hp.com/go/printquality/clj4610 , or www.hp.com/go/ printquality/clj4650 to identify and troubleshoot print-quality issues for the HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 printers as well as to show customers how to troubleshoot print-quality issues. This Web site suggests solutions for eight print-quality issues. It includes a tool that uses standard images in order to ensure that the support agent and the customer have a common diagnostic method for isolating the issue.
You can also visit the Web site from www.hp.com
by using the following procedure.
1
On the Main www.hp.com
page, click Support & Drivers.
2
Type
CLJ4610 or CLJ4650 in the open text field, and then click the forward arrows.
3
Click the product name in the list that is provided.
4
Click print quality troubleshooting tool under Hot Topics in the box at the right of the screen.
NOTE
The customer can also go to www.hp.com/bizsupport to find the print quality
troubleshooting tool under Hot Topics.
These Web sites provide intuitive, step-by-step directions for producing print-quality troubleshooting pages that can be used to isolate issues and provide possible print-quality solutions.
Print-quality problems associated with media
Some print-quality problems arise from use of inappropriate media.
■ Use media that meets HP specifications.
■ The surface of the media is too smooth. See
■ The printer driver is set incorrectly. Change the paper-type setting to HEAVY or GLOSSY.
■ The media that you are using is too heavy for the printer, and the toner is not fusing to the media.
ENWW Image-formation troubleshooting 343
■ The transparencies that you are using are not designed for correct toner adhesion. Use only transparencies that are designed for HP Color LaserJet printers.
■ The moisture content of the paper is uneven, too high, or too low. Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper.
■ Some areas of the paper reject toner. Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper.
■ The letterhead that you are using is printed on rough paper. Use a smoother, xerographic paper.
If this solves your problem, consult with the printer who produces your letterhead to verify that the paper used meets the specifications for this printer.
■ The paper is excessively rough. Use a smoother, xerographic paper.
Overhead transparency defects
Overhead transparencies can show any of the image-quality problems that appear on any other type of media, as well as defects that are specific to printing on transparencies. In addition, because transparencies are pliable while in the print path, they are subject to being marked by the mediahandling components.
NOTE
Allow transparencies to cool for at least 30 seconds before handling them.
■ In the printer driver Paper tab, select Transparency as the media type. Also, make sure that the tray is correctly configured for transparencies.
■
■ Handle transparencies by the edges. Skin oil on the surface of transparencies can cause spots and smudges.
■ Small, random dark areas on the trailing edge of solid-fill pages can be caused by transparencies sticking together in the output bin. Try printing the job in smaller batches.
■ The printed colors are unacceptable. Select different colors in the software program or printer driver.
■ If you are using a reflective overhead projector, use a standard overhead projector instead.
Print-quality problems that are associated with the environment
Print-quality problems can occur if the printer is operating in excessively humid or dry conditions.
Verify that the printing environment is within specifications. See Environmental specifications
.
344 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Print-quality problems that are associated with jams
Take the following actions to prevent problems that are associated with printer jams.
■ To avoid problems after a jam, make sure that all media is cleared from the paper path.
■ If the printer recently jammed, print two to three pages to clean the printer.
■ If the media does not pass through the fuser, image defects might appear on subsequent documents. Print two to three pages to clean the printer. If the problem persists, see the next section to print a troubleshooting page.
Print-quality troubleshooting pages
Use the built-in print quality troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print-quality problems.
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3
Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4
Press to highlight PQ TROUBLESHOOTING.
5
Press to print the pages.
The printer returns to the Ready state after you print the print-quality troubleshooting pages.
Understanding color variations
The printed output might not match the computer screen, and the colors printed on successive pages might not match. While color variations are inherent in this printing method, they can indicate changes in the printing environment, print media, or printer components.
Common causes of color variation
The following list outlines the major causes of color variations between computers, programs, and output devices.
■ Halftone patterns that are produced on monitors and the types of patterns that are used in the print jobs are different and might cause variations in the printed output.
■ The printed output differs from the image on the monitor because the monitor and the print media have different reference values of black and white. The monitor screen has charcoal gray for the black level, and the white on the monitor screen is actually blue. Black on the print media is limited only by the fill capability of the printer, and most good-quality paper has a very high white level. In addition, phosphor (used in color monitors) and toner have entirely different spectra characteristics and different color-rendering capabilities. Differences between output are common. Blues generally match better than reds.
■ The color of the ambient light changes the perception of color. Fluorescent light lacks many colors that are present in incandescent light, and the color range of natural light is broader than any artificial light. When comparing color, choose a standard light source for reference and understand that the perceived color will change as the light changes.
Image-formation troubleshooting 345
■ Long-term color variations occur as paper ages. Use high-quality paper and protect the paper from sunlight to help minimize discoloration.
■ Environmental changes can cause color variation. The development process places a high potential across an air gap to attract toner to the imaging drum. Changes in relative humidity vary the point at which the toner travels to the imaging drum.
■ All consumable components have a finite life span. As these components reach the end of their useful life, their ability to produce consistent print quality diminishes.
■ Paper roughness can cause colors to look different. Use standard paper.
Color selection process
The user selects the color in the program, but the operating system might convert or modify some characteristics of the color before sending the information to the printer driver. The printer driver might also modify color characteristics depending upon the selected output mode.
Any color characteristics that the printer driver or programs do not address are set to the printer default. The default color might not match the color the user selected.
Matching colors
PANTONE
®
* color matching
PANTONE ® * has multiple color-matching systems. The PANTONE ® * Matching System is very a popular system that uses solid inks to generate a wide range of color hues and tints. See www.hp.com
for details about how to use the PANTONE ® * Matching System with this printer.
Swatch book color matching
The process for matching printer output to preprinted swatch books and standard color references is complex. In general, you can obtain a reasonably good match to a swatch book if the inks that are used to create the swatch book are cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. These are usually referred to as process color swatch books.
Some swatch books are created from spot colors. Spot colors are specially created colorants. Many of these spot colors are outside of the gamut of the printer. Most spot color swatch books have companion process swatch books that provide CMYK approximations to the spot color.
Most process swatch books have a note about what process standards were used to print the swatch book. In most cases they will be SWOP, EURO, or DIC. To get optimal color matching to the process swatch book, select the corresponding ink emulation from the printer menu. If you cannot identify the process standard, use SWOP ink emulation.
346 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Using color
HP ImageREt 2400 (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
HP ImageREt 2400 is a technology that provides the best color-print quality without having to change driver settings or make trade-offs among print quality, performance, and memory.
HP ImageREt 2400 has been improved for this printer. The improvements offer trapping technologies, even greater control over dot placement, and more precise control of toner quality in a dot. These new technologies, coupled with HP's multilevel printing process, result in a 600-by-600 dpi printer that provides 2400-dpi color laser-class quality with millions of smooth colors.
HP ImageREt 3600 (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
HP ImageREt 3600 print technology is a system that HP developed to deliver superior print quality and technological innovation. The HP ImageREt system incorporates technology that optimizes each element of the print system.
Several categories of HP ImageREt have been developed that meet a variety of user needs. The system is comprised of key laser technologies for color printing, including image enhancements, smart supplies, and high-resolution imaging. The ImageREt core technologies are refined in higher level systems for more advanced system users, and additional technologies are integrated.
The HP ImageREt 3600 is a complete HP proprietary printing solution, developed and implemented for the first time in the HP Color LaserJet 4650 printer. HP now offers superior image enhancements for general office and marketing documents. HP ImageREt 3600 performs well in different environmental conditions and with a variety of media, and the image mode is optimized for printing on HP High Gloss Laser Paper.
Paper selection
For the best color and image quality, select the appropriate media type from the printer menu or from the front panel.
sRGB
Standard red-green-blue (sRGB) is a world-wide color standard originally developed by HP and
Microsoft as a common color language for monitors, input devices (scanners, digital cameras), and output devices (printers, plotters). It is the default color space used for HP products, Microsoft operating systems, the World Wide Web, and most office software that is sold today. sRGB is representative of the typical Windows computer monitor today and the convergence standard for high-definition television.
NOTE
Factors such as the type of monitor you use and the room's lighting can affect the appearance of colors on your screen. For more information, see
The latest versions of Adobe ® PhotoShop ® , CorelDRAW ® , Microsoft Office, and many other programs use sRGB to communicate color. Most importantly, as the default color space in Microsoft operating systems, sRGB has gained broad adoption as a means to exchange color information between programs and devices using a common definition that assures typical users will experience greatly improved color matching. sRGB improves your ability to match colors among the printer, the computer monitor and other input devices (scanner, digital camera) automatically, without the need to become a color expert.
Image-formation troubleshooting 347
Color options
Color options enable optimal color output automatically for diverse types of documents.
Color options use object tagging, which allows optimal color and halftone settings to be used for different objects (text, graphics, and photos) on a page. The printer driver determines which objects are used on a page and uses halftone and color settings that provide the best print quality for each object. Object tagging, combined with optimized default settings, produces great color out of the box.
In the Windows environment, the Automatic and Manual color options are on the Color tab in the printer driver.
Setting color options to Automatic will typically produce the best possible print quality for color documents. However, situations might occur when you want to print a color document in grayscale
(black and white) or want to change one of the printer's color options.
■ Using Windows, print in grayscale or change the color options by using settings on the Color tab in the printer driver.
■ Using a Macintosh computer, print in grayscale or change the color options by using the Color
Matching pop-up menu in the Print dialog box.
Print in Grayscale
Selecting the Print in Grayscale option from the printer driver prints a document by using black toner. This option is useful for previewing preliminary copies of slides and hardcopy output, or for printing color documents that will be photocopied or faxed.
Automatic or manual color adjustment
The Automatic color adjustment option optimizes the neutral gray color treatment, halftones, and edge enhancements used for each element in a document. For more information, see your printer driver online Help.
NOTE
Automatic is the default setting and is recommended for printing all color documents.
Use the Manual color adjustment option to adjust the neutral gray color treatment, halftones, and edge enhancements for text, graphics and photographs. To gain access the Manual color options, on the Color tab, select Manual, and then select Settings.
Manual color options
Use manual color adjustment to adjust the Color (or Color Map) and Halftone options individually for text, graphics, and photographs.
NOTE
Some programs convert text or graphics to raster images. In these cases, the
Photographs settings also controls text and graphics.
348 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Halftone options
Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. You can select halftone settings for text, graphics, and photographs independently. The two halftone options are Smooth and Detail.
■ The Smooth option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Choose this option when uniform and smooth area fills are top priority.
■ The Detail option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors, or images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Choose this option when sharp edges and details are top priority.
Neutral Grays
The Neutral Grays setting determines the method used for creating gray colors used in text, graphics, and photographs.
Two values are available for the Neutral Grays setting:
■ Black Only generates neutral colors (grays and black) using only black toner. This guarantees neutrals colors without a color cast.
■ 4-Color generates neutral colors (grays and black) by combining all four toner colors. This method produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors, and it produces the darkest black.
Edge Control
The Edge Control setting determines how edges are rendered. Edge control has two components: adaptive halftoning and trapping. Adaptive halftoning increases edge sharpness. Trapping reduces the effect of incorrect color plane registration by overlapping the edges of adjacent objects slightly.
Four levels of edge control are available:
■ Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting. Adaptive halftoning is on for this setting.
■ Normal is the default trapping setting. Trapping is at a medium level and adaptive halftoning is on.
■ Light sets trapping at a minimal level, and adaptive halftoning is on.
■ Off turns off both trapping and adaptive halftoning.
RGB Color
Two values are available for the RGB Color setting:
■ Default instructs the printer to interpret RGB color as sRGB. sRGB is the accepted standard of
Microsoft and the World Wide Web Organization (www).
■ Vivid instructs the printer to increase the color saturation in the midtones. Less colorful objects are rendered more colorfully. This value is recommended for the printing business graphics
■ Device instructs the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render photographs properly with this selection, you must manage image color in the program or operating system.
Image-formation troubleshooting 349
Adjusting color balance
This printer features automatic color calibration to provide high-quality color output. In situations that require critical color control, you can manually adjust the density balance of the four toner colors. The available range for each color is from -5 to +5. The default value is 0.
CAUTION
This procedure should only be performed by the network administrator.
Performing this procedure changes the color balance of the printer by altering halftones, and affects all print jobs.
To adjust color density
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE menu.
3
Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE menu.
4
Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.
5
Press to select PRINT QUALITY.
6
Press or to highlight ADJUST COLOR.
7
Press to select ADJUST COLOR.
8
Press or to highlight the desired color.
9
Press to select the desired color.
10
Press or to highlight the correct density setting.
11
Press to select the density setting.
12
Press to set the density for the next color.
13
After setting the density for each color, press P
AUSE
/R
ESUME
(HP Color LasrJet 4600 models) or
MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models).
350 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Image defects troubleshooting
If specific defects occur repeatedly, print a Print Quality Troubleshooting page and follow the instructions on the page. If you are unable to resolve the problem, use the information in this section to identify the root cause of the problem.
Image defects fall into the categories that are listed in
. Possible causes and recommended solutions for each of these categories are listed in the tables that follow. In general, the items are listed in order from minor repairs to major repairs. Check the items in the order in which they appear.
Table 7-18
Image defects
Image defect
Light image
Light color
Dark image
Dark color
Completely blank
All black/solid color
Dots in vertical lines
Dirt on back of paper
Dirt on front of paper
Vertical lines
White vertical lines
Horizontal lines
White horizontal lines
Missing color
Blank spots
Poor fusing
Distortion or blurring
Smearing
Misplaced image
Description More information
A very light image is printed.
One color is light in an image.
A very dark image is printed.
One color is dark in an image.
No image is printed.
An all black or solid colored image is printed.
Vertical lines of white dots appear in the image.
The back (non-printed) side of the paper is dirty.
.
The front (printed) sided of the paper is dirty.
Vertical lines are printed.
White vertical lines appear in the image. See White vertical lines .
Horizontal lines are printed.
.
White horizontal lines appear in the image.
One of the four toner colors is not printing.
Dirt on the front of the paper
.
The image has blank spots.
Toner is loose on the printed image.
The image appears distorted, or colors seem out of alignment.
The image is smeared or dirty.
The image is placed incorrectly on the page.
.
.
ENWW Image defects troubleshooting 351
Light image
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for light images.
Table 7-19
Causes for light images
Cause
The image density is not adjusted correctly.
A poor contact in the attaching bias contacts between the
ETB and the high-voltage PCA.
The attaching roller is worn or damaged.
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Increase the density for each color.
Clean the contacts. Replace them if they are still dirty or are damaged.
Replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the
ETB. See Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Light color
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for light color.
Table 7-20
Causes for light color
Cause
A poor contact exists in the transfer bias contacts between the ETB and the printer.
The transfer charging roller is worn or damaged.
The photosensitive drum is worn.
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
The laser/scanner unit is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Clean the contacts for the affected color. If the contacts are still dirty after cleaning or if they are damaged, replace the contacts or the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the
ETB. See Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
Replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the
ETB. See Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
Replace the print cartridge for the affected color.
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the laser/scanner for the affected color. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
352 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Dark image
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dark images.
Table 7-21
Causes for dark images
Cause
The image density is not adjusted correctly.
The color-registration detection unit is dirty.
The color-registration detection unit is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Decrease the density for each color.
Clean the lens on the color-registration detection unit.
Replace the color-registration detection unit.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after
replacing the DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP Color
or
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
Dark color
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dark color.
Table 7-22
Causes for dark colors
Cause
A poor contact exists in the drum ground, primary charging bias, and developing bias contacts of the high-voltage PCA and the print cartridge.
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Clean the contacts on the cartridge for the affected color. If they are still dirty after cleaning, or if they are damaged, replace the cartridge.
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after
replacing the DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP Color
or
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
Completely blank image
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for completely blank pages.
Table 7-23
Causes for a completely blank image
Cause
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after
replacing the DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP Color
or
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
All black or solid color
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for all black or solid color.
Image defects troubleshooting 353
Table 7-24
Causes for an all black or solid colored image
Cause
A poor contact exists in the drum ground, primary charging bias, and developing bias contacts of the high-voltage PCA and the print cartridge.
The primary charging roller is defective.
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Clean the contacts on the cartridge for the affected color. If they are still dirty after cleaning, or if they are damaged, replace the cartridge.
Replace the print cartridge for the affected color.
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Dots in vertical lines
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dots in vertical lines.
Table 7-25
Causes for vertical lines of white dots
Cause
The transfer charging roller is worn or damaged.
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the
ETB. See Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Dirt on the back of the paper
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dirt on the back of the paper.
Table 7-26
Causes for dirt on the back of the paper
Cause
One or more of the rollers are dirty.
The pickup roller is dirty.
A poor contact exists in the attaching bias contacts between the ETB and the high-voltage PCA.
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
See Repetitive defects troubleshooting for information about
identifying the roller that might be dirty. Clean the indicated roller. If the roller is still dirty after cleaning, replace the appropriate roller, cartridge, or assembly.
Clean the roller. If the roller is still dirty after cleaning, replace the pickup roller assembly.
Clean the contacts. Replace them if they are still dirty or are damaged.
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
354 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-26
Causes for dirt on the back of the paper (continued)
Cause Solution
or
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
Dirt on the front of the paper
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dirt on the front of the paper.
Table 7-27
Causes for dirt on the front of the paper
Cause
One or more of the rollers are dirty.
The pickup roller is dirty.
A poor contact exists in the attaching bias contacts between the ETB and the high-voltage PCA.
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
See Repetitive defects troubleshooting for information about
identifying the roller that might be dirty. Clean the indicated roller. If the roller is still dirty after cleaning, replace the appropriate roller, cartridge, or assembly.
Clean the roller. If is still dirty after cleaning, replace the pickup roller assembly.
Clean the contacts. Replace them if they are still dirty or are damaged.
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after
replacing the DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP Color
or
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
Vertical lines
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for vertical lines.
Table 7-28
Causes for vertical lines
Cause
The photosensitive drum has grooves around the circumference.
The fuser sleeve has grooves around the circumference.
Solution
Replace the cartridge that indicates the color of the vertical lines.
Replace the fuser.
White vertical lines
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for white vertical lines.
Table 7-29
Causes for white vertical lines
Cause
The developing cylinder has grooves around the circumference.
The photosensitive drum has grooves around the circumference.
Solution
Replace the print cartridge for the color in which the white lines appear.
Replace the print cartridge for the color in which the white lines appear.
Image defects troubleshooting 355
Table 7-29
Causes for white vertical lines (continued)
Cause Solution
The laser is blocked by a foreign substance.
The mirror in the laser/scanner unit is dirty.
Inspect the laser source for the affected color, and remove any debris that might be blocking it.
Replace the laser/scanner for the color in which the white lines appear. Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/ scanner. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
The fuser sleeve is scarred vertically. (All colors are affected.) Replace the fuser.
Horizontal lines
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for horizontal lines.
Table 7-30
Causes for horizontal lines
Cause Solution
The photosensitive drum has scars that run from end to end.
Replace the print cartridge for the affected color.
The fuser sleeve has scars that run from end to end.
Replace the fuser.
White horizontal lines
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for white horizontal lines.
Table 7-31
Causes for white horizontal lines
Cause Solution
The photosensitive drum has scars that run from end to end.
Replace the print cartridge for the affected color.
The ETB belt has horizontal scars.
Replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the
ETB. See Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
or
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
Missing color
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for missing color.
Table 7-32
Causes for a missing color
Cause
A poor contact exists in the developing bias contacts of the high-voltage PCA and the print cartridge.
The primary charging roller is defective.
The laser/scanner unit is defective.
Solution
Clean the contacts. If they are still dirty after cleaning, or if they are damaged, replace the print cartridge or the highvoltage contacts. Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the print cartridge for the missing color.
Replace the laser/scanner for the missing color. Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/scanner. See
356 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-32
Causes for a missing color (continued)
Cause
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
(HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after
replacing the DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP Color
or
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
Blank spots
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for blank spots.
Table 7-33
Causes for blank spots
Cause
The high-voltage PCA is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Replace the high-voltage PCA.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after
replacing the DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP Color
or
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
Poor fusing
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for poor fusing.
Table 7-34
Causes for poor fusing
Solution
Use media that meets specifications. See chapter 1.
Cause
The media is not within specifications. For example, media that is too thick causes poor fusing.
The fuser is not within nip-width specifications.
The fuser sleeve is scarred or damaged.
The pressure roller is scarred or damaged.
The thermistor has deteriorated.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Replace the fuser.
Replace the fuser.
Replace the fuser.
Replace the fuser.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after
replacing the DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP Color
or
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
Image defects troubleshooting 357
Distortion or blurring
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for distortion or blurring.
Table 7-35
Causes for distortion or blurring
Cause
The color-plane registration is out of specification.
The ETB is defective.
The ETB motor drive gear is worn or damaged.
The drum motor drive gear is worn or damaged.
The color-registration detection unit is defective.
The laser/scanner unit is defective.
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Calibrate the printer from the Print Quality menu. See
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
If the ETB belt does not rotate smoothly, replace the ETB.
Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB. See
Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
(HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Replace the ETB motor.
Replace the drum motor for the affected color.
Replace the color registration detection unit.
Replace the laser/scanner for the affected color. Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/scanner. See
Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or
(HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after replacing the DC controller. See
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) .
Smearing
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for smearing.
Table 7-36
Causes for smearing
Cause
A poor contact exists in the printer ground and cartridge ground contacts.
The fuser inlet guide is dirty or contains debris.
The cartridge shutters are not opening.
Solution
Clean each print-cartridge ground contact and the printer ground contact. If they are still dirty after cleaning, or if they are damaged, replace the cartridge, or replace the printer ground contact.
Clean the fuser inlet guide.
Make sure the cartridge shutter bar is operating correctly.
Misplaced image
This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for misplaced images.
Table 7-37
Causes for misplaced image
Cause
The media is skewed.
Solution
See Paper is skewed to resolve the skew.
358 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-37
Causes for misplaced image (continued)
Cause
The oblique rollers are worn (this issue applies to duplex printing only; HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models only).
The DC controller PCA is defective.
Solution
Replace the oblique rollers.
Replace the DC controller PCA. Calibrate the printer after
replacing the DC controller. See Calibrate Now (HP Color
or
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
.
Repetitive defects troubleshooting
Defects on printer rollers can cause image defects to appear at regular intervals on the page. Use
the repetitive defects ruler on the next page ( Figure 7-3 Repetitive defects ruler (1 of 2)
) to measure the distance between defects that recur on a page. Use the
Table 7-38 Repetitive defect spacing
table to determine which roller is causing the defect. To resolve the problem, try cleaning the roller first. If the roller is still dirty after cleaning or if it is damaged, replace the indicated part.
CAUTION
Do not use solvents or oils to clean rollers. Instead, rub the roller with lint-free paper. If dirt is difficult to remove, rub the roller with lint-free paper that has been dampened with rubbing alcohol.
NOTE
The letter codes before certain roller names in
Table 7-38 Repetitive defect spacing
correspond to the letters at the top of the repetitive defects ruler in
Figure 7-3 Repetitive defects ruler (1 of 2)
. Not all rollers are shown in the ruler.
Defects on the cassette or the multipurpose-tray pickup roller cause defects only on the leading edge of the image.
Table 7-38
Repetitive defect spacing
Roller
A Toner charging roller
B Developing cylinder
C Primary charging roller
D Toner feed roller
E Media attaching roller
F Fuser pressure roller
G Photosensitive drum or transfer rollers
(center-to-center distance)
H Photosensitive drum
Distance
14 mm
33 mm
38 mm
39 mm
38 mm
63 mm
75 mm
94 mm
Type of defect
Defect on front of paper
Blank spots
Defect on front of paper
Poor fusing
Replacement part
Print cartridge
Print cartridge
Print cartridge
Print cartridge
ETB
Fuser
Any print cartridges that have a damaged photosensitive drum or the
ETB
Print cartridge
J Fuser sleeve
Cassette feed roller
Cassette feed sub roller
107 mm
54 mm
44 mm
Defect on front of paper
Blank spots
Poor fusing
Defect on front of paper
Defect on back of paper
Fuser
Cassette
Cassette
Image defects troubleshooting 359
Table 7-38
Repetitive defect spacing (continued)
Roller
Registration roller
Registration sub roller
Fuser delivery roller
Face-down delivery roller
Cassette pickup roller
Multipurpose-tray pickup roller
Distance Type of defect
54 mm
57 mm
38 mm
49 mm
Defect on back of paper
Defect on front of paper
Defect on back of paper
Defect on back of paper
See the note above this table Defect on front of paper
See the note above this table Defect on back of paper
Replacement part
Paper pickup assembly
Paper pickup assembly
Fuser
Fuser
Paper pickup rollers
Multipurpose-tray pickup roller assembly
360 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Figure 7-3
Repetitive defects ruler (1 of 2)
NOTE Figure 7-3 Repetitive defects ruler (1 of 2) might not print to scale and should only be
used as a reference tool.
Image defects troubleshooting 361
Figure 7-4
Repetitive defects ruler (2 of 2)
362 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Interface troubleshooting
Communications checks
NOTE
Communication problems are normally the customer's responsibility. Time spent attempting to resolve these problems might not be covered by the Hewlett-Packard Company warranty. Refer the customer to the network administrator for assistance in troubleshooting network problems.
If the printer is not connected to an MS-DOS-based host, proceed to the
Table 7-39 Communications check
table.
Table 7-39
Communications check
Check
Is your computer configured to the parameters that are described in the configuration instructions?
Action
These parameters are required in order to communicate with the printer. Verify that the configuration of the computer's communications port matches these parameters.
NOTE
If these parameters are not set correctly, an error message might appear on the control-panel display.
EIO troubleshooting (HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models only)
If the printer contains an optional HP Jetdirect print server, and you cannot communicate with the printer over the network, verify the operation of the print server. Print a configuration page. If the
Jetdirect card does not appear under "Installed personalities and options" on the configuration page, see the troubleshooting section of the HP Jetdirect Print Server Software Installation Guide.
If the host system and printer are still not communicating, replace the formatter PCA and the EIO card and reconfigure the printer. If the problem persists, a protocol analyzer might be needed in order to find the source of the problem.
CAUTION
HP LaserJet printers are not designed to work with mechanical switch-box products that do not offer the correct surge protection. These devices generate high transient voltages that cause permanent damage to the formatter PCA. This circumstance is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard Company warranty.
ENWW Interface troubleshooting 363
AUTOEXEC.BAT standard configurations
Parallel MS-DOS commands
Ensure that the AUTOEXEC.BAT file contains the following statements for parallel interface communications:
MODE LPT1: ,,P
For MS-DOS version 4.0 and above:
MODE LPT1: ,,B
NOTE
This example assumes that you are using parallel printer port LPT1. If you are using
LPT2 or LPT3, replace LPT1 in the example with the appropriate printer port.
Printer Job Language (PJL) commands
See the HP Printer Job Language Technical Reference Manual for a complete description of PJL commands. This manual is available with the HP PCL/PJL reference set on CD-ROM (part number
5021-0337).
@PJL [Enter]
This command enables the specified printer language. If the printer does not receive this command, it enables the default language. This ensures the correct operation for programs that do not support
PJL. The following is the command syntax:
@PJL [Enter] LANGUAGE = {PCL/PostScript} [<CR>] <LF>
UEL
This command (also referred to as the universal exit language command) terminates the current printer language and returns control to PJL. It performs the following actions:
■ Prints all data that was received before this command.
■ Performs a reset: <esc>E in PCL, <cntrl>D in PostScript.
■ Turns control over to PJL.
This command is also a valid HP-GL/2 terminator.
The UEL command must be immediately followed by the "@PJL" command prefix. Characters or control codes other than @PJL (such as <CR> or <LF>) enable the default language and process the print job in that language. All jobs must begin and end with the UEL command. In addition to starting PJL, the UEL command creates the same effect as the <esc>E command. However, the
<esc>E command should always be included to ensure backward compatibility.
@PJL COMMENT
This command designates the current line as a comment, which is ignored. The following is the command syntax:
@PJL COMMENT <words> [<CR>] <LF>
364 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
@PJL INFO CONFIG
This command solicits a response to describe the installed options and allows the printer to configure the installed options automatically to meet the program requirements.
@PJL INFO ID
This command identifies the printer type to the host for reference when selecting printer drivers for automatic installation. The following is the command syntax:
@PJL INFO ID <CR> <LF>
@PJL INFO USTATUS
This command queries the state of unsolicited JOB status. PAGE and TIMED status are not supported. The following is the command syntax:
@PJL INFO USTATUS <CR> <LF>
@PJL INFO PAGECOUNT
This command returns the number of pages that have been printed by the engine.
@PJL JOB
This command informs the printer of the start of a PJL job and synchronizes the job-status information. The printer counts print jobs, including nested jobs, incrementing the job counter for the
@PJL JOB command and decrementing it for @PJL EOJ.
The printer accepts the NAME= parameter and returns the name string in the unsolicited JOB start status message (if the unsolicited job status is enabled). The printer transmits the unsolicited JOB status message to every I/O channel that has enabled this function. The following is the message format:
@PJL USTATUS JOB <CR><LF>START<CR><LF>[NAME=<job name><CR><LF>]<FF>
The printer resets the nested job counter whenever it switches the source to a different I/O channel.
This prevents a corrupt job on one channel from disrupting the activities on another channel.
@PJL EOJ
This command identifies the end of a print job and is a hint for the I/O switching algorithm. The printer counts nested jobs and recognizes job boundaries when the counter decrements to zero. The printer ignores isolated EOJ commands. Each EOJ must be preceded by a JOB command.
@PJL ECHO
This printer supports the ECHO command, which transmits its parameters over the I/O channel to the host that issued the command.
@PJL USTATUS JOB=ON/OFF
This command enables or disables the JOB status for the I/O channel that delivers the command.
Interface troubleshooting 365
@PJL USTATUSOFF
This command disables the unsolicited JOB status for the I/O channel that delivered the command.
For this printer, it duplicates the function of @PJL USTATUS JOB=OFF, AND @PJL USTATUS
DEVICE=OFF.
NOTE
All commands that this printer's PJL command set does not support are returned with the message @PJL xxxx<CR><LF>?<CR><LF>.
366 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Control-panel troubleshooting
When you press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the menus, the high-level menus appear in the following order:
■ RETRIEVE JOB (this menu appears only if a hard disk is installed)
■
INFORMATION
■
PAPER HANDLING
■
CONFIGURE DEVICE
■
DIAGNOSTICS
■
SERVICE
A menu map shows how individual items are configured within each of these menus. Figure 7-5 HP
Color LaserJet 4600 models menu map shows a sample of one page of the menu map. The menu
map prints on six pages. The final page gives instructions about how to use the control-panel buttons.
Printing a menu map
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3
Press to select INFORMATION.
4
Press to highlight PRINT MENU MAP.
5
Press to select PRINT MENU MAP.
ENWW
Figure 7-5
HP Color LaserJet 4600 models menu map
Control-panel troubleshooting 367
Figure 7-6
HP Color LaserJet 4610n/4650 models menu map
368 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Information menu
Use the Information menu to gain access to and print specific printer information.
Table 7-40
Information menu
Menu item
PRINT MENU MAP
PRINT CONFIGURATION
PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS
SUPPLIES STATUS
PRINT USAGE
PRINT DEMO
PRINT RGB SAMPLES (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and
4650 models)
PRINT CMYK SAMPLES (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and
4650 models)
PRINT FILE DIRECTORY
PRINT PCL FONT LIST
PRINT PS FONT LIST
Description
Prints the control-panel menu map, which shows the layout of and current settings for the control-panel menu items.
Prints the printer configuration page. The configuration page shows the current printer configuration. If an HP Jetdirect print server is installed, an HP Jetdirect configuration page also prints.
Prints the estimated remaining life for the supplies; reports statistics for the total number of pages and jobs processed, print cartridge manufacture date, serial number, page counts, and maintenance information.
Shows the supplies status in a searchable list.
Prints a count of all media sizes that have passed through the printer; lists whether they were simplex, duplex, monochrome, or color; and reports the page count.
Prints a demonstration page.
Prints color samples for different RGB values. The samples act as a guide for color matching on the HP Color LaserJet
4650 models.
Prints color samples for different CMYK values. The samples act as a guide for color matching on the HP Color
LaserJet 4650 models.
Prints the name and directory of files that are stored in the printer on an optional hard disk.
Prints the available PCL fonts.
Prints the available PS (emulated PostScript) fonts.
Control-panel troubleshooting 369
Paper handling menu
Use the Paper handling menu to configure input trays by size and type. This menu can also be used to set default media size and type. It is important to configure the trays correctly with this menu before you print for the first time.
NOTE
If you have used previous HP LaserJet printers, you might be accustomed to configuring tray 1 to first mode or cassette mode. To mimic the settings for first mode, configure tray 1 for SIZE = ANY and TYPE = ANY. To mimic the settings for cassette mode, set either the size or type for tray 1 to a setting other than ANY.
Table 7-41
Paper handling menu
Menu item
TRAY 1 SIZE
TRAY 1 TYPE
Value
A list of available sizes appears.
A list of available types appears.
Description
Use this item to configure the media size for tray 1. The default value is ANY.
Use this item to configure the media type for tray 1. The default value is ANY.
Use this item to configure the media size for tray 2, tray 3, or tray 4. The default setting is the size that is detected by the guides in the tray. To use a custom size, move the switch in the tray to custom.
TRAY <N> SIZE
(N = 2, 3, or 4)
A list of available sizes appears.
NOTE
The HP Color
LaserJet 4610n printer does not support tray 3 or tray 3/ tray 4.
NOTE
A tray 4 setting is only available when the 2 x 500sheet feeder is used with the
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models.
TRAY <N> TYPE
(N = 2, 3, or 4)
A list of available types appears.
NOTE
The HP Color
LaserJet 4610n printer does not support tray 3 or tray 3/ tray 4.
NOTE
A tray 4 setting is only available when the 2 x 500sheet feeder is used with the
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models.
Use this item to configure the media type for tray 2, tray 3, or tray 4. The default is PLAIN.
370 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Configure device menu
The Configure device menu has several submenus. Use these submenus to change the printer's default printing settings, adjust the print quality, change the system configuration and I/O options, and reset the printer to its default settings.
Printing menu
The settings in the Printing menu affect only jobs that do not have identified properties. Most jobs identify all of the properties and override the values from this menu.
Table 7-42
Printing submenu
Menu item
COPIES
DEFAULT PAPER SIZE
DEFAULT CUSTOM PAPER SIZE
Values
1 to 32000
A list of available sizes appears.
Description
Use this item to set the default number of copies.
Use this item to set the default media size. This setting applies only to print jobs that do not have a paper size specified in the program or printer driver.
Use this item to set the default size for any job without dimensions.
DUPLEX
UNIT OF MEASURE x DIMENSION
Y DIMENSION
OFF
ON
Use this item to enable or disable the duplex function on models that have duplexing capability.
NOTE
This setting is not available for the HP Color
LaserJet 4610n printer.
DUPLEX BINDING
LONG EDGE
NOTE
This setting is not available for the HP Color
LaserJet 4610n printer.
OVERRIDE A4/LETTER
MANUAL FEED
COURIER FONT
SHORT EDGE
NO
YES
ON
OFF
REGULAR
DARK
This item appears only if the duplexer is installed and if DUPLEX is set to ON.
Use this item to specify which edge of the paper to use for binding duplex print jobs.
Use this item to set the printer to print an A4 job on letter-size paper when no
A4 paper is loaded.
Use this item to feed paper manually from tray 1, rather than automatically from a tray. If MANUAL FEED = ON and tray 1 is empty, the printer goes offline when it receives a print job.
MANUALLY FEED [PAPER SIZE]
appears on the printer control-panel display.
Use this item to select a version of the
Courier font.
REGULAR: The internal Courier font that is available on the HP LaserJet 4 series printers.
Control-panel troubleshooting 371
372
Table 7-42
Printing submenu (continued)
Menu item Values
WIDE A4
NO
YES
PRINT PS ERRORS
OFF
ON
PRINT PDF ERRORS
(HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models only)
OFF
ON
PCL
FORM LENGTH
ORIENTATION
FONT SOURCE
FONT NUMBER
FONT PITCH
SYMBOL SET
APPEND CR TO LF
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
Description
DARK: The internal Courier font that is available on the HP LaserJet III series printers.
Use this item to change the number of characters that can be printed on a single line of A4-size paper.
NO: Up to 78 10-pitch characters can be printed on one line.
YES: Up to 80 10-pitch characters can be printed on one line.
Use this item to select whether to print
PostScript (PS) error pages.
OFF: PS error page never prints.
ON: PS error page prints when PS errors occur.
Use this item to select whether to print
PDF error pages.
OFF: PDF error page never prints.
ON: PDF error page prints when PDF errors occur.
Use this item to configure settings for the printer control language.
FORM LENGTH: Use this item to set vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for the default paper size.
ORIENTATION: Use this item to set the default page orientation to portrait or landscape.
FONT SOURCE: Use this item to select the font source as Internal;
CARD SLOT 1, 2, or 3; Internal disk, or EIO disk.
FONT NUMBER: The printer assigns a number to each font and lists the numbers on the PCL font list. The range is 0 to 999.
FONT PITCH: Use this item to select the font pitch. This item might not appear, depending on the font selected. The range is 0.44 to 99.99.
SYMBOL SET: Use this item to select any one of several available symbol sets at the printer control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font. PC-8 or
PC-850 is recommended for line-draw characters.
ENWW
Table 7-42
Printing submenu (continued)
Menu item Values Description
APPEND CR TO LF: Select YES to append a carriage return to each linefeed that is encountered in backwardcompatible PCL jobs (pure text, no job control). Some environments, such as
UNIX, indicate a new line using only the line-feed control code. Use this option append the required carriage return to each line-feed.
ENWW Control-panel troubleshooting 373
Print quality menu
Use the Print quality menu to adjust all aspects of print quality, including calibration, registration, and color halftone settings.
Table 7-43
Print quality submenu
Menu item
ADJUST COLOR
SET REGISTRATION
NOTE
A tray 4 setting is only available when the 2 x 500sheet feeder is used with the
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models.
Values
CYAN DENSITY
MAGENTA DENSITY
YELLOW DENSITY
BLACK DENSITY
RESTORE COLOR VALUES
PRINT TEST PAGE SOURCE
ADJUST TRAY [N]
Description
Use this item to modify the halftone settings for each color.
Use this item to shift the margin alignment in order to center the image on the page from top to bottom, and left to right. You can also align the image that is printed on the front with the image that is printed on the back.
PRINT TEST PAGE: Use this item to print a test page that shows the current registration settings.
SOURCE: Use this item to select the tray for which you want to print the test page. If installed, optional trays appear as selections, where [N] is the number of the tray.
ADJUST TRAY N: Use this item to set the registration for the specified tray, where [N] is the number of the tray. A selection appears for each tray that is installed, and registration must be set for each tray.
■ X1 SHIFT: Registration of the image on the paper from side to side, as the paper lies in the tray.
For duplexing, this side is the second side (back) of the paper.
■ X2 SHIFT: Registration of the image on the paper from side to side, as the paper lies in the tray, for the first side (front) of a duplexed page. This item appears only if a duplexer is installed and enabled. Set the X1 SHIFT first.
■ Y SHIFT: Registration of the image on the paper from top to bottom as the paper lies in the tray.
PRINT MODES
A list of available modes appears.
Change the print mode only if you are experiencing problems printing on
374 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-43
Print quality submenu (continued)
Menu item
OPTIMIZE
Values
REDUCE (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models only)
BACKGROUND
TRANSFER
TRANSPARENCY (HP Color LaserJet
4610n and 4650 models only)
FUSER WARMUP (HP Color
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models only)
MEDIA TYPE (HP Color
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models only)
RESTORE OPTIMIZE
TRAY 1 (HP Color
LaserJet 4610n/4650 models only)
Description
certain media types. After you select a type of media, you can select a print mode that is available for that type.
Use this item to optimize certain parameters for all jobs rather than optimizing by media type.
CALIBRATE NOW (HP LaserJet 4600 models)
QUICK CALIBRATE NOW
(HP LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models only)
FULL CALIBRATE NOW
(HP LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models only)
Use this item to perform all printer calibrations: D-Max, D-Half, color plane registration, and drum-phase adjustment.
Use this item to perform a partial printer calibration (D-Max and D-Half) used for color-tone correction.
Use this item to perform a full printer calibration which includes D-max, D-
Half, drum-phase calibration, and colorplane registration.
Control-panel troubleshooting 375
System setup menu
The System setup menu allows you to make changes to general printer configuration default settings such as PowerSave Time, printer personality (language), and jam recovery.
Table 7-44
System setup submenu
Menu item
JOB STORAGE LIMIT
JOB HELD TIMEOUT
Values
1 to 100
Description
Sets the limit for the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the hard disk at the printer.
Sets the period of time that the system keeps files in job storage before deleting them from the queue.
SHOW ADDRESS
(HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
OFF
1 HOUR
4 HOURS
1 DAY
1 WEEK
AUTO
OFF
COLOR/BLACK MIX =
AUTO
MOSTLY COLOR PAGES
MOSTLY BLACK PAGES
This item determines whether the printer's IP address is shown on the display with the Ready message. If more than one EIO card is installed, the IP address of the card in the first slot is shown. The default is off.
This menu item establishes how the printer switches from color to monochrome (black and white) mode for maximum performance and print cartridge life.
AUTO will determine the mode the engine will enter based on the first page of a print job. If the first page is monochrome, the engine will enter mono mode until a color page is detected. It will then continue in color mode until the end of the job. If the first page is in color, the engine will enter color mode for the duration of the job.
Select MOSTLY COLOR PAGES if nearly all of your print jobs are color with high page coverage. This will cause the engine to always run in color mode, even if the whole job is in monochrome.
Select MOSTLY BLACK PAGES if you print mostly monochrome print jobs, or a combination of color and monochrome print jobs. This will cause the engine to switch back and forth between color and monochrome mode.
If the first page is monochrome, the engine will enter mono mode until a color page is detected. It will then enter color mode. If 3 consecutive monochrome pages are detected, the
376 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-44
System setup submenu (continued)
Menu item
TRAY BEHAVIOR
POWERSAVE TIME
Values
USE REQUESTED TRAY
MANUALLY FEED PROMPT
PS DEFER MEDIA
Settings depend on the printer model.
Description
engine will switch back to monochrome mode again. If the first page is color, the engine will enter color mode until 3 consecutive monochrome pages are detected, at which point it will switch back to monochrome mode again.
Use this item to specify settings for the tray-selection behavior. (Use this setting to configure the trays to behave like trays in some legacy HP printers, and to configure two-sided printing behavior for preprinted forms and letterhead.)
USE REQUESTED TRAY: Determines whether the printer tries to pull paper from a tray other than the one that you selected in the printer driver.
■ EXCLUSIVELY: Sets the printer to pull paper only from the tray that you selected and not to pull from another tray automatically if the tray that you selected is empty.
■ FIRST: Sets the printer to pull from the tray that you selected first, but allows the printer to pull from another tray automatically if the tray that you selected is empty.
The default for USE REQUESTED
TRAY is EXCLUSIVELY.
MANUALLY FEED PROMPT:
Determines when the printer shows a prompt about pulling from tray 1 if the print job does not match the type or size that is loaded in any other tray.
■ ALWAYS: Select this option if the user always wants to be prompted before the printer pulls from tray 1.
■ UNLESS LOADED: Prompts only if tray 1 is empty.
The default for MANUALLY FEED
PROMPT is ALWAYS.
PS DEFER MEDIA affects how paper is handled when printing from an
Adobe
®
PS print driver. ENABLED uses HP's paper handling. DISABLED uses the Adobe PS paper handling.
The default is ENABLED.
Reduces power consumption when the printer has been inactive for the period of time specified by this item in order to reduce wear on the electronic
Control-panel troubleshooting 377
Table 7-44
System setup submenu (continued)
Menu item
PERSONALITY
CLEARABLE WARNINGS
AUTO CONTINUE
SUPPLIES LOW
COLOR SUPPLY LOW
JOB STORAGE LIMIT
Values
AUTO
PCL
PS
PDF (HP Color LaserJet 4610n/4650 models only)
MIME (HP Color LaserJet 4610n/4650 models only)
ON
JOB
ON
OFF
CONTINUE
STOP
AUTOCONTINUE BLACK
STOP
1 to 100
Description
components in the printer. The printer automatically comes out of PowerSave mode when a job is sent to the printer.
Sets the default personality to automatic switching, PCL, PDF, or
PostScript emulation.
Sets whether a warning is cleared on the control panel or when another job is sent.
ON: The clearable warning message appears until you press .
JOB: The clearable warning message appears until the end of the job that generated the message.
The default is JOB.
Determines printer behavior when the system generates an auto-continuable error.
ON: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the message appears on the printer control-panel display, and the printer goes offline for 10 seconds before returning online.
OFF: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the message remains on the printer control-panel display, and the printer remains offline until you press
.
The default is ON.
Sets low supplies reporting options.
Sets the COLOR SUPPLY OUT printer behavior. When a color supply is empty and the printer is set to
AUTOCONTINUE BLACK, the printer will continue printing using black toner only.
Sets the limit for the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the hard disk at the printer.
378 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Table 7-44
System setup submenu (continued)
Menu item
JAM RECOVERY
LANGUAGE
Values
AUTO
ON
OFF
A list of available languages appears.
Description
Use this item to sets whether the printer attempts to reprint pages after a jam.
AUTO: The printer automatically selects the best mode for printer-jam recovery (usually ON).
ON: The printer automatically reprints pages after a jam is cleared.
OFF: The printer does not reprint pages following a jam. Printing performance might be increased with this setting.
The default setting is AUTO.
Sets the default language.
ENWW Control-panel troubleshooting 379
I/O menu
Use the I/O menu to configure the printer I/O options.
Table 7-45
I/O submenu
Menu item
I/O TIMEOUT
Values
5 to 300
PARALLEL INPUT
EIO x
(Where x=1, 2, or 3.)
(HP Color LaserJet 4600/4650 only)
HIGH SPEED
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS
The following are the possible values:
NOVELL
DCL/LLC
IPX/SPX
TCP/IP
APPLETALK
Description
Use this item to select the I/O timeout in seconds.
Use this item to select the speed at which the parallel port communicates with the host, and to enable or disable the bidirectional parallel communication.
HIGH SPEED: Select YES to enable the printer to accept the faster parallel communications that are used for connections with newer computers.
The default for HIGH SPEED is YES.
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS: Turn the bidirectional parallel communication on or off. The default is set for a bidirectional parallel port (IEEE-1284).
The function allows the printer to send status readback messages to the computer. (Turning on the advanced parallel functions might slow language switching.) The default for ADVANCED
FUNCTIONS is ON.
Use this item to configure the EIO devices installed in slot 1, 2, or 3.
380 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Resets menu
Use the Resets menu to reset factory settings, disable and enable PowerSave, and update the printer after new supplies are installed.
Table 7-46
Resets menu
Menu item
RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS
Values
None
POWERSAVE
Description
Use this item to clear the page buffer, remove all perishable personality data, reset the printing environment, and return all default settings to factory defaults.
Use this item to enable and disable
PowerSave.
RESET SUPPLIES
ON
OFF
NEW TRANSFER KIT
NEW FUSER KIT
Use this item to inform the printer that a new transfer kit or new fuser kit has been installed.
ENWW Control-panel troubleshooting 381
Diagnostics menu
Use the Diagnostics menu to run tests that can help you identify and solve problems with the printer.
Table 7-47
Diagnostics menu
Menu item
PRINT EVENT LOG
SHOW EVENT LOG
PQ TROUBLESHOOTING
DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK
Paper Path SENSOR TEST
(HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models only)
PAPER PATH TEST
SENSOR TEST
MANUAL SENSOR TEST
COMPONENT TEST
PRINT/STOP TEST
COLOR BAND TEST
(HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models only)
Description
Prints an event log that shows the last 50 entries in the printer event log, starting with the most recent.
Shows the last 50 events on the control-panel display, starting with the most recent.
Prints a series of print-quality assessment pages that help troubleshoot any print-quality problems.
Use this item to remove a print cartridge to help determine which cartridge is the source of the problem.
Use this item to perform a test on each of the printer sensors to determine if they are working correctly and displays the status of each sensor.
Use this item to generate a test page that is useful for testing the paper-handling features of the printer.
In the PAPER PATH TEST menu, select the source (tray), duplex setting, and number of copies, and then select
PRINT TEST PAGE. Press to start the paper-path test.
SOURCE: Select the tray that uses the paper path that you want to test. You can select any tray that is installed. Select
ALL TRAYS to test all paper paths. Paper must be loaded in the selected trays.
COPIES: Set how many sheets of paper are used from each tray during the paper-path test.
Use this item to test the paper-path sensors and switches for correct operation.
Use this item to manually test the sensors and switches for correct operation.
Activates individual parts independently to isolate noise, leaking, and other hardware issues.
Isolates print-quality faults more accurately by stopping the printer in mid print cycle. Stopping the printer in mid-cycle allows you to see where the image begins to degrade.
Use this item to print a color band test page that is used to identify arching in the high-voltage power supply.
382 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Service menu
The Service menu is PIN-protected for added security. Only authorized service people have access to the service menu. When you select SERVICE from the list of menus, you are prompted to type an eight-digit PIN number. The PIN for HP Color LaserJet 4600 models is 04460002. The PIN for
HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models is 05465004.
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight SERVICE.
3
Press to select SERVICE.
4
Press or until the first digit of the PIN appears.
5
Press to save the digit. The control-panel display replaces the digit with an asterisk.
6
Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have typed all eight digits.
7
Press at any time to move to the previous digit.
Use the Service menu to reset counts, clear the event log, specify the serial number, specify the date the printer was first used, and reset the default paper size.
Table 7-48
Service menu
Menu item
CLEAR EVENT LOG
Values
Range: 0 to 9999999
Description
Use this item to clear the printer's internal event log
Total mono pages printed
TOTAL MONO PAGES
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
TOTAL COLOR PAGES
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
REFURBISH PAGE COUNT
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models)
TOTAL PAGE COUNT
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Range: 0 to 9999999
Range: 0 to 9999999
Range: 0 to 9999999
Total color pages printed
Factory service setting.
TRANSFER KIT COUNT
FUSER KIT COUNT
Range: 0 to 9999999
(120,000 is the maximum number of pages the transfer unit can print)
Range: 0 to 9999999
(150,000 is the maximum number of pages the fuser can print)
Use this item to reset the page count after replacing the formatter. The page count should reflect the number of pages printed on the print engine rather than the formatter.
Use this item to reset the page count of the current transfer unit if the value is lost. This item automatically resets to zero when the transfer unit is replaced and the user selects to reset the transfer count.
Use this item to reset the page count of the current fuser if the value is lost.
This item automatically resets to zero when the fuser is replaced and the user selects the to reset the fuser count.
Control-panel troubleshooting 383
Table 7-48
Service menu (continued)
Menu item
SERIAL NUMBER
SERVICE ID
COLD RESET PAPER
Values Description
A 10-digit number that varies by printer.
Use this item to update the serial number if you replace the formatter.
YYDD If you replace the formatter, use this item to set the date to the date that the printer was first used, rather than the date that the new formatter was installed.
LETTER
A4
If the customer uses default paper size of A4 (used in Europe), use this item to reset the default if you replace the formatter.
384 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Tools for troubleshooting
Embedded Web server (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models only)
When the printer is directly connected to a computer, the embedded Web server is supported for
Windows 95 and later. In order to use the embedded Web server with a direct connection, you must select the Custom installation option when you install the printer driver. Select the option to load
Printer Status and Alerts. The proxy server is installed as part of the Printer Status and Alerts software.
When the printer is connected to the network, the embedded Web server is automatically available.
You can gain access to the embedded Web server from Windows 95 and later.
Use the embedded Web server to view printer and network status and to manage printing functions from your computer instead of from the printer control panel. The following are are examples of what you can do when you are using the embedded Web server:
■ View printer control-status information
■ Set the type of media that is loaded in each tray
■ Determine the remaining life of all supplies and order new ones
■ View and change tray configurations
■ View and change the printer control-panel menu configuration
■ View and print internal pages
■ Receive notification of printer and supplies events
■ View and change the network configuration
To use the embedded Web server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 or late or Netscape
Navigator 4 or later. The embedded Web server works when the printer is connected to an IP-based network. The embedded Web server does not support IPX-based printer connections. You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server.
To open the embedded Web server
In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the IP address for the printer. (To find the IP address, print a configuration page.)
NOTE
After you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future.
1
The embedded Web server has three tabs that contain settings and information about the printer: the Information tab, the Settings tab, and the Network tab. Click the tab that you want to view.
2
See the following sections for more information about each tab.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 385
Information tab
The Information pages group consists of the following screens:
■ Device Status. Shows the printer status and the life remaining for HP supplies, with 0% representing that a supply is empty. The page also shows the type and size of print media that is set for each tray. To change the default settings, click Change Settings.
■ Configuration page. Shows the information that is also found on the printer configuration page.
■ Supplies Status. Shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0% representing that a supply is empty. This screen also provides supplies part numbers. To order new supplies, click Order
Supplies in the Other Links area on the left side of the window. To visit any Web site, you must have Internet access.
■ Event log. Shows a list of all printer events and errors.
■ Usage page. Shows a summary of the number of pages that the printer has printed, grouped by size and type.
■ Device Information. Shows the printer network name, address, and model information. To change these entries, click Device Information on the Settings tab.
Settings tab
Use this tab to configure the printer from your computer. The Settings tab can be password protected. If this printer is networked, always consult with the printer administrator before changing settings on this tab.
The Settings tab contains the following screens.
■ Configure Device. Use this screen to configure all printer. This screen contains the traditional menus that are found on printers that use a control-panel display: Information, Paper Handling,
Configure Device, and Diagnostics.
■ Alerts. For networks only. Use this screen to set up e-mail alerts for various printer and supplies events.
■ E-mail. For networks only. Use this screen in conjunction with the Alerts screen to set up incoming and outgoing e-mail, as well as to set e-mail alerts.
■ Security. Use this screen to set a password that must be typed in order to gain access to the
Settings and Networking tabs. Enable and disable certain features of the EWS.
■ Other Links. Use this screen to add or customize a link to another Web site. The created link appears in the Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages. The following permanent links always appear in the Other Links area: HP Instant Support, Order Supplies, and
Product Support.
■ Device Information. Use this screen to name the printer and assign an asset number to it. Type the name and e-mail address for the primary contact who will receive information about the printer.
■ Language. Use this screen to specify the language in which the embedded Web server information appears.
386 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Networking tab
The network administrator can use this tab allows to control network-related settings for the printer when it is connected to an IP-based network. This tab will not appear if the printer is directly connected to a computer, or if the printer is connected to a network with anything other than an HP
Jetdirect print server card.
Other links
This section contains links that connect you to the Internet. You must have Internet access in order to use any of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and did not connect when you first opened the embedded Web server, you must connect before you can visit these Web sites. Connecting might require that you close the embedded Web server and reopen it.
■ HP Instant Support connects you to the HP Web site to help you find solutions. This service analyzes your printer error log and configuration information to provide diagnostic and support information that is specific to your printer.
■ Order Supplies connects to the HP Web site where you can order genuine HP supplies, such as print cartridges and paper.
■ Product Support connects to the support site for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer, where you can search for help regarding general topics.
Printer Status and Alerts software
Printer Status and Alerts is supported only for Windows 95 and later versions.
The Printer Status and Alerts software is available to users of both networked and directly connected printers. To use Printer Status and Alerts software with a directly connected computer, you must select the Custom installation option when you install the printer driver. Select the option to install
Printer Status and Alerts. For network connections, Printer Status and Alerts is installed automatically with the Typical software installation option.
Use this software to view the embedded Web server information for a particular printer. The software also generates messages on the computer that provide the status of the printer and print jobs.
Depending on how the printer is connected, you can receive different messages.
■ Networked printers. You can receive regular job-status messages that appear every time a print job is sent to the printer or every time the print job finishes printing. You can also receive alerts messages. These messages appear when you are printing to a particular printer if that printer experiences a problem. In some cases, the printer can continue to print (such as when a tray that is not being used is open, or a print cartridge is low). In other cases, a problem might prevent the printer from printing (such as when the media is out, or a print cartridge is empty).
■ Directly connected printers. You can receive alerts messages that appear when the printer experiences a problem but can continue printing or a problem that prevents it from printing. You can also receive messages that indicate that the print cartridge is low.
You can set alert options for a single printer that supports Printer Status and Alerts, or you can set alert options for all printers that support Printer Status and Alerts. For networked printers, these alerts only appear for your jobs.
Note that even if you are setting alert options for all printers, not all of the options that you select will apply to all printers. For example, when selecting the option to notify you when the print cartridges are low, directly connected printers that support Printer Status and Alerts will generate a message
Tools for troubleshooting 387
when the print cartridges are low. However, none of the networked printers will generate this message unless it affects a user-specific job.
To specify which status messages appear
1
Open Printer Status and Alerts in one of these ways:
● Double-click the Printer Status and Alerts tray icon, which is near the clock in the Tray
Manager.
● On the Start menu, point to Programs, point to Printer Status and Alerts, and click Printer
Status and Alerts.
2
Click the Options icon in the left pane.
3
In the For field, select the printer driver for this printer, or select All Printers.
4
Clear the options for the messages that you do not want to appear, and select the options for the messages that you do want to appear.
5
In Status check rate, select how frequently you want the software to update the printer status information that the software uses to generate the messages. Status Check Rate might not be available if the printer administrator has restricted the rights to this function.
To view status messages and information
On the left side of the window, select the printer for which you want to see information. The information that is provided includes status messages, supplies status, and printer capabilities. You can also click the Job History (clock) icon at the top of the window to view a list of previous jobs that were sent to the printer from your computer.
Printer information pages
From the control panel, you can print pages that give details about the printer and its current configuration.
Menu map
The menu map shows the layout of the printer menus and current printer settings. This can help you restore any user configured-settings after the printer is serviced.
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3
Press to select INFORMATION.
4
Press to highlight PRINT MENU MAP.
5
Press to select PRINT MENU MAP.
388 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Configuration page
Use the configuration page to view current printer settings, to help troubleshoot printer problems, or to verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and printer languages.
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3
Press to select INFORMATION.
4
Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION.
5
Press to select PRINT CONFIGURATION.
The message PRINTING... CONFIGURATION appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the configuration page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the configuration page.
NOTE
If the printer is configured with EIO cards (for example, an HP Jetdirect Print Server) or an optional hard-disk drive, an additional configuration page will print that provides information about those devices.
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 389
Figure 7-7
Printer configuration page (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
3
4
5
6
1
2
Printer information
Event log
Installed personalities and options
Memory
Security
Trays and options
390 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Figure 7-8
HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 model configuration page
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Printer information
Event log
Installed personalities and options
Calibration information
Color density
Memory
Security
Trays and options
Tools for troubleshooting 391
Supplies status page
The supplies status page illustrates the remaining life for the following printer supplies:
■ Print cartridges (all colors)
■ Transfer unit
■ Fuser
To print the supplies status page:
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3
Press to select INFORMATION.
4
Press to highlight PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS.
5
Press to select PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS.
The message PRINTING... SUPPLIES STATUS appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the supplies status page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the supplies status page.
NOTE
If you are using non-HP supplies, the supplies status page will not show the remaining life for the supplies. The supplies status page for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 and
4610n models contains the same supplies information as the page shown in
Supplies status page (HP Color LaserJet 4610n/4650 model is shown)
.
Figure 7-9
Supplies status page (HP Color LaserJet 4610n/4650 model is shown)
1
2
Black print cartridge information
Cyan print cartridge information
392 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
5
6
3
4
Magenta print cartridge information
Yellow print cartridge information
Image transfer kit (ETB) information
Image fuser kit information
ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 393
Usage page
The usage page lists a page count for each size of media that has passed through the printer. This page count includes the number of pages that were printed on one side, the number that were printed on two sides (duplexed), and totals of the two printing methods for each media size. It also lists the average percentage of page coverage for each color.
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3
Press to select INFORMATION.
4
Press to highlight PRINT USAGE.
5
Press to select PRINT USAGE.
The message PRINTING... USAGE appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the usage page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the usage page.
Figure 7-10
Usage page (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
1
2
3
Printer identification information
Usage totals
Historical printer coverage by color
394 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Figure 7-11
Usage page (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
1
2
3
4
Printer identification information
Usage totals
Print modes and paper path usage
Historical printer coverage by color
Demo page
The printer can produce a print-quality demonstration page.
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3
Press to select INFORMATION.
4
Press to highlight PRINT DEMO.
5
Press to select PRINT DEMO.
The message PRINTING... DEMO appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the demo page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the demo page.
Tools for troubleshooting 395
File directory page
The file directory page lists the files and directories that are stored in printer memory or on the hard drive (not all printer models come with a hard drive).
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3
Press to select INFORMATION.
4
Press to highlight PRINT FILE DIRECTORY.
5
Press to select PRINT FILE DIRECTORY.
The message PRINTING... FILE DIRECTORY appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the file directory page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the file directory page.
NOTE
The file directory page for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4610n models contains
the same file directory page information as the page shown in Figure 7-12 File directory page
(HP Color LaserJet 4650 models is shown) .
Figure 7-12
File directory page (HP Color LaserJet 4650 models is shown)
PCL font list page
The PCL font list page list the PCL fonts that are available on the printer.
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3
Press to select INFORMATION.
396 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
4
Press to highlight PRINT PCL FONT LIST.
5
Press to select PRINT PCL FONT LIST.
The message PRINTING... PCL FONT LIST appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the PCL fonts list page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the PCL font list page.
NOTE
The PCL font list page for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4610n models contains the same PCL font list page information as the page shown in
Figure 7-13 PCL font list page
(HP Color LaserJet 4610n/4650 models is shown) .
Figure 7-13
PCL font list page (HP Color LaserJet 4610n/4650 models is shown)
Tools for troubleshooting 397
PS font list page
The PS font list page list the PS fonts (emulated PostScript) that are available on the printer.
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3
Press to select INFORMATION.
4
Press to highlight PRINT PS FONT LIST.
5
Press to select PRINT PS FONT LIST.
The message PRINTING... PS FONT LIST appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the PS fonts list page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the PS font list page.
NOTE
The PS font list page for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models contains the same PS font list page information as the page shown in
Figure 7-14 PS font list page .
Figure 7-14
PS font list page
RGB samples page (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
The RGB samples page is used for RGB color matching on the HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models.
1
Press MENU to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3
Press to select INFORMATION.
398 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
4
Press to highlight PRINT RGB SAMPLES.
5
Press to select PRINT RGB SAMPLES.
The message PRINTING... RGB SAMPLES appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the RGB samples page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the
RGB samples page.
Figure 7-15
RGB samples page (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
CMYK samples page (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 only)
The CMYK samples page is used for CMYK color matching on the HP Color LaserJet 4610n and
4650 models.
1
Press MENU to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3
Press to select INFORMATION.
4
Press to highlight PRINT CMYK SAMPLES.
5
Press to select PRINT CMYK SAMPLES.
The message PRINTING... CMYK SAMPLES appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the CMYK samples page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the
CMYK samples page.
ENWW
Figure 7-16
CMYK samples page (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
Tools for troubleshooting 399
Diagnostics
LED diagnostics
Use the following procedure to help identify the cause of high-level printer problems. These problems are indicated by abnormalities in the printer's power-on sequence. The LED that the procedure refers to is on the formatter (callout 1). This is a “heartbeat” LED that blinks on and off when the formatter is
operating correctly. Use Figure 7-17 HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series formatters to locate the
formatter LED.
1 Does the LED blink with four fast burst at power on? If no, then perform the following checks.
● Check the firmware.
● Check the memory.
● Check the formatter.
2 Does the LED blink at a fast, steady rate during memory testing (one blink per 8 MB)? If no, then perform the following checks.
● Check the control-panel display for an error code.
● Check the memory.
● Check the formatter.
3 Is the LED off for about eight seconds, while the boot code is decompressing, before the display turns on? If no, then perform the following checks.
● Check the firmware.
● Check the control-panel display for correct connections and operation.
● Check the control-panel display for an error code.
4 Does the LED blink at a steady rate of one blink per second? If no, then perform the following checks.
● Check the firmware.
● Check the formatter.
● Check the control-panel display for an error code.
5 If the control-panel display does not illuminate, perform an engine test to check the engine. You must have paper loaded in tray 2 for the engine test.
400 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
HP CLJ 4600
HP CLJ 4610n
HP CLJ 4650
ENWW
Formatter LED location
Figure 7-17
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series formatters
Engine diagnostics
This section provides an overview of the engine diagnostics that are available in the HP Color
LaserJet 4600 Series printer. The printer contains extensive internal diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print-quality, paper-path, noise, component, and timing issues.
Diagnostics mode
Some of the diagnostic tests automatically put the printer into a special diagnostics mode. During the special diagnostics mode the printer can perform actions that would normally cause the printer to enter an error state. Always follow the control-panel directions in the Diagnostic menu to exit the special diagnostics mode correctly and return the printer to a normal state.
Diagnostics that put the engine into the special diagnostics mode
Four diagnostic tests put the engine into a special state:
■ Disable cartridge check
■ Sensor test
■ Manual sensor test
■ Component test
While the printer is in the special diagnostics mode, the following message should appear:
READY DIAGNOSTICS MODE
TO EXIT PRESS CANCEL JOB KEY (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
TO EXIT PRESS STOP KEY (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
Diagnostics 401
When the printer is in the special diagnostics mode, these four tests appear in the menu and are available. To gain access to other diagnostic tests or to leave the diagnostic mode, press C
ANCEL
J
OB
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or S
TOP
(HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) button, and then select Exit. The printer will reset itself, and then return to the normal state.
NOTE
You need to have a good understanding of how the printer operates in order to use the engine diagnostics successfully. Before proceeding with these diagnostic tests, make sure that you understand the information in chapter 5 of this manual.
Diagnostic tests
Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For component or noise isolation, you can run the diagnostic test after removing the covers. Removing the covers provides a better view of the areas that are being tested. To operate the printer with the covers removed, the door switch
(SW4, callout 1) lever must be depressed (this is the door-closed position) and you must depress the
ETB connector (callout 2) after closing the ETB.
WARNING!
Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service personnel should open and run the diagnostics with the covers removed.
Never touch any of the power supplies when the printer is turned on.
Figure 7-18
Door switch and ETB connector
NOTE
Any time a cartridge is installed or removed while the covers are removed, the door interlock must be cycled to simulate opening and closing the top cover in order for the engine to recognize the change. The ETB must be closed and its connector must be depressed before cycling the door switch, or the printer will generate a 59.90 Printer Error. When the covers are installed, the door switch and ETB connector are automatically operated. When the covers are removed, you must perform these steps manually.
402 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Individual diagnostic tests
The following sections explain in more detail how to operate the various diagnostics correctly.
Print the event log page
The event log lists the printer events, including jams, service errors, and other printer conditions.
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3
Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4
Press to highlight PRINT EVENT LOG.
5
Press to select PRINT EVENT LOG.
The message PRINTING... EVENT LOG appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the event log. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the event log.
View the event log on the control-panel display
The show event log lists the last 50 printer events on the control-panel display. (The most recent event is listed first).
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3
Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4
Press to highlight SHOW EVENT LOG.
5
Press to select SHOW EVENT LOG.
Print the PQ troubleshooting pages
The PQ troubleshooting pages are a series of print-quality assessment pages that you can use to troubleshoot print-quality problems. Follow the instructions on page one of the PQ troubleshooting pages to solve print-quality problems.
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3
Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4
Press to highlight PQ TROUBLESHOOTING.
5
Press to select PQ TROUBLESHOOTING.
The message PRINTING... PQ TROUBLESHOOTING appears on the control-panel display until the printer finishes printing the PQ troubleshooting pages. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the PQ troubleshooting pages.
Diagnostics 403
Disable cartridge check (special mode test)
Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the printer when one or more print cartridges are removed or exchanged. Because the cartridges are not keyed, the diagnostic test can be run when one to four cartridges have been removed or moved to another location (exchanged). Consumable supply errors are ignored while the printer is in this mode. When the printer is in this mode, you can navigate the menus and print internal pages or send an external print job to the printer. This diagnostic test can be used to isolate print-quality problems that are related to individual cartridges and to isolate individual cartridge problems, such as noise.
NOTE
Do not remove or exchange cartridges before you start the disable cartridge check diagnostic. After starting the test, you can remove or exchange cartridges.
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3
Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4
Press to highlight DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK.
5
Press to select DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK.
To exit this diagnostic test, press the C
ANCEL
J
OB
button (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or S
TOP
(HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) and then select Exit diagnostics.
Paper path sensor test (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
This test displays the status of each paper path sensor.
1
Press MENU to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3
Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4
Press to highlight PAPER PATH SENSOR TEST.
5
Press to select PAPER PATH SENSOR TEST.
6
The printer displays a message that has a row of letters followed by a row of numbers. Each letter corresponds with the number that is directly below it. The letters represent a sensor in the paper path, and the numerials indicate the status of the sensor. The numerial “0” indicates that
NOTE
The number of alpha and numeric characters varies according to the number of trays that are installed.
7
To exit the test, press S
TOP
.
8
The message NO JOB TO CANCEL appears, and the printer enters the READY DIAGNOSTICS mode. To exit, press S
TOP
.
404 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
9
The DIAGNOSTICS menu appears on the control-panel display. Press to highlight EXIT
DIAGNOSTICS.
10
Press to select EXIT DIAGNOSTICS.
11
The message WAITING FOR PRINTER TO RE-INITIALIZE appears. The printer returns to the
Ready state after initialization is complete.
Paper-path test
This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of jams.
To isolate a problem, you can specify which input tray to use, specify whether to use the duplex path, and specify the number of copies to print. Multiple copies can be printed to help isolate intermittent problems. The following options become available after you start the diagnostic feature:
■ Print test page. Run the paper path test from the default settings: tray 2, no duplex, and one copy. To specify other settings, scroll down the menu and select the setting, and then scroll back up and select PRINT TEST PAGE to start the test.
■ Source. Select tray 1, tray 2, tray 3 (if the single 500-sheet paper feeder or the 2 x 500-sheet feeder is installed), or tray 4 ( if the 2 x 500-sheet feeder is installed).
NOTE
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n does not support tray 3 or tray 3/4.
■ Duplex. Enable or disable 2-sided printing. (HP Color LaserJet 4600 and 4650 models only.)
■ Copies. Set the numbers of copies to be printed; the choices are 1,10, 50, 100, or 500.
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3
Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4
Press to highlight PAPER PATH TEST.
5
Press
to select PAPER PATH TEST.
6
Select the paper path test options when the printer prompts you.
Sensor Test (special mode test)
Use this diagnostic test to test the printer sensors and switches. Each sensor is represented by a letter and number on the control-panel display. See
Table 7-50 Sensor-test letter codes for a
definition of the sensor letter codes. A 1 below the letter indicates that paper is present. For the paper size sensor, the range of values is from 0 to 7.
(the tray 3, or tray 4 paper size switches for the single 500-sheet feeder and the 2 x 500-sheet feeder are similar to the tray 2 switch).
Diagnostics 405
NOTE
The HP Color LaserJet 4610n does not support tray 3 or tray 3/tray 4. To eliminate the flickering on the control-panel display during this test, you can leave the door switch in the open state.
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3
Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4
Press to highlight SENSOR TEST.
5
Press to select SENSOR TEST.
To exit this diagnostic, press the C
ANCEL
J
OB
button (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or S
TOP
(HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) and then select Exit diagnostics.
Menus cannot be opened during component tests, so serves the same function as C
ANCEL
J
OB
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or S
TOP
(HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models).
Figure 7-19
Tray 2 paper size-switch arrangement
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
Table 7-49
Tray 2 paper-size codes
Size code
0
Switch state
SW1
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
SW2
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
SW3
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Paper size
Custom (see note below)
Letter
A5
Legal
B5 (JIS)
Executive
A4 tray not installed
NOTE
Depressing all three switches of the tray 2 paper size levers causes the Custom
paper menu to appear on the control-panel display. Press the button to return to the sensor diagnostic screen.
406 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
To toggle a sensor, find and move the sensor flags in the following locations.
Table 7-50 Sensor-test letter codes describes how to find the following sensors.
■ A. Remove tray 2. The flag is located in the center paper inlet path of the paper pickup unit, directly in front of the right-side white roller. The flag is recessed above the registration shutter in the paper pickup unit.
WARNING!
The fuser might be hot; wait 10 minutes for it to cool down.
A
B
C
D
E
F
■ B. Open the ETB and wait for the fuser to cool down. The fuser inlet flag is located at the front center of the fuser. Reach the flag from above the black print cartridge.
■ C. The fuser delivery flag is located at the upper center of the fuser, behind the fuser Caution label. It is wrapped in a clear roller.
■ D. The output bin full sensor is located on the upper, rear edge of the fuser.
■ E. Remove tray 2. The tray 1 (multipurpose tray) paper-presence sensor flag is the black lever on the front right of the paper tray cavity.
■ F. Remove tray 2. The tray 2 paper presence sensor flag is the black lever in the middle center of the paper tray cavity.
■ G. Remove tray 2. The tray 2 paper size sensor switches are located on the left, rear side of the paper tray cavity.
■ H. The door switch is located on the right, front of the printer frame (underneath the right cover).
■ H. Remove tray 3. The tray 3 paper presence sensor flag is the black lever in the middle center of the paper tray cavity.
■ I. Remove tray 3. The tray 3 paper size sensor switches are located on the left, rear side of the paper tray cavity.
■ J. Remove tray 4. The tray 4 paper presence sensor flag is the black lever in the middle center of the paper tray cavity.
■ K. Remove tray 4. The tray 4 paper size sensor switches are located on the left, rear side of the paper tray cavity.
■ L. The door switch is located on the right, front of the printer frame (underneath the right cover).
Table 7-50
Sensor-test letter codes
Letter Sensor Sensor/switch number
Top of page
Fuser inlet speed
Fuser delivery
Output bin full
MP tray paper-presence
Tray 2 paper-presence
PS 3
PS11
PS12
PS13
PS2
PS1
0
1
0
0
0
0
Idle value
(doors closed, paper in trays 1 and 2)
Diagnostics 407
Table 7-50
Sensor-test letter codes (continued)
Letter Sensor
I
H
G
H
J
K
L
Tray 2 paper size
Door
Tray 3 paper-presence
Tray 3 paper size
Tray 4 paper-presence
Tray 4 paper size
Door
Sensor/switch number
SW1, SW2, SW3
SW4
PS1
SW1, SW2, SW3
PS1
SW1, SW2, SW3
SW4
Idle value
(doors closed, paper in trays 1 and 2)
0 to 7
1
0
0 to 7
0
0 to 7
1
Manual sensor test (special mode test; HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
Use this procedure to test paper-path sensors and the door-open switch manually. The following figures and tables show the locations of these sensors.
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models ) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3
Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4
Press to highlight MANUAL SENSOR TEST.
5
Press to select MANUAL SENSOR TEST.
6
Open and close doors or move sensor flags to see the sensor status change on the control-panel display.
408 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Figure 7-20
Location of sensors
ENWW Diagnostics 409
Figure 7-21
Sensors on the the paper pickup unit (the sensors are on the back side of the PCA)
1
2
3
4
Cassette-paper sensor (PS1)
Multipurpose-tray paper sensor (PS2)
Paper leading-edge sensor (PS3)
Overhead transparency sensor (PS4)
Figure 7-22
Fuser sensors and output bin full sensor
1
2
3
Fuser inlet paper sensor (PS11)
Fuser delivery sensor (PS12)
Output bin full sensor (PS13)
410 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Table 7-51
Sensors
Name
PS5
PS6
PS7
PS8
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS9
PS10
PS11
PS12
PS13
Function
Cassette paper-present sensor
Multipurpose-tray paper-present sensor
Paper leading-edge sensor
Overhead transparency sensor
Developing disengagement sensor
Cyan drum home-position sensor
Yellow drum home-position sensor
Magenta drum home-position sensor
Black drum home-position sensor
ETB speed sensor
Fuser inlet paper sensor
Fuser delivery sensor
Output bin paper-full sensor
Diagnostics 411
Figure 7-23
Sensors (2 x 500-sheet feeder, HP CLJ 4650 models only)
1
2
3
Feed sensor (SR3)
Upper cassette paper sensor (SR1)
Lower cassette paper sensor (SR2)
412 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Component test (special mode test)
Use the component test to exercise individual parts independently to isolate problems.
Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly. If CONTINUOUS is selected as the repeat option, the test will cycle the component on and off. This process continues for 2 minutes, and then the test terminates.
NOTE
The door interlock switch must be defeated to run any of the component tests. If covers are removed, the door switch must be manually cycled during some tests in order for the engine to recognize a change. The ETB assembly can be open, closed, or removed while some of these tests are executing. Print cartridges can be installed or removed during certain tests. The control-panel display prompts for removal of some or all cartridges during certain tests in order to rotate and isolate certain components, as well as to protect the cartridges and
ETB.
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS.
3
Press to select DIAGNOSTICS.
4
Press to highlight COMPONENT TEST.
5
Press to select COMPONENT TEST.
6
Select the component test options when prompted by the printer.
Menus cannot be opened during component tests, so (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU
(HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) serves the same function as C
ANCEL
J
OB
(HP Color
LaserJet 4600 models) or S
TOP
(HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models).
The following component tests can be performed:
■ Transfer motors. This test turns the components that are involved in the image transfer process: the cartridge motors, the ETB motor and belt (if the ETB is closed and the connector is seated), and the print cartridges (if the ETB is closed). You can remove or install print cartridges during this test.
■ Belt only. This test turns only the ETB motor and belt. The ETB must be closed and the connector seated. The control-panel display prompts you to remove the cartridges because the
ETB belt contacts the photosensitive drums and cannot turn without them rotating also. Rotating the photosensitive drums could damage the belt or photosensitive drums. If covers are removed, you must manually activate the door switch after removing the cartridges in order for the test run.
■ Cartridge motors. This test rotates only the print-cartridge drive motors. The control-panel display prompts you to remove at least one cartridge because the ETB belt contacts the photosensitive drums and cannot turn without them rotating also. The engine rotates the cartridge motor(s) for only the cartridges that are removed. To rotate all motors sequentially, remove all of the cartridges; to isolate one motor, remove only that cartridge. If covers are removed, you must manually activate the door switch after removing the cartridges in order to perform the test. Always start this test with all of the cartridges installed, and activate the door switch so that the printer recognizes the configuration. Then you can proceed with the test, by removing one or more cartridges.
Diagnostics 413
■ Black, Magenta, Yellow, Cyan laser/scanners. Use the following four tests to rotate each scanner motor individually.
■ Fuser motor. Use this test to rotate the fuser motor and drive gears.
■ Alienation motor (also called the developing disengaging motor). This test moves the developing disengaging rod, clutches, and plates through their three positions:
■ Clean/Home: Middle position; all cartridges disengaged; used during cleaning cycle
■ Color: Top position; no cartridges disengaged; used during color printing
■ Black: Lowest position; C, M, and Y cartridges disengaged, black engaged; used during black-only printing
■ Tray1/tray 2 solenoids. This test activates and releases the tray 1 and tray 2 solenoids. The tray 1 solenoid is the lower solenoid. The tray 2 solenoid is the upper solenoid. You can remove the two securing screws and rotate the paper pickup unit to get a better view of the solenoids.
Figure 7-24
Location of solenoids
Table 7-52
Solenoids
Name
SL1
SL2
414 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
Function
Cassette pickup solenoid (paper pickup drive assembly)
Multi-purpose tray pickup solenoid (paper pickup drive assembly)
ENWW
Figure 7-25
Solenoids on the paper pickup unit
ENWW
Figure 7-26
Solenoids (2 x 500-sheet feeder, HP CLJ 4650 models only)
1
2
Upper cassette pickup solenoid (SL1)
Lower cassette pickup solenoid (SL2)
Diagnostics 415
Figure 7-27
Location of motors and fans
Table 7-53
Motors and fans
Name
M5
M6
M7
M8
M1
M2
M3
M4
FAN1
FAN2
FAN3
Function
Cyan drum motor
Yellow drum motor
Magenta drum motor
Black drum motor
Paper pickup motor
ETB motor
Developing disengaging motor
Fuser motor
Formatter fan
Cartridge fan
Power-supply fan (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
416 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Figure 7-28
Motor (2 x 500-sheet feeder, HP CLJ 4650 models only)
1 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder motor (M1)
ENWW Diagnostics 417
Print/Stop test
Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image-formation defects and jams within the engine. During this test you can stop the paper anywhere along the printer-paper path. The test can be programmed to stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position. The test can also be programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 mS. If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the job-print time, you can recover the printer in one of two ways.
■ After the print job is completes press C
ANCEL
J
OB
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or S
TOP
(HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to return to the Diagnostic menu before the timer times out.
■ After the timer times out, press C
ANCEL
J
OB
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or S
TOP
(HP Color
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models). Activate the door switch to restart the engine and return it to a normal state.
When the timer is activated, the control-panel display shows the message Printing stopped Press
to continue. Pressing (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) prints the previously selected job. If you do not want the previous job to print, press C
ANCEL
J
OB
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or S
TOP
(HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) first, and then press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models).
NOTE
Do not attempt to perform a Print/Stop test while the printer is calibrating, because you be required to power-cycle the printer. If a jam message appears on the control-panel display during testing, activate the door switch.
Information menu
From the Information menu, the following pages can be printed.
Print Menu Map. Use this item to print the control-panel menu map, which shows the layout and current settings of the control-panel menu items.
Print Configuration. Use this item to help troubleshoot printer problems or to verify installation of optional accessories (such as memory DIMMs for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models and DDRs for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models), trays, and printer languages.
Print Supplies Status Page. Use this item to print a page that shows the remaining life of the supplies.
Supplies Status. Use this item to view a page that shows the supplies status in a searchable list on the control-panel display.
Print Usage Page. Use this item to print a page that shows a count of all media sizes that have passed through the printer and lists whether they were simplex, duplex, monochrome, or color; and reports page count.
Print Demo. Use this item to print a demonstration page.
Print RGB Samples. Use this item to print color samples for different RGB values (HP Color
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models).
Print CMYK Samples. Use this item to print color samples for different CMYK values (HP Color
LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models).
418 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Print File Directory. Use this item to print a page that shows the name and directory of files that are stored in the printer on an optional hard disk.
Print PCL Font List. Use this item to print a page that shows the available PCL fonts.
Print PS Font List. Use this item to print a page that shows the available PS (emulated PostScript) fonts.
Configure device menu/printing menu
Print PS Errors. Use this item to print PS error pages.
Print PDF Errors. Use this item to print PDF error pages.
Configure device menu/resets menu
Reset Factory Settings. Use this item to clear the page buffer, remove all perishable personality data, reset the printing environment, and return all default settings to factory defaults.
Powersave. Use this item to reset PowerSave mode to the factory default 30-minute setting.
Reset Supplies. Use this item to inform the printer that a new transfer kit or new fuser kit has been installed. This item also resets the page count of that supply to zero.
Configure device menu/print quality menu
Adjust color. Use this item to modify halftone settings for each color.
Set Registration. Use this item to align simplex and duplex images.
Print Modes. Use this item to associate each media type with a specific print mode.
Optimize. Use this item to optimize certain parameters for all jobs rather than optimizing by media type.
Calibrate Now. For HP Color LaserJet 4600 models, use this item to calibrate the printer for optimum print quality.
Full Calibrate Now. For HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models, use this item to calibrate the printer for optimum print quality.
Quick Calibrate Now. For HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models, use this item to partially calibrate the printer for optimum print quality.
Color Ret. Use this item to turn on or turn off a color printer Resolution Enhancement technology
(REt) setting.
Diagnostics 419
Test pages
Printing test pages helps you determine whether the printer engine and the formatter are functioning.
Engine test page
To verify that the printer engine is functioning, print an engine test page. Use a small pointed object to depress the test page switch located on the left side of the printer, as shown in
2 as the paper source, so make sure that paper is loaded in tray 2.
Figure 7-29
Test page switch
Formatter test page
To verify that the formatter is functioning, print a configuration page as follows:
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight INFORMATION.
3
Press to select INFORMATION.
4
Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION.
5
Press to select PRINT CONFIGURATION.
420 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Engine resets
Use the following procedures when you perform engine resets.
Cold reset
A cold reset unlocks menus that have been locked and resets control-panel variables. However, it does not clear the values in the Service menu (such as the serial number and page counts).
WARNING!
Performing a cold reset erases all of the EIO card information.
To perform a cold reset
1
Turn the printer on.
2
As the printer performs its power-on sequence, press and hold (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) until all three lights on the control panel are lit.
3
When SELECT LANGUAGE appears on the control-panel display, press until COLD RESET appears on the control-panel display.
4
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models). The printer performs a cold reset and then continues its power-on sequence.
NVRAM initialization
CAUTION
Initializing NVRAM resets the serial number, the event log, the page counts, the calibration settings, and the EIO card. Use the Service menu to restore the serial number and page counts. You also need to reconfigure any computers that print to this printer to recognize the printer. Initialize NVRAM only when absolutely necessary. In most situations, use a cold reset to reset printer variables but still retain the needed values in the Service menu.
Before initializing NVRAM, print a configuration page and a supplies status page to gather the following information:
NOTE
NVRAM initialization does not always clear all color plane registration (CPR) problems. If after an NVRAM initialization, CPR problems persist, see
Resetting the calibration values for the DC controller .
■ Total page count and color page count
■ Transfer kit count
■ Fuser kit count
■ Serial number
ENWW Engine resets 421
To initialize NVRAM
1
Turn the printer on and watch the control-panel display.
2
When the display shows the memory count, press and hold until all three lights on the control panel are lit.
3
Press .
4
Press P
AUSE
/R
ESUME
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and
4650 models). The message SKIP DISK LOAD appears on the control-panel display.
5
Press until NVRAM INIT is highlighted.
6
Press The printer initializes NVRAM and then continues its power-on sequence.
Resetting the calibration values for the DC controller
Performing an NVRAM initialization clears the calibration values from the formatter, but it does not clear the calibration values from the DC controller. If problems with color-plane registration persist after performing an NVRAM initialization, you should reset the calibration values for the DC controller.
To reset the calibration values for the DC controller
1
Open the top cover.
2
Press and hold the engine test switch on the left side of the printer for several seconds.
3
Close the top cover, and observe the control-panel display. If the message Performing
Calibration appears, the reset was successful.
Hard disk initialization
A hard disk initialization will erase and reformat the printer's hard disk. Perform hard disk initialization only if an error code appears on the control panel indicating an EIO disk error. Always try initializing the hard disk before replacing it.
To initialize the hard disk
1
Turn the printer on.
2
As the printer performs its power-on sequence, press and hold the P
AUSE
/R
ESUME
(HP Color
LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) button until all three lights on the control panel are lit.
3
Press . The message INITIALIZE DISK appears on the control-panel display.
4
Press The printer initializes the hard disk and continues its power-on sequence.
Calibration bypass
During certain diagnostic procedures, you need to bypass the automatic calibration that is performed whenever the printer is turned on.
422 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
To bypass calibration
1
Turn the printer on and watch the control-panel display.
2
When the display shows the memory count, press and hold until all three lights on the control panel are lit.
3
Press .
4
Press P
AUSE
/R
ESUME
(HP Color LaserJet 4600 printer) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and
4650 models). The message SKIP DISK LOAD appears on the control-panel display.
5
Press until SKIP CALIBRATION is highlighted.
6
Press . The printer skips calibration and then continues its power-on sequence.
Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Use the following procedure to calibrate the printer whenever you replace the DC controller, the ETB, the drum drive motors, the drum drive gears, or a laser/scanner.
1
Press to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3
Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4
Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.
5
Press to select PRINT QUALITY.
6
Press to highlight CALIBRATE NOW.
7
Press to select CALIBRATE NOW. Wait for the printer to calibrate.
Quick Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
Quick Calibrate Now is used for color tone calibration (D-Max and D-Half) and takes about 68 seconds.
1
Press MENU to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3
Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4
Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.
5
Press to select PRINT QUALITY.
6
Press to highlight QUICK CALIBRATE NOW.
7
Press to select QUICK CALIBRATE NOW. Wait for the printer to calibrate.
Engine resets 423
Full Calibrate Now (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
Use the following procedure to calibrate the printer whenever you replace the DC controller, the ETB, the drum drive motors, the drum drive gears, or a laser/scanner. Full Calibrate Now includes the
Quick Calibrate routines and adds Drum Phase Calibration and Color Plane Registration. Full
Calibrate lasts for about 3 minutes and 15 seconds.
1
Press MENU to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE.
3
Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE.
4
Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY.
5
Press to select PRINT QUALITY.
6
Press to highlight FULL CALIBRATE NOW.
7
Press to select FULL CALIBRATE NOW. Wait for the printer to calibrate.
424 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Service menu
The following sections describe the Service menu.
Using the Service menu
The Service menu is PIN protected for added security. Only authorized service people have access to the Service menu. When you select SERVICE from the list of menus, you are prompted to type an eight-digit PIN number. The PIN for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models is 04460002. The PIN for the HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models is 05465004.
1
Press (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models) or MENU (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models) to open the MENUS.
2
Press to highlight SERVICE.
3
Press to select SERVICE.
4
Press or until the first digit of the PIN appears.
5
Press to save the digit. The control-panel display replaces the digit with an asterisk.
Press at any time to move to the previous digit.
6
Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all eight digits are typed.
Clear event log
Use this item to clear the printer internal event log.
Total page count
The page count that is stored in NVRAM and printed on the configuration page represents the number of pages that the formatter has formatted (not including engine-test prints). If you install a new formatter when repairing a printer, use this menu item to reset the page count to the previous value. In this way, the page count reflects the number of pages that the engine has printed rather than restarting the count for the new formatter. The page count is in two categories: total mono pages and total color pages.
Transfer kit count
Use this item to reset the transfer unit count if the value is lost, such as when you replace the formatter. This value is initially set to zero at the factory. Type a value up to 120,000. This value is automatically reset to zero when a customer installs a new transfer kit and sets NEW TRANSFER
KIT to YES in the Resets menu.
Fuser kit count
Use this item to reset the fuser count if the value is lost, such as when you replace the formatter.
This value is initially set to zero at the factory. Type a value up to 150,000. This value is automatically reset to zero when a customer installs a new transfer kit and sets NEW FUSER KIT to
YES in the Resets menu.
Serial number
If you replace the formatter, use this item to reset the serial number of the printer.
ENWW Service menu 425
Service ID
Use this item to make the date that the printer was first used appear on the control panel. This eliminates the need for users to keep paper receipts for proof of warranty. Because the printer does not have an internal clock, the service ID date availability is dependent on the printer being connected to a source that can provide the date, such as the installer, the driver, or the embedded
Web server. If the printer is not connected to a date source, then the service ID will not be available and 000000 will appear on the control-panel display.
The following sections describe how to restore a service ID from a known date and how to convert a date to a service ID. The examples in each section use a known date of September 22, 2004, and a service ID = 14262.
Restoring the Service ID
If you replace the formatter, the date is lost. Use this menu item to reset the date to the original date that the printer was first used. The date format is YYDDD. Use the following procedure to calculate the dates:
1
To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year.
2
To calculate DDD, use the following formula:
30*(calendar month – 1) + calendar day = DDD
NOTE
If the calendar day = 31, use 30 instead.
Example (actual date is September 22, 2004)
1 2004 – 1990 = 14
14 = YY
2 30*(9–1) + 22 = DDD
30*(8) + 22 = DDD
240 + 22 = DDD
262 = DDD
3 Service ID = YYDDD
Service ID = 14262
Converting the Service ID to an actual date
You can use the printer Service ID number to determine whether the printer is still under warranty.
Use the following procedure to convert the Service ID into the installation date:
1
Add 1990 to YY to determine the actual year that the printer was installed.
2
Divide DDD by 30. If there is a remainder, add 1 to the result. This is the month.
3
The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the day of the month. If there is no remainder, the day of the month is 30.
426 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Example (service ID is 14262)
1 1990 + 14 = 2004
2 262 ÷ 30 = 8 with a remainder of 22.
8 + 1 = 9
Month = 9 (September)
3 22 = Day of month
4 Actual date = September 22, 2004
NOTE
A 6-day grace period is built into the date system.
Cold reset paper
When you perform a cold reset, the paper size that is stored in NVRAM is reset to the default factory setting. If you replace a formatter board in a country/region that uses A4 as the standard paper size, use this menu to reset the default paper size to A4. LETTER and A4 are the only available values.
ENWW Service menu 427
Diagrams
Main parts
1
2
3
5
6
Figure 7-30
Location of main parts
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
Fuser sleeve
Pressure roller
Transfer charging rollers
ETB belt
Separation pad
Multipurpose tray pickup roller
Main thermistor
Sub thermistor
9 Thermoswitch
10 Cassette pickup rollers
4
7
8
9
10
428 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Figure 7-31
Main parts (2 x 500-sheet feeder, HP CLJ 4650 models only)
1
2
Upper-cassette pickup assembly
Drive assembly
Diagrams 429
Switches
Figure 7-32
Location of switches
Table 7-54
Switches
Name
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW1001
Function
Cassette paper-size detection switch
Cassette paper-size detection switch
Cassette paper-size detection switch
Door switch
On/off switch
Test-print switch
430 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Figure 7-33
Switches (2 x 500-sheet feeder, HP CLJ 4650 models only)
1
2
Upper-cassette paper-size detection switch (SW1)
Lower-cassette paper-size detection switch (SW2)
Diagrams 431
Sensors
Figure 7-34
Location of sensors
Figure 7-35
Sensors on the paper pickup unit (sensors are on the back of the PCA)
3
4
1
2
Cassette paper sensor (PS1)
Multipurpose-tray paper sensor (PS2)
Paper leading-edge sensor (PS3)
Overhead transparency sensor (PS4)
432 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Figure 7-36
Fuser sensors and output bin full sensor
1
2
3
Fuser inlet paper sensor (PS11)
Fuser delivery sensor (PS12)
Output-bin-full sensor (PS13)
Table 7-55
Sensors
Name
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
PS6
PS7
PS8
PS9
PS10
PS11
PS12
PS13
Function
Cassette paper-present sensor
Multipurpose tray paper-present sensor
Paper leading-edge sensor
Overhead transparency sensor
Developing disengagement sensor
Cyan drum home-position sensor
Yellow drum home-position sensor
Magenta drum home-position sensor
Black drum home-position sensor
ETB speed sensor
Fuser inlet paper sensor
Fuser delivery sensor
Output-bin-paper-full sensor
Diagrams 433
Figure 7-37
Sensors (2 x 500-sheet feeder, HP CLJ 4650 models only)
1
2
3
Feed sensor (SR3)
Upper-cassette paper sensor (SR1)
Lower-cassette paper sensor (SR2)
434 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Solenoids
ENWW
Figure 7-38
Location of solenoids
Table 7-56
Solenoids
Name
SL1
SL2
Function
Cassette pickup solenoid (paper-pickup-drive assembly)
Multipurpose-tray pickup solenoid (paper-pickup-drive assembly)
Diagrams 435
Figure 7-39
Solenoids on the paper pickup unit
Figure 7-40
Solenoids (2 x 500-sheet feeder, HP CLJ 4650 models only)
1
2
Upper-cassette pickup solenoid (SL1)
Lower-cassette pickup solenoid (SL2)
436 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Motors and fans
ENWW
Figure 7-41
Location of motors and fans
Table 7-57
Motors and fans
Name
M7
M8
FAN1
FAN2
FAN3
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
Function
Cyan drum motor
Yellow drum motor
Magenta drum motor
Black drum motor
Paper pickup motor
ETB motor
Developing disengaging motor
Fuser motor
Formatter fan
Cartridge fan
Power-supply fan (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models only)
Diagrams 437
Figure 7-42
Motor (2 x 500-sheet feeder, HP CLJ 4650 models only)
1 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder motor (M1)
438 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
PCAs
ENWW
Figure 7-43
PCA locations
3
4
1
2
5
6
Fuser power-supply PCA
High-voltage power-supply PCA
Toner-level-detection PCA
Paper pickup sensor PCA
Low-voltage power-supply PCA
Antenna PCAs
7
8
Memory controller PCA
DC controller PCA
9 Formatter PCA
10 Firmware DIMM PCA (HP CLJ 4600)
CompactFlash (HP CLJ 4610n and 4650 models only)
Diagrams 439
Figure 7-44
PCA (2 x 500-sheet feeder, HP CLJ 4650 models only)
1 2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder PCA
440 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
DC controller PCA
ENWW
Figure 7-45
Location of DC controller PCA components (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Diagrams 441
Figure 7-46
Location of DC controller PCA components (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
442 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Connectors
ENWW
Figure 7-47
Location of connectors (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Diagrams 443
Figure 7-48
Location of connectors (1 of 2); HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
444 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
Figure 7-49
Location of connectors (2 of 2); HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
ENWW
Figure 7-50
Connectors (500-sheet feeder, HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models only)
Diagrams 445
Figure 7-51
Connectors (2 x 500-sheet feeder, HP CLJ 4650 models only)
General circuit diagram
Figure 7-52
General circuit diagram (HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
446 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Figure 7-53
General circuit diagram (HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models)
Diagrams 447
Figure 7-54
General circuit diagram (500-sheet feeder, HP CLJ 4600 and 4650 models only)
448 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
ENWW
Figure 7-55
General circuit diagram (2 x 500-sheet feeder, HP CLJ 4650 models only)
Diagrams 449
450 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW
8 Parts and diagrams
This chapter contains information about the following topics:
●
●
●
●
●
●
500-sheet paper feeder (HP CLJ 4600/4650 models only)
●
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (HP CLJ 4650 models only)
●
●
ENWW 451
Introduction
The figures in this chapter show the major subassemblies in the printer and their component parts. A parts list table follows each exploded assembly diagram. Each table lists the item number, the associated part number, and the description of each part.
CAUTION
Be sure to order the correct part. Read the part description carefully. if a part is designated as a field replaceable unit (FRU) for the 4600 Only, it is a replacement part for the
HP Color LaserJet 4600 models only. If a part is designated as a FRU for the 4650 Only, it is a replacement part for the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models only. If a part is designated as a
FRU for the 4610n Only or 4610n/4650 Only, it is a replacement part for the HP Color
LaserJet 4610n or the HP Color LaserJet 4610n and 4650 models only. If the FRU does not have a printer specific designator, it can be installed on HP Color LaserJet 4600, HP Color
LaserJet 4610n, or HP Color LaserJet 4650 models.
When looking for part numbers for electrical components, pay careful attention to the voltage that is listed in the description column to ensure that the part number selected is for the correct printer model.
NOTE
In this manual, the abbreviation "PCA" stands for "printed circuit board assembly."
Components described as a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and sensors.
452 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Ordering parts and supplies
Parts that wear
The parts on the product that need replacement at regular intervals are listed in
www.hp.com/buy/parts .
Parts
Order replacement parts from the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/HPparts .
Customer support
Product documentation and software support can be found at the Web sites listed in
Technical support Web sites and related documentation .
Table 8-1
Technical support Web sites and related documentation
HP Connect Online
(for HP partners)
HP Customer Care Call Centers
Information about contacting HP call centers in specific countries/regions.
HP Online Technical Support
(for HP partners)
Software drivers, support documentation, and answers to frequently asked questions
HP Technical Training (North America)
Classes and schedules
Go to www.connect-online.hp.com
Go to www.hp.com/support/callcenters
Go to www.hp.com/support
HP Parts
Parts information
Go to www.compaq.com/training
NOTE
Select the appropriate country/region in the
"select a country or region" field at the top, right corner of the page.
Go to www.partsurfer.hp.com
(parts ordering)
Go to www.hp.com/go/HPparts (parts reference guide)
Supplies and accessories
Use the following table to order supplies and accessories for the product.
Table 8-2
Supplies and accessories
Part number Description Product number
Accessories
J6057A J7934-61001 (new)
J7934–69001 (exchange)
4600/4650 Only: HP Jetdirect 620n connectivity card
ENWW Ordering parts and supplies 453
Table 8-2
Supplies and accessories (continued)
Product number Part number
J6035D J6035–61051
C2947A
C6518A
C6520A
Media
C2934A
C2936A
C4179A
C4179B
Q1298A
Q1298B
HPU1132
C4103A
C9667A
Q3673A
Q3674A
Cables
C2946A
454 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams
C4103-67901
Q3673–67901
Q3674-67901
Description
4610n Only
HP Jetdirect 175X USB external print server
NOTE
The HP Jetdirect
175X USB external print server (J6035D) is the only
Jetdirect device that is comaptable with the
HP CLJ 4610n model.
FIR pod
HP Color LaserJet 4600 models)
Printer cabinet/stand
4600/4650 Only
Optional 1 X 500-sheet paper feeder and Tray 3 assembly
4650 Only: Optional 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder and Tray 3/tray 4 assembly
IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cable, 3 meters (approximately 10 feet) long, with 25-pin male/micro 36-pin male (a to c-type) connector
IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cable, 10 meters (approximately 32 feet) long, with 25-pin male/micro 36-pin male (a to c-type) connector
2-meter USB cable (a to b type connector)
3-meter USB cable (a to b type connector)
HP Color LaserJet Transparencies
(letter) 50 sheets
HP Color LaserJet Transparencies
(A4) 50 sheets
HP LaserJet Soft Gloss paper (letter)
200 sheets
HP LaserJet Soft Gloss paper (A4) 200 sheets
HP LaserJet Tough paper (letter)
HP LaserJet Tough paper (A4)
HP Premium Choice LaserJet paper
(letter)
ENWW
ENWW
Table 8-2
Supplies and accessories (continued)
Product number Part number
HPU1732
CHP410
HPJ115R
CHP310
Memory
J6054B
J6073A
C8530A
C7848A
C7850A
C9653A
C9712A
Q2630A
J6054-69031
J6073-69011
C8530-67909
C7848-67901
C7850-67901
C9653-67901
C9712-67918
Q2630-67951
Q2631A
Q2632A
Q2631-67951
Q2632–67951
Q2631A
Q2635A
Q2635-67910
Q2635–67919
Control-panel overlays (4600 Only) and labels (4610n/4650 Only)
C9660-40002
Q3668-67901
C9660-40003
Q3668-67902
C9660-40004
Q3668-67903
C9660-40005
Q3668-67904
C9660-40006
Q3668-67905
C9660-40007
Description
HP Premium Chois LaserJet paper
(11 X 17)
HP Premium Choice LaserJet paper
(A4)
HP LaserJet paper (letter)
HP LaserJet paper (A4)
4600 Only:Printer hard disk
4650 Only:Printer hard disk
4600 Only: 8 MB Flash DIMM
4600 Only: 64 MB memory DIMM
(SDRAM)
4600 Only: 128 MB memory DIMM
(SDRAM)
4600 Only: 256 MB memory DIMM
(SDRAM)
4600 Only: Firmware DIMM
4610n/4650 Only: 128 MB memory
DDR
4610n/4650 Only: 256 MB memory
DDR
4610n/4650 Only: 512 MB memory
DDR
4650 Only: Firmware Compact flash
4610n Only: Firmware CompactFlash
English overlay (4600 Only)
English label (4610n/4650 Only)
French overlay (4600 Only)
French label (4650 Only)
German overlay (4600 Only)
German label (4650 Only)
Italian overlay (4600 Only)
Italian label (4650 Only)
Spanish overlay (4600 Only)
Spanish label (4650 Only)
Danish overlay (4600 Only)
Ordering parts and supplies 455
Table 8-2
Supplies and accessories (continued)
Product number Part number
Q3668-67914
C9660-40016
Q3668-679015
C9660-40017
Q3668-67916
C9660-40018
Q3668-67917
C9660-40019
Q3668-67918
C9660-40020
Q3668-67919
C9660-40021
Q3668-67920
C9660-40022
Q3668-67921
C9660-40023
Q3668-67922
Q3668-67906
C9660-40008
Q3668-67907
C9660-40009
Q3668-67908
C9660-40010
Q3668-67909
C9660-40011
Q3668-67910
C9660-40012
Q3668-67911
C9660-40013
Q3668-67912
C9660-40014
Q3668-67913
C9660-40015
456 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams
Description
Danish label (4650 Only)
Dutch overlay (4600 Only)
Dutch label (4650 Only)
Finnish overlay (4600 Only)
Finnish label (4650 Only)
Norwegian overlay (4600 Only)
Norwegian label (4650 Only)
Portuguese overlay (4600 Only)
Portuguese label (4650 Only)
Swedish overlay (4600 Only)
Swedish label (4650 Only)
Czech overlay (4600 Only)
Czech label (4650 Only)
Hungarian overlay (4600 Only)
Hungarian label (4650 Only)
Polish overlay (4600 Only)
Polish label (4650 Only)
Russian overlay (4600 Only)
Russian label (4650 Only)
Turkish overlay (4600 Only)
Turkish label (4650 Only)
Arabic overlay (4600 Only)
Arabic label (4650 Only)
Greek overlay (4600 Only)
Greek label (4650 Only)
Hebrew overlay (4600 Only)
Hebrew label (4650 Only)
Japanese overlay (4600 Only)
Japanese label (4650 Only)
Korean overlay (4600 Only)
Korean label (4650 Only)
Thai overlay (4600 Only)
Thai label (4650 Only)
ENWW
ENWW
Table 8-2
Supplies and accessories (continued)
Product number Part number
C9660-40024
Q3668-67923
C9660-40025
Q3668-67924
Reference materials
5963-7863
5021-0330
Q
3668-90970
Supplies
C9720A
C9720A
C9721A
C9722A
C9723A
C9724A
Q3675A
C9725A
Q3676A
C9726A
Q3677A
C9660A
Description
Simplified Chinese overlay (4600 Only)
Simplified Chinese label (4650 Only)
Traditional Chinese overlay (4600 Only)
Traditional Chinese label (4650 Only)
C9720-67901
C9720-67902
C9721-67901
C9721-67902
C9722-67901
C9722-67902
C9723-67901
C9723-67902
C9660-69012 (exchange)
RG5-6484-040CN (new)
Q3675-69001 (exchange)
RG5-7455-000CN (new)
C9660-67902 (exchange)
RG5-6493-190CN (new)
Q3676-69001 (exchange)
RG5-7450-110CN (new)
C9660-69003 (exchange)
RG5-6517-110CN (new)
Q3677-69001 (exchange)
RG5-7451-110CN (new)
C9660-67911 (exchange)
HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper
Specifications Guide
PCL/PJL Technical Reference Package
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer service manual (this service manual is for the HP Color LaserJet 4600 models, the HP Color LaserJet 4650 models, and the HP Color
LaserJet 4610n printer)
Black print cartridge
Black print cartridge (Europe)
Cyan print cartridge
Cyan print cartridge (Europe)
Yellow print cartridge
Yellow print cartridge (Europe)
Magenta print cartridge
Magenta print cartridge (Europe)
Image transfer kit; 4600 Only
Image transfer kit; 4610n/4650 Only
Image fuser kit (110 volt); 4600 Only
Image fuser kit (110 volt); 4610n/4650
Only
Image fuser kit (220 volt); 4600 Only
Image fuser kit (220 volt); 4610n/4650
Only
Formatter simplex; 4600 Only
Ordering parts and supplies 457
Table 8-2
Supplies and accessories (continued)
Product number Part number
Q3999A
C9661A
Q7732A
C9660-67911 (new)
Q3999-69002 (exchange)
Q3999-67092 (new)
C9661-69002 (exchange)
C9661-67902 (new)
Q7732–69001 (exchange)
Q7732–67901 (new)
Description
Formatter simplex/duplex; 4650 Only
Formatter duplex; 4600 Only
Formatter simplex/duplex; 4610n Only
NOTE
The only difference between the the print cartridges is that the Europe-only print cartridges have different languages on the instruction sheet inside the box.
458 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Common fasteners
Table 8-3
Common fasteners
Illustration Description
Screw, machine with washer
Size
M3x8
Screw, self tapping
Screw, truss head M3x6
Retaining Ring (E-type)
Part number
xA9-1276-000CN xA9-1275-000CN
Uses
To hold plastic to metal (for example, the skins)
To hold plastic to plastic
To hold sheet metal to sheet metal (for example, the formatter pan)
To hold gears in place
ENWW Ordering parts and supplies 459
Illustrations and parts lists
The following illustrations and parts tables list the field replaceable units (FRU) for the HP Color
LaserJet 4600 Series printers. An alphabetical and a numerical master parts list are included at the end of this chapter.
460 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Locations of major components
ENWW
Figure 8-1
Major components of the HP Color LaserJet 4600 Series printer
3
4
1
2
5
6
Fuser assembly
ETB assembly
Paper pickup assembly
Cassette
Paper pickup drive assembly
Disengaging drive assembly
7
8
Drum drive assembly (cyan/magenta)
Drum drive assembly (yellow)
9 Drum drive assembly (cyan/magenta)
10 Drum drive assembly (black)
11 Fuser drive assembly
Illustrations and parts lists 461
Figure 8-2
Printer PCAs
462 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 8-4
Printer PCAs
8
9
8
8
6
7
5
5
4
5
2
3
1
2
Ref
1
9
9
9
10
9
9
9
9
10
10
Description
Fuser power-supply PCA 110 V
Fuser power-supply PCA 220 V
High-voltage power-supply PCA (new)
High-voltage power-supply PCA (exchange)
Toner sensor PCA
Paper pickup PCA
Low-voltage power supply, 110 V (new)
Low-voltage power supply, 110 V (exchange)
Low-voltage power supply, 220 V
Memory tag antenna PCA
Memory controller PCA
DC controller PCA (new); 4600 Only
DC controller PCA (exchange); 4600 Only
DC controller PCA; 4610n/4650 Only
Formatter, simplex, exchange; 4600 Only
Formatter simplex/duplex, exchange; 4650 Only
Formatter, simplex, new; 4600 Only
Formatter simplex/duplex, new; 4650 Only
Formatter, duplex, exchange; 4600 Only
Formatter, duplex, new; 4600 Only
Formatter, simplex, new; 4610n Only
Formatter, simplex, exchange; 4610n Only
Firmware DIMM; 4600 Only
CompactFlash; 4650 Only
CompactFlash; 4610n Only
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Q3999-69002
C9660-67901
Q3999-67902
C9661-69002
C9660-67902
Q7732–67901
Q7732–69001
C9712-67908
Q2635-67910
Q2635–67919
Part number
RG5-6399-030CN
RG5-6400-030CN
RG5-6395-000CN
C9660-69022
RG5-6393-000CN
RG5-6392-000CN
RG5-6410-020CN
C9660-69023
RG5-6411-020CN
RG5-5469-000CN
RG5-6396-000CN
RG5-6391-100CN
C9660-69020
RG5-7470-030CN
C9660-69011
Illustrations and parts lists 463
External covers and panels
Figure 8-3
External covers and panels
464 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
4
5
2
3
6
Ref
1
7
8
9
10
Table 8-5
External covers and panels
Description
Right cover
Top cover assembly
Multipurpose tray assembly (tray 1)
Front cover assembly
Left cover
Rear cover assembly
Rear top cover assembly
Filter, rear
Filter, left side
Rear cover, lower
Part number
RB2–8591–000CN
RG5-6465-000CN
RG5-6467-000CN
RG5-6466-000CN
RB2-8590-040CN
RG5-8592-000CN
RG5-6464-000CN
RB2-8596-000CN
RB3-0607-000CN
RB2–8593–000CN
1
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
ENWW External covers and panels 465
Internal components
Figure 8-4
Internal components (1 of 5)
466 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Ref
1
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
16
17
18
19
6
7
4
5
2
3
1
1
Table 8-6
Internal components (1 of 5)
Description
Control-panel assembly, 110 V; 4600 Only
Control-panel assembly, 220 V; 4600 Only
Operational-panel assembly, 110 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Control-panel cross-member assembly
Contact-pin assembly
Drum-grounding assembly (black and yellow), short
Drum-grounding assembly (cyan and magenta), long
Plate, drive interlock
Drum drive assembly (cyan and magenta)
Drum drive assembly (yellow)
Drum drive assembly (black)
Gear 200T (cyan and magenta)
Gear 200T (black and yellow)
Spring tension
Plate, drive grounding
Plate, developer disengagement (change plate)
Gear 17T
Cable, antenna
Antenna memory PCA assembly
Cable, memory; 4600 Only
Arm, test print
Part number
RG5-6432-040CN
RG5-6433-040CN
RG5–6432–040CN
RG5-6510-000CN
RG5-6492-000CN
RG5-6474-000CN
RG5-7362-000CN
RB2-8225-000CN
RG5-7467-000CN
RG5-7469-000CN
RG5-7468-000CN
RS7-0137-000CN
RS7-0138-000CN
RS6-2537-000CN
RB2-8255-000CN
RB2-8239-000CN
RS7-0139-000CN
RG5-6418-000CN
RG5-6396-000CN
RG5-6420-000CN
RB2-8250-000CN
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
Internal components 467
Figure 8-5
Internal components (2 of 5)
468 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-7
Internal components (2 of 5)
6
7
4
5
2
3
Ref
1
8
9
10
11
12
13
Description
Lever, cartridge pressure
Cover, cartridge; 4610n/4650 Only
Cassette-frame right assembly
Rod, spring
Cassette frame left assembly
Rod, spring
Cable/connector, optional feeder
Switch, cassette paper size
Cable, cassette size (optional)
Cable, environment sensor; 4610n/4650 Only
Environment/humidity sensor; 4610n/4650 Only
Switch, push
Cable, cassette size
Part number
RB2-8195-000CN
RB2-8196-000CN
RG5-6460-000CN
RB2-8213-000CN
RG5-6459-000CN
RB2-8213-000CN
RG5-6430-000CN
WC2-5452-000CN
RG5-6430-000CN
RG5-7471-000CN
WP2-5138-000CN
WC2-5452-000CN
RG5-6431-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
Qty
4
1
1
1
1
ENWW Internal components 469
Figure 8-6
Internal components (3 of 5)
470 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-8
Internal components (3 of 5)
Ref
1
12
13
14
9
10
10
11
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Description
High-voltage power-supply PCA assembly (new)
High-voltage power-supply PCA assembly (exchange)
HVT terminal assembly
Microswitch, front cover
Toner-sensor PCA
Spring, tension
Arm, pressure
Connector, drawer
Cartridge, inlet assembly
Cable, left plate
DC controller PCA assembly; 4600 Only
DC controller PCA assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Fan, formatter
Fan, cartridge
ETB latch assembly
Fan, lower (power-supply fan); 4610n/4650 Only
Part number
RG5-6395-000CN
C9660-69022
RG5-6449-000CN
WC4-5169-000CN
RG5-6393-000CN
RS6-2511-000CN
RB2-8151-020CN
WS3-5746-000CN
RG5-6450-000CN
RG5-6413-000CN
RG5-6391-000CN
RG5-7470-000CN
RH7-1490-000CN
RH7-1491-000CN
RG5-6456-000CN
RH7-1607-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
Qty
1
ENWW Internal components 471
Figure 8-7
Internal components (4 of 5)
472 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Ref
1
9
10
11
7
8
5
6
4
5
3
4
1
2
1
1
11
12
12
Table 8-9
Internal components (4 of 5)
Description
Fuser, 110 V 4600 Only
Fuser, 110 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Fuser 220, V; 4600 Only
Fuser, 220 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Static eliminator; 4600 Only
Color-registration-detection assembly
Paper pickup assembly; 4600 Only
Paper pickup assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
ETB assembly; 4600 Only
ETB assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Cap, right
Spring, tension
Cap, left
Developing disengaging drive assembly
Damper assembly (top cover hinge)
Fuser drive assembly; 4600 Only
Fuser drive assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Laser/scanner assembly; 4600 Only
Laser/scanner assembly 4610n/4650 Only
Part number
RG5-6493-190CN
RG5-7450-110CN
RG5-6517-110CN
RG5-7451-000CN
RF5-3773-000CN
RG5-6454-000CN
RG5-6468-000CN
RG5-7453-000CN
RG5-6484-040CN
RG5-7455-000CN
RB2-8124-000CN
RS6-2511-000CN
RB2-8121-000CN
RG5-6507-000CN
RG5-6446-000CN
RG5-6512-000CN
RG5-7452-000CN
RG5-6390-000CN
RG5-7475-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
Internal components 473
1
3
17
19
18
16
22
20
2 1
15
14
13
12
11
Figure 8-8
Internal components (5 of 5)
10
2
5
7
9
8
6
4
474 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 8-10
Internal components (5 of 5)
17
17
18
18
13
14
15
16
19
19
20
21
22
9
10
11
12
7
8
6
6
5
5
4
4
2
3
Ref
1
Description
Cable, interface
Cable, flat
Spring, scanner support
Cable, ac, 110 V
Cable, ac, 220 V
Fuser power-supply PCA, 110 V
Fuser power-supply PCA, 220 V
Cable/connector, fuser; 4600 Only
Cable/connector, fuser; 4610n/4650 Only
Cable, relay
Gear 29T
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Gear, pressure
Cam/gear 66T
Spring, tension
Memory-tag-antenna PCA assembly
Cable, sensor
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Cable, dc power supply
Low-voltage power-supply assembly, 110 V
Low-voltage power-supply assembly, 220 V
Fuse, 125 V, 6.3 A, 110 V
Fuse, 250 V, 4 A, 220 V
Fuse, 250 V, 20 A, 110 V
Fuse, 250 V, 8 A, 220 V
Bracket, sensor
Cover, sensor
Plate, grounding
1
1
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
Qty
1
Part number
RG5-6422-000CN
RH2-5471-000CN
RB2-8246-000CN
RG5-6427-000CN
RG5-6434-000CN
RG5-6399-030CN
RG5-6400-050CN
RG5-6425-000CN
RG5-7480-000CN
RG5-6414-000CN
RS7-0136-020CN
WG8-5362-000CN
RB2-8122-020CN
RS7-0135-000CN
RS6-2510-000CN
RG5-5469-000CN
RG5-6423-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
RG5-6415-000CN
RG5-6410-020CN
RG5-6411-020CN
VD7-2356-301CN
VD7-0644-001CN
VD7-1732-002CN
VD7-1838-001CN
RB2-8540-000CN
RB2-8541-000CN
RB2-8542-000CN
Internal components 475
Figure 8-9
Paper pickup-drive assembly
476 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-11
Paper pickup-drive assembly
1
2
Ref
1
Description
Paper pickup assembly; 4600 Only
Paper pickup assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Solenoid
Part number
RG5-6469-000CN
RG5-7466-000CN
RH7-5319-000C
1
2
Qty
1
ENWW Internal components 477
Figure 8-10
Drum drive assembly
478 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-12
Drum drive assembly
1
1
Ref
1
2
Description
Drum drive assembly (cyan/magenta)
Drum drive assembly (black)
Drum drive assembly (yellow)
LED PCA assembly
Part number
RG5-7467-000CN
RG5-7468-000CN
RG5-7469-000CN
RG5-6394-000CN
1
1
Qty
2
1
ENWW Internal components 479
Figure 8-11
Disengaging drive assembly
480 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-13
Disengaging drive assembly
2
3
Ref
1
Description
Disengaging drive assembly
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Motor, M7, developing disengaging stepping
Part number
RG5-6507-020CN
WG8-5362-000CN
RH7-1494-000CN
1
1
Qty
1
ENWW Internal components 481
Figure 8-12
Fuser drive assembly
482 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-14
Fuser drive assembly
3
3
1
2
Ref
1
Description
Fuser drive assembly; 4600 Only
Fuser drive assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Motor, M8, fuser, DS, brushless, 24 V 4600 Only
Motor, M8, fuser, DS, brushless, 24 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Part number
RG5-6512-000CN
RG5-7452-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
RH7-1495-000CN
RH7-1605-000CN
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
ENWW Internal components 483
Figure 8-13
Cassette (tray 2)
484 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-15
Cassette (tray 2)
3
4
5
1
2
Ref
1
Description
Cassette (tray 2); 4600 Only
Cassette (tray 2); 4610n/4650 Only
Separation pad
Plate, separation assembly
Arm, paper-size
Multipurpose tray pickup roller assembly
Part number
RG5-6476-090CN
RG5-7459-000CN
RF5-3750-020CN
RF5-3749-000CN
RB2-8349-000CN
RG9-1529-000CN
1
3
1
1
1
Qty
1
ENWW Internal components 485
Figure 8-14
Paper pickup assembly
486 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-16
Paper pickup assembly
4
5
3
4
1
2
Ref
1
Description
Paper pickup assembly; 4600 Only
Paper pickup assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Roller, paper pickup
Paper-sensor PCA assembly
Paper pickup drive assembly; 4600 Only
Paper pickup drive assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Cable, paper-feed
Part number
RG5-6468-040CN
RG5-7453-040CN
RF5-3739-000CN
RG5-6392-000CN
RG5-6469-000CN
RG5-7466-000CN
RG5-6419-000CN
1
1
1
1
1
2
Qty
1
ENWW Internal components 487
Figure 8-15
ETB assembly
488 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-17
ETB assembly
2
3
4
1
2
Ref
1
Description
ETB assembly; 4600 Only
ETB assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Motor, M6, ETB, DC, brushless, 24 V 4600 Only
Motor, M6, ETB, DC, brushless, 24 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Roller, oblique
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Part number
RG5-6484-070CN
RG5-7455-000CN
RH7-1495-000CN
RH7-1605-000CN
RB1-2155-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
1
2
1
1
1
Qty
1
ENWW Internal components 489
Figure 8-16
Fuser assembly
490 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-18
Fuser assembly
3
4
1
2
1
1
Ref
1
Description
Fuser assembly, 110 V; 4600 Only
Fuser assembly, 110 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Fuser assembly, 220 V; 4600 Only
Fuser assembly, 220 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Sensor flag
Fuser cover, left
Fuser cover, right
Part number
RG5-6493-190CN 4600 Only
RG5-7450-110CN
RG5-6517-110CN
RG5-7451-110CN
RB2-8498-030CN
RF5-3774-030CN
RF5-3775-030CN
1
1
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
ENWW Internal components 491
500-sheet paper feeder (HP CLJ 4600/4650 models only)
Figure 8-17
500-sheet paper feeder assembly (HP CLJ 4600/4650 models only)
492 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-19
500-sheet paper feeder assembly
Ref
1
2
Description
500-sheet paper feeder and tray 3 assembly; 4600/4650 Only
Cassette, 500-sheet paper feeder
Part number
Q3673-67901
RG1-4140-080CN
Qty
1
1
ENWW 500-sheet paper feeder (HP CLJ 4600/4650 models only) 493
Figure 8-18
500-sheet paper feeder internal components
494 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-20
500-sheet paper feeder internal components
3
3
1
2
Ref
1
Description
Paper feeder PCA assembly; 4600 Only
Paper feeder PCA assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Roller, paper pickup
Paper feeder drive assembly; 4600 Only
Paper feeder drive assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Part number
RG1-4139-000CN
RG5-7542-000CN
RF5-3739-000CN
RG1-4138-020CN
RG5-7541-000CN
1
1
1
1
Qty
1
ENWW 500-sheet paper feeder (HP CLJ 4600/4650 models only) 495
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (HP CLJ 4650 models only)
Figure 8-19
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (HP CLJ 4650 models only)
496 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-21
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (HP CLJ 4650 models only)
2
3
Ref
1
4
Description
2 x 500-sheet feeder/tray assembly; 4650 Only
2 x 500 upper cassette; 4650 Only
2 x 500 lower cassette; 4650 Only
2 x 500 paper feeder driver PCA assembly; 4650 Only
Part number
Q3674-67901
RG5-7535-000CN
RG5-7534-000CN
RG5-7518-000CN
1
1
Qty
1
1
ENWW 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (HP CLJ 4650 models only) 497
Figure 8-20
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (1 of 2) (HP CLJ 4650 models only)
498 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-22
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (1 of 2) (HP CLJ 4650 models only)
Ref
1
2
Description
Fixed-level left plate (secures the printer to the feeder); 4650
Only
Fixed-level right plate (secures the printer to the feeder); 4650
Only
Part number
RB3-0978-000CN
RB3-0979-000CN
Qty
1
1
ENWW 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (HP CLJ 4650 models only) 499
Figure 8-21
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (2 of 2) (HP CLJ 4650 models only)
500 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-23
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (2 of 2) (HP CLJ 4650 models only)
2
3
Ref
1
Description
Paper pickup rollers; 4650 Only
Adjuster cover; 4650 Only
Outrigger assembly; 4650 Only
Part number
RF5-3739-000CN
RB2-3691-000CN
RG5-7523-000CN
6
6
Qty
2
ENWW 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (HP CLJ 4650 models only) 501
Figure 8-22
2 x 500-sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly (HP CLJ 4650 models only)
502 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-24
2 x 500-sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly (HP CLJ 4650 models only)
Ref
1
Description
2 x 500-sheet paper pickup feeder drive assembly; 4650 Only
Part number
RG5-7531-000CN
Qty
1
ENWW 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (HP CLJ 4650 models only) 503
Figure 8-23
2 x 500-sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly (HP CLJ 4650 models only)
504 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-25
2 x 500-sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly (HP CLJ 4650 models only)
Ref
1
Description Part number
2 x 500-sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly; 4650 Only RG5-7529-000CN
Qty
1
ENWW 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (HP CLJ 4650 models only) 505
Figure 8-24
2 x 500-sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly (HP CLJ 4650 models only)
506 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-26
2 x 500-sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly (HP CLJ 4650 models only)
Ref
1
Description Part number
2 x 500-sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly; 4650 Only RG5-7530-000CN
Qty
1
ENWW 2 x 500-sheet paper feeder (HP CLJ 4650 models only) 507
Alphabetical parts list
Table 8-27
Alphabetical parts list
Description
2 x 500 lower cassette; 4650 Only
Part number
RG5-7534-000CN
2 x 500 paper feeder driver PCA assembly; 4650 Only
2 x 500 upper cassette; 4650 Only
RG5-7518-000CN
RG5-7535-000CN
2 x 500-sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly; 4650 Only RG5-7530-000CN
2 x 500-sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly; 4650 Only RG5-7529-000CN
2 x 500-sheet feeder/tray assembly; 4650 Only Q3674-67901
2 x 500-sheet paper pickup feeder drive assembly; 4650 Only RG5-7531-000CN
500-sheet paper feeder and tray 3 assembly; 4600/4650 Only Q3673-67901
Adjuster cover; 4650 Only RB2-3691-000CN
Antenna memory PCA assembly
Arm, paper-size
Arm, pressure
Arm, test print
Bracket, sensor
Cable, ac, 110 V
Cable, ac, 220 V
Cable, antenna
Cable, cassette size
Cable, cassette size (optional)
Cable, dc power supply
Cable, environment sensor; 4610n/4650 Only
Cable, flat
Cable, interface
Cable, left plate
RG5-6396-000CN
RB2-8349-000CN
RB2-8151-020CN
RB2-8250-000CN
RB2-8540-000CN
RG5-6427-000CN
RG5-6434-000CN
RG5-6418-000CN
RG5-6431-000CN
RG5-6430-000CN
RG5-6415-000CN
RG5-7471-000CN
RH2-5471-000CN
RG5-6422-000CN
RG5-6413-000CN
Table and page
2 x 500-sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly
2 x 500-sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly
2 x 500-sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly
500-sheet paper feeder assembly
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (2 of 2)
508 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 8-27
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Cable, memory; 4600 Only
Cable, paper-feed
Cable, relay
Cable, sensor
Cable/connector, fuser; 4600 Only
Cable/connector, fuser; 4610n/4650 Only
Cable/connector, optional feeder
Cam/gear 66T
Cap, left
Cap, right
Cartridge, inlet assembly
Cassette (tray 2); 4600 Only
Cassette (tray 2); 4610n/4650 Only
Cassette frame left assembly
Cassette, 500-sheet paper feeder
Cassette-frame right assembly
Color-registration-detection assembly
CompactFlash; 4610n Only
CompactFlash; 4650 Only
Connector, drawer
Contact-pin assembly
Control-panel assembly, 110 V; 4600 Only
Control-panel assembly, 220 V; 4600 Only
Control-panel cross-member assembly
Cover, cartridge; 4610n/4650 Only
Cover, sensor
Damper assembly (top cover hinge)
DC controller PCA (exchange); 4600 Only
DC controller PCA (new); 4600 Only
DC controller PCA assembly; 4600 Only
DC controller PCA assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
DC controller PCA; 4610n/4650 Only
Developing disengaging drive assembly
Part number
RG5-6420-000CN
RG5-6419-000CN
RG5-6414-000CN
RG5-6423-000CN
RG5-6425-000CN
RG5-7480-000CN
RG5-6430-000CN
RS7-0135-000CN
RB2-8121-000CN
RB2-8124-000CN
RG5-6450-000CN
RG5-6476-090CN
RG5-7459-000CN
RG5-6459-000CN
RG1-4140-080CN
RG5-6460-000CN
RG5-6454-000CN
Q2635–67919
Q2635-67910
WS3-5746-000CN
RG5-6492-000CN
RG5-6432-040CN
RG5-6433-040CN
RG5-6510-000CN
RB2-8196-000CN
RB2-8541-000CN
RG5-6446-000CN
C9660-69020
RG5-6391-100CN
RG5-6391-000CN
RG5-7470-000CN
RG5-7470-030CN
RG5-6507-000CN
Table and page
500-sheet paper feeder assembly
Alphabetical parts list 509
Table 8-27
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Disengaging drive assembly
Drum drive assembly (black)
Drum drive assembly (black)
Drum drive assembly (cyan and magenta)
Drum drive assembly (cyan/magenta)
Drum drive assembly (yellow)
Drum drive assembly (yellow)
Drum-grounding assembly (black and yellow), short
Drum-grounding assembly (cyan and magenta), long
Environment/humidity sensor; 4610n/4650 Only
ETB assembly; 4600 Only
ETB assembly; 4600 Only
ETB assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
ETB assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
ETB latch assembly
Fan, cartridge
Fan, formatter
Fan, lower (power-supply fan); 4610n/4650 Only
Filter, left side
Filter, rear
Firmware DIMM; 4600 Only
Fixed-level left plate (secures the printer to the feeder); 4650
Only
Fixed-level right plate (secures the printer to the feeder); 4650
Only
RB3-0979-000CN
Formatter simplex/duplex, exchange; 4650 Only
Formatter simplex/duplex, new; 4650 Only
Formatter, duplex, exchange; 4600 Only
Formatter, duplex, new; 4600 Only
Formatter, simplex, exchange; 4600 Only
Formatter, simplex, exchange; 4610n Only
Formatter, simplex, new; 4600 Only
Formatter, simplex, new; 4610n Only
Front cover assembly
Q3999-69002
Q3999-67902
C9661-69002
C9660-67902
C9660-69011
Q7732–69001
C9660-67901
Q7732–67901
RG5-6466-000CN
Part number
RG5-6507-020CN
RG5-7468-000CN
RG5-7468-000CN
RG5-7467-000CN
RG5-7467-000CN
RG5-7469-000CN
RG5-7469-000CN
RG5-6474-000CN
RG5-7362-000CN
WP2-5138-000CN
RG5-6484-070CN
RG5-6484-040CN
RG5-7455-000CN
RG5-7455-000CN
RG5-6456-000CN
RH7-1491-000CN
RH7-1490-000CN
RH7-1607-000CN
RB3-0607-000CN
RB2-8596-000CN
C9712-67908
RB3-0978-000CN
Table and page
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (1 of 2)
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (1 of 2)
510 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 8-27
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Fuse, 125 V, 6.3 A, 110 V
Fuse, 250 V, 20 A, 110 V
Fuse, 250 V, 4 A, 220 V
Fuse, 250 V, 8 A, 220 V
Fuser 220, V; 4600 Only
Fuser assembly, 110 V; 4600 Only
Fuser assembly, 110 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Fuser assembly, 220 V; 4600 Only
Fuser assembly, 220 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Fuser cover, left
Fuser cover, right
Fuser drive assembly; 4600 Only
Fuser drive assembly; 4600 Only
Fuser drive assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Fuser drive assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Fuser power-supply PCA 110 V
Fuser power-supply PCA 220 V
Fuser power-supply PCA, 110 V
Fuser power-supply PCA, 220 V
Fuser, 110 V 4600 Only
Fuser, 110 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Fuser, 220 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Gear 17T
Gear 200T (black and yellow)
Gear 200T (cyan and magenta)
Gear 29T
Gear, pressure
High-voltage power-supply PCA (exchange)
High-voltage power-supply PCA (new)
High-voltage power-supply PCA assembly (exchange)
High-voltage power-supply PCA assembly (new)
HVT terminal assembly
Laser/scanner assembly 4610n/4650 Only
Part number
VD7-2356-301CN
VD7-1732-002CN
VD7-0644-001CN
VD7-1838-001CN
RG5-6517-110CN
RG5-6493-190CN 4600
Only
RG5-7450-110CN
RG5-6517-110CN
RG5-7451-110CN
RF5-3774-030CN
RF5-3775-030CN
RG5-6512-000CN
RG5-6512-000CN
RG5-7452-000CN
RG5-7452-000CN
RG5-6399-030CN
RG5-6400-030CN
RG5-6399-030CN
RG5-6400-050CN
RG5-6493-190CN
RG5-7450-110CN
RG5-7451-000CN
RS7-0139-000CN
RS7-0138-000CN
RS7-0137-000CN
RS7-0136-020CN
RB2-8122-020CN
C9660-69022
RG5-6395-000CN
C9660-69022
RG5-6395-000CN
RG5-6449-000CN
RG5-7475-000CN
Table and page
Alphabetical parts list 511
Table 8-27
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Laser/scanner assembly; 4600 Only
LED PCA assembly
Left cover
Lever, cartridge pressure
Low-voltage power supply, 110 V (exchange)
Low-voltage power supply, 110 V (new)
Low-voltage power supply, 220 V
Low-voltage power-supply assembly, 110 V
Low-voltage power-supply assembly, 220 V
Memory controller PCA
Memory tag antenna PCA
Memory-tag-antenna PCA assembly
Microswitch, front cover
Motor, M6, ETB, DC, brushless, 24 V 4600 Only
Motor, M6, ETB, DC, brushless, 24 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Motor, M7, developing disengaging stepping
Motor, M8, fuser, DS, brushless, 24 V 4600 Only
Motor, M8, fuser, DS, brushless, 24 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Multipurpose tray assembly (tray 1)
Multipurpose tray pickup roller assembly
Operational-panel assembly, 110 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Outrigger assembly; 4650 Only
Paper feeder drive assembly; 4600 Only
Paper feeder drive assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Paper feeder PCA assembly; 4600 Only
Paper feeder PCA assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Paper pickup assembly; 4600 Only
Paper pickup assembly; 4600 Only
Paper pickup assembly; 4600 Only
Paper pickup assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Paper pickup assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Part number
RG5-6390-000CN
RG5-6394-000CN
RB2-8590-040CN
RB2-8195-000CN
C9660-69023
RG5-6410-020CN
RG5-6411-020CN
RG5-6410-020CN
RG5-6411-020CN
RG5-6396-000CN
RG5-5469-000CN
RG5-5469-000CN
WC4-5169-000CN
RH7-1495-000CN
RH7-1605-000CN
RH7-1494-000CN
RH7-1495-000CN
RH7-1605-000CN
RG5-6467-000CN
RG9-1529-000CN
RG5–6432–040CN
RG5-7523-000CN
RG1-4138-020CN
RG5-7541-000CN
RG1-4139-000CN
RG5-7542-000CN
RG5-6469-000CN
RG5-6468-040CN
RG5-6468-000CN
RG5-7453-000CN
RG5-7466-000CN
Table and page
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (2 of 2)
500-sheet paper feeder internal components
500-sheet paper feeder internal components
500-sheet paper feeder internal components
500-sheet paper feeder internal components
512 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
Table 8-27
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Paper pickup assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Paper pickup drive assembly; 4600 Only
Paper pickup drive assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Paper pickup PCA
Paper pickup rollers; 4650 Only
Paper-sensor PCA assembly
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Plate, developer disengagement (change plate)
Plate, drive grounding
Plate, drive interlock
Plate, grounding
Plate, separation assembly
Rear cover assembly
Rear cover, lower
Rear top cover assembly
Right cover
Rod, spring
Rod, spring
Roller, oblique
Roller, paper pickup
Roller, paper pickup
Sensor flag
Separation pad
Solenoid
Spring tension
Spring, scanner support
Spring, tension
Spring, tension
Part number
RG5-7453-040CN
RG5-6469-000CN
RG5-7466-000CN
RG5-6392-000CN
RF5-3739-000CN
RG5-6392-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
RB2-8239-000CN
RB2-8255-000CN
RB2-8225-000CN
RB2-8542-000CN
RF5-3749-000CN
RG5-8592-000CN
RB2–8593–000CN
RG5-6464-000CN
RB2–8591–000CN
RB2-8213-000CN
RB2-8213-000CN
RB1-2155-000CN
RF5-3739-000CN
RF5-3739-000CN
RB2-8498-030CN
RF5-3750-020CN
RH7-5319-000C
RS6-2537-000CN
RB2-8246-000CN
RS6-2511-000CN
RS6-2511-000CN
Table and page
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (2 of 2)
500-sheet paper feeder internal components
Alphabetical parts list 513
Table 8-27
Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Spring, tension
Static eliminator; 4600 Only
Switch, cassette paper size
Switch, push
Toner sensor PCA
Toner-sensor PCA
Top cover assembly
Part number
RS6-2510-000CN
RF5-3773-000CN
WC2-5452-000CN
WC2-5452-000CN
RG5-6393-000CN
RG5-6393-000CN
RG5-6465-000CN
Table and page
514 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Numerical parts list
Table 8-28
Numerical parts list
Part number
C9660-67901
C9660-67902
C9660-69011
C9660-69020
C9660-69022
C9660-69022
C9660-69023
C9661-69002
C9712-67908
Q2635-67910
Q2635–67919
Q3673-67901
Description
Formatter, simplex, new; 4600 Only
Formatter, duplex, new; 4600 Only
Formatter, simplex, exchange; 4600 Only
DC controller PCA (exchange); 4600 Only
High-voltage power-supply PCA (exchange)
High-voltage power-supply PCA assembly (exchange)
Low-voltage power supply, 110 V (exchange)
Formatter, duplex, exchange; 4600 Only
Firmware DIMM; 4600 Only
CompactFlash; 4650 Only
CompactFlash; 4610n Only
500-sheet paper feeder and tray 3 assembly; 4600/4650 Only
Q3674-67901
Q3999-67902
Q3999-69002
Q7732–67901
Q7732–69001
RB1-2155-000CN
RB2-3691-000CN
RB2-8121-000CN
RB2-8122-020CN
RB2-8124-000CN
RB2-8151-020CN
RB2-8195-000CN
RB2-8196-000CN
RB2-8213-000CN
RB2-8213-000CN
RB2-8225-000CN
RB2-8239-000CN
2 x 500-sheet feeder/tray assembly; 4650 Only
Formatter simplex/duplex, new; 4650 Only
Formatter simplex/duplex, exchange; 4650 Only
Formatter, simplex, new; 4610n Only
Formatter, simplex, exchange; 4610n Only
Roller, oblique
Adjuster cover; 4650 Only
Cap, left
Gear, pressure
Cap, right
Arm, pressure
Lever, cartridge pressure
Cover, cartridge; 4610n/4650 Only
Rod, spring
Rod, spring
Plate, drive interlock
Plate, developer disengagement (change plate)
Table and page
500-sheet paper feeder assembly
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (2 of 2)
ENWW Numerical parts list 515
Table 8-28
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
RB2-8246-000CN
RB2-8250-000CN
RB2-8255-000CN
RB2-8349-000CN
RB2-8498-030CN
RB2-8540-000CN
RB2-8541-000CN
RB2-8542-000CN
RB2-8590-040CN
RB2-8596-000CN
RB2–8591–000CN
RB2–8593–000CN
RB3-0607-000CN
RB3-0978-000CN
RB3-0979-000CN
RF5-3739-000CN
RF5-3739-000CN
RF5-3739-000CN
RF5-3749-000CN
RF5-3750-020CN
RF5-3773-000CN
RF5-3774-030CN
RF5-3775-030CN
RG1-4138-020CN
RG1-4139-000CN
RG1-4140-080CN
RG5-5469-000CN
RG5-5469-000CN
Description
Spring, scanner support
Arm, test print
Plate, drive grounding
Arm, paper-size
Sensor flag
Bracket, sensor
Cover, sensor
Plate, grounding
Left cover
Filter, rear
Right cover
Rear cover, lower
Filter, left side
Fixed-level left plate (secures the printer to the feeder); 4650
Only
Fixed-level right plate (secures the printer to the feeder); 4650
Only
Roller, paper pickup
Roller, paper pickup
Paper pickup rollers; 4650 Only
Plate, separation assembly
Separation pad
Static eliminator; 4600 Only
Fuser cover, left
Fuser cover, right
Paper feeder drive assembly; 4600 Only
Paper feeder PCA assembly; 4600 Only
Cassette, 500-sheet paper feeder
Memory tag antenna PCA
Memory-tag-antenna PCA assembly
Table and page
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (1 of 2)
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (1 of 2)
500-sheet paper feeder internal components
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (2 of 2)
500-sheet paper feeder internal components
500-sheet paper feeder internal components
500-sheet paper feeder assembly
516 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
ENWW
RG5-6400-050CN
RG5-6410-020CN
RG5-6410-020CN
RG5-6411-020CN
RG5-6411-020CN
RG5-6413-000CN
RG5-6414-000CN
RG5-6415-000CN
RG5-6418-000CN
RG5-6419-000CN
RG5-6420-000CN
RG5-6422-000CN
RG5-6423-000CN
RG5-6425-000CN
RG5-6427-000CN
RG5-6430-000CN
RG5-6430-000CN
RG5-6431-000CN
RG5-6432-040CN
RG5-6390-000CN
RG5-6391-000CN
RG5-6391-100CN
RG5-6392-000CN
RG5-6392-000CN
RG5-6393-000CN
RG5-6393-000CN
RG5-6394-000CN
RG5-6395-000CN
RG5-6395-000CN
RG5-6396-000CN
RG5-6396-000CN
RG5-6399-030CN
RG5-6399-030CN
RG5-6400-030CN
Table 8-28
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
Laser/scanner assembly; 4600 Only
DC controller PCA assembly; 4600 Only
DC controller PCA (new); 4600 Only
Paper pickup PCA
Paper-sensor PCA assembly
Toner sensor PCA
Toner-sensor PCA
LED PCA assembly
High-voltage power-supply PCA (new)
High-voltage power-supply PCA assembly (new)
Memory controller PCA
Antenna memory PCA assembly
Fuser power-supply PCA 110 V
Fuser power-supply PCA, 110 V
Fuser power-supply PCA 220 V
Fuser power-supply PCA, 220 V
Low-voltage power supply, 110 V (new)
Low-voltage power-supply assembly, 110 V
Low-voltage power supply, 220 V
Low-voltage power-supply assembly, 220 V
Cable, left plate
Cable, relay
Cable, dc power supply
Cable, antenna
Cable, paper-feed
Cable, memory; 4600 Only
Cable, interface
Cable, sensor
Cable/connector, fuser; 4600 Only
Cable, ac, 110 V
Cable/connector, optional feeder
Cable, cassette size (optional)
Cable, cassette size
Control-panel assembly, 110 V; 4600 Only
Table and page
Numerical parts list 517
Table 8-28
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RG5-6433-040CN
RG5-6434-000CN
RG5-6446-000CN
RG5-6449-000CN
RG5-6450-000CN
RG5-6454-000CN
RG5-6456-000CN
RG5-6459-000CN
RG5-6460-000CN
RG5-6464-000CN
RG5-6465-000CN
RG5-6466-000CN
RG5-6467-000CN
RG5-6468-000CN
RG5-6468-040CN
RG5-6469-000CN
RG5-6469-000CN
RG5-6474-000CN
RG5-6476-090CN
RG5-6484-040CN
RG5-6484-070CN
RG5-6492-000CN
RG5-6493-190CN
RG5-6493-190CN 4600
Only
RG5-6507-000CN
RG5-6507-020CN
RG5-6510-000CN
RG5-6512-000CN
RG5-6512-000CN
RG5-6517-110CN
RG5-6517-110CN
RG5-7362-000CN
RG5-7450-110CN
Control-panel assembly, 220 V; 4600 Only
Cable, ac, 220 V
Damper assembly (top cover hinge)
HVT terminal assembly
Cartridge, inlet assembly
Color-registration-detection assembly
ETB latch assembly
Cassette frame left assembly
Cassette-frame right assembly
Rear top cover assembly
Top cover assembly
Front cover assembly
Multipurpose tray assembly (tray 1)
Paper pickup assembly; 4600 Only
Paper pickup assembly; 4600 Only
Paper pickup assembly; 4600 Only
Paper pickup drive assembly; 4600 Only
Drum-grounding assembly (black and yellow), short
Cassette (tray 2); 4600 Only
ETB assembly; 4600 Only
ETB assembly; 4600 Only
Contact-pin assembly
Fuser, 110 V 4600 Only
Fuser assembly, 110 V; 4600 Only
Developing disengaging drive assembly
Disengaging drive assembly
Control-panel cross-member assembly
Fuser drive assembly; 4600 Only
Fuser drive assembly; 4600 Only
Fuser 220, V; 4600 Only
Fuser assembly, 220 V; 4600 Only
Drum-grounding assembly (cyan and magenta), long
Fuser, 110 V; 4610n/4650 Only
518 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams
Table and page
ENWW
ENWW
RG5-7450-110CN
RG5-7451-000CN
RG5-7451-110CN
RG5-7452-000CN
RG5-7452-000CN
RG5-7453-000CN
RG5-7453-040CN
RG5-7455-000CN
RG5-7455-000CN
RG5-7459-000CN
RG5-7466-000CN
RG5-7466-000CN
RG5-7467-000CN
RG5-7467-000CN
RG5-7468-000CN
RG5-7468-000CN
RG5-7469-000CN
RG5-7469-000CN
RG5-7470-000CN
RG5-7470-030CN
RG5-7471-000CN
RG5-7475-000CN
RG5-7480-000CN
RG5-7518-000CN
Table 8-28
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
RG5-7523-000CN
RG5-7529-000CN
RG5-7530-000CN
RG5-7531-000CN
RG5-7534-000CN
Description Table and page
Fuser assembly, 110 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Fuser, 220 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Fuser assembly, 220 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Fuser drive assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Fuser drive assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Paper pickup assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Paper pickup assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
ETB assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
ETB assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Cassette (tray 2); 4610n/4650 Only
Paper pickup assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Paper pickup drive assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Drum drive assembly (cyan and magenta)
Drum drive assembly (cyan/magenta)
Drum drive assembly (black)
Drum drive assembly (black)
Drum drive assembly (yellow)
Drum drive assembly (yellow)
DC controller PCA assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
DC controller PCA; 4610n/4650 Only
Cable, environment sensor; 4610n/4650 Only
Laser/scanner assembly 4610n/4650 Only
Cable/connector, fuser; 4610n/4650 Only
2 x 500 paper feeder driver PCA assembly; 4650 Only
Outrigger assembly; 4650 Only
2 x 500-sheet feeder internal components (2 of 2)
2 x 500-sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly; 4650 Only
2 x 500-sheet feeder upper paper pickup assembly
2 x 500-sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly; 4650 Only
2 x 500-sheet feeder lower paper pickup assembly
2 x 500-sheet paper pickup feeder drive assembly; 4650 Only
2 x 500 lower cassette; 4650 Only
2 x 500-sheet feeder paper pickup drive assembly
Numerical parts list 519
Table 8-28
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
RG5-7535-000CN 2 x 500 upper cassette; 4650 Only
RG5-7541-000CN
RG5-7542-000CN
RS6-2511-000CN
RS6-2537-000CN
RS7-0135-000CN
RS7-0136-020CN
RS7-0137-000CN
RS7-0138-000CN
RS7-0139-000CN
VD7-0644-001CN
VD7-1732-002CN
VD7-1838-001CN
VD7-2356-301CN
WC2-5452-000CN
WC2-5452-000CN
WC4-5169-000CN
RG5-8592-000CN
RG5–6432–040CN
RG9-1529-000CN
RH2-5471-000CN
RH7-1490-000CN
RH7-1491-000CN
RH7-1494-000CN
RH7-1495-000CN
RH7-1495-000CN
RH7-1605-000CN
RH7-1605-000CN
RH7-1607-000CN
RH7-5319-000C
RS6-2510-000CN
RS6-2511-000CN
Paper feeder drive assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Paper feeder PCA assembly; 4610n/4650 Only
Rear cover assembly
Operational-panel assembly, 110 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Multipurpose tray pickup roller assembly
Cable, flat
Fan, formatter
Fan, cartridge
Motor, M7, developing disengaging stepping
Motor, M8, fuser, DS, brushless, 24 V 4600 Only
Motor, M6, ETB, DC, brushless, 24 V 4600 Only
Motor, M8, fuser, DS, brushless, 24 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Motor, M6, ETB, DC, brushless, 24 V; 4610n/4650 Only
Fan, lower (power-supply fan); 4610n/4650 Only
Solenoid
Spring, tension
Spring, tension
Spring, tension
Spring tension
Cam/gear 66T
Gear 29T
Gear 200T (cyan and magenta)
Gear 200T (black and yellow)
Gear 17T
Fuse, 250 V, 4 A, 220 V
Fuse, 250 V, 20 A, 110 V
Fuse, 250 V, 8 A, 220 V
Fuse, 125 V, 6.3 A, 110 V
Switch, cassette paper size
Switch, push
Microswitch, front cover
Table and page
500-sheet paper feeder internal components
500-sheet paper feeder internal components
520 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Table 8-28
Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number Description
WG8-5362-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
WG8-5362-000CN
WP2-5138-000CN
WS3-5746-000CN
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Photo interrupter, TLP1241
Environment/humidity sensor; 4610n/4650 Only
Connector, drawer
Table and page
ENWW Numerical parts list 521
522 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Index
Symbols/Numerics
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder
cassette paper detection
cassette paper sensors,
paper size-detection operations
upper-cassette pickup
500-sheet paper feeder
PCA, removing 242 pickup rollers, removing 242
A
ASCII PJL escape sequences for
auxiliary connection
B
bin
blank images, troubleshooting 353
blank spots, troubleshooting 357
C
cables
cartridges
status page, printing 369, 392
toner-level detection operations
cassette. See Tray 2
clearable warning messages
CMYK sample page, printing
color
ENWW Index 523
variation, troubleshooting 345
color registration detection
color registration detection unit,
color-plane registration calibration
communications, troubleshooting
compact flash, part numbers
components
configuration page, printing 55,
configuration, replacement parts
connecting
control panel
error messages, 4600
error messages, 4600
error messages, 4610n and
error messages, 4610n and
counts, page
covers
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder,
D
dark print, troubleshooting 353
DC controller calibration values, resetting
configuring after replacement
PCA assembly, part numbers
DDR SDRAM
installing (4610n and 4650) 105
default settings, restoring 381
developing cylinder operations
developing disengaging motor
developing disengaging rod,
development block operations 145 development operations 145
diagnostics
DIMMs
524 Index ENWW
verifying installation (4600) 103
dirty pages, troubleshooting 354
disengaging drive assembly
disengaging motor assembly,
disk
file directory, printing 369, 396
drivers
drum
developing disengaging rod,
drive assembly, part numbers
ground assembly, part numbers
home-position sensors,
image formation operations
rotation tracking operations 140
duplexer
E
EIO connections, locating
HP Color LaserJet 4600 models
HP Color LaserJet 4610n model
HP Color LaserJet 4650 models
electrostatic-image formation block
embedded Web server
enabling DIMMs
HP Color LaserJet 4610n and
engine control system operations
envelopes
environment sensor (4610n and
4650)
environmental specifications 14,
error messages
4610n and 4650 (alphabetical)
4610n and 4650 (numerical)
ESD (electrostatic discharge) 174
ETB (transfer kit)
page count, resetting 383, 425
ETB assembly
F
factory settings, restoring 381
fans
Fast InfraRed pod
file directory, printing 369, 396
FIR pod
ENWW Index 525
flash memory card, installing
flowchart, troubleshooting 261
font DIMMs
installing (4610n and 4650) 105
formatter
configuring after replacement
frame type parameters, Novell
front cover
fuser
drive assembly, part numbers
inlet paper sensor, removing
power supply, part numbers
fuser kit
page count, resetting 383, 425
fusing
G
glossy paper
gray settings
H
hard disk
file directory, printing 369, 396
heater temperature control 126
high-voltage contact blocks,
high-voltage power supply
HP Instant Support Professional
HP Jetdirect print servers
installing (4600 and 4650) 114
operating systems supported
HP LaserJet Utility, Macintosh
HP Printing Supplies Returns and
HP Toolbox
humidity environment sensor operations
environmental specifications
I
image formation
image fuser kit. See fuser kit image quality, troubleshooting
Web sites for print quality 343
image stabilization control 155
image transfer kit. See transfer kit
(ETB)
526 Index ENWW
image-formation operations 136
imaging drum. See drum
Information tab, embedded Web
initializing
installation
flash memory card (4610n and
HP Jetdirect print servers
HP Jetdirect print servers
Instant Support Professional
internal components
ISPE (Instant Support
J
jams
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder 338
print quality, troubleshooting
Jetdirect print servers
installing (4600 and 4650) 114
operating systems supported
K
L
label, control-panel
languages, printer
laser beam exposure operations
laser statement for Finland 35
laser/scanner
LaserJet Utility, Macintosh 69, 72
left cover
life expectancies, supplies 87
light print, troubleshooting 352
links, embedded Web server 387
Linux support
locking control panel menus 82
low-voltage power supply
M
Macintosh
installing network software 72
media
multi-feeds, troubleshooting
ENWW Index 527
size-detection operations
troubleshooting print quality
media jams. See jams memory
verifying installation (4600) 103
memory controller PCA, removing
memory-tag antenna PCAs,
menus, control panel
messages
4610n and 4650 (alphabetical)
4610n and 4650 (numerical)
misplaced images, troubleshooting
model (product) number, locating
motors developing disengaging,
multi-feeds, troubleshooting 341
multipurpose tray. See Tray 1
N
NetWare, Novell frame type parameters,
Networking tab, embedded Web
networks
communications,
installing HP Jedtdirect print
installing HP Jedtdirect print
installing Macintosh software
installing Windows software 71
operating systems supported
nonvolatile memory
Novell NetWare frame type parameters,
NVRAM
O
on/off switch, locating
operating environment
operating systems supported 63,
operations
environment sensor (4610n
ETB (electrostatic transfer/
heater temperature control 126
image stabilization control 155
528 Index ENWW
ordering parts and supplies 39,
output bin
output quality, troubleshooting
overlay, control-panel
P
page counts
paper
multi-feeds, troubleshooting
size-detection operations
troubleshooting, print quality
paper jams. See jams paper path
paper pickup assembly
paper pickup driver unit, removing
paper pickup rollers, removing
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder 254
paper pickup sensor PCA,
paper pickup unit, removing 192
paper pickup-drive assembly, part
paper-size-detection switch,
parallel connection
part numbers
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder 496
color registration detection
control panel overlay and label
DC controller PCA assembly
disengaging drive assembly
fuser assembly 473, 511, 518 fuser drive assembly 473,
paper pickup-drive assembly
static eliminator 473, 514, 516
ENWW Index 529
parts
PCAs
PCL font lists, printing 369, 396
personalities
photographic drum. See drum
pickup assembly
pickup rollers, removing
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder 254
PJL escape sequences for
ports
power supplies
power switch, locating
power-on
PowerSave
pre-troubleshooting checklist 259
primary charging operations 144
primary exposure operations 143
print cartridges
status page, printing 369, 392
toner-level detection operations
print quality, troubleshooting
printer drivers
printer languages
PS font lists, printing 369, 398
Q
quality, troubleshooting
R
rear cover
530 Index ENWW
rear top cover
repetitive defects, troubleshooting
replacement intervals, supplies 87
replacement parts configuration
replacing
RGB sample page, printing 369,
right cover
rollers
500-shet paper feeder,
image-formation operations
pickup/feed system operations
repetitive defects,
S
screws
sensors
2 x 500-sheet paper feeder,
2 x 500-sheet paper-feeder,
drum home-position, removing
environment (4610n and
environment (4610n and
environment (4610n and
fuser inlet paper, removing 234
image stabilization control 155
transparency detection (OHT)
separation pad, removing from
settings
Settings tab, embedded Web
setup. See installation
size detection, paper 162, 172
size-detection switch, removing
skewed pages, troubleshooting
small-size paper detection 164
software
installing on Macintosh networks
installing on Windows networks
solenoids
specifications
speed
static eliminator, part number
status and alerts software 387
status page, printing 369, 392
supplies
ENWW Index 531
status page, printing 369, 392
swatch book color matching 346
T
temperature environment sensor operations
environmental specifications
tests
toner
toner cartridges. See print cartridges
toner-level detection
Toolbox. See HP Toolbox
top cover
transfer kit (ETB)
page count, resetting 383, 425
transparencies
Tray 1
pickup roller and separation
Tray 2
paper pickup roller, removing
paper size-detection operations
paper-size detection switch,
Tray 3. See 500-sheet paper feeder
Tray 3 and Tray 4. See 2 x 500sheet paper feeder troubleshooting
error messages, 4600
error messages, 4610n and
error messages, 4610n and
error messages,4600
print quality pages, printing 403
U
UEL (universal exit language) 364
UNIX support
532 Index ENWW
unlocking control panel menus
USB connection
V
voltage
W
warning messages, clearable
warranty
Web sites
weight equivalence table, paper
Windows
installing network software 71
wrinkled pages, troubleshooting
ENWW Index 533
534 Index ENWW
© 2005 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com
*Q3668-90970*
*Q3668-90970*
Q3668-90970
advertisement
Key Features
- Professional-quality color printing
- High-performance output
- Easy-to-use control panel
- Networking capabilities
- Paper-handling options
- Automatic duplex printing (models with n)
- PowerSave mode